W?°?@CALENDAR capWano cdlege calendar 1977-78 2055 Purcell Way North Vancouver, B.C. Telephone 986-1911 V7J 3H5 A Publicly Supported Community College Serving North Vancouver, West Vancouver and Howe Sound School Districts 1 Table of Contents INTRODUCTION COLLEGE TO C A P I L A N O C O L L E G E 3 COUNCIL 4 C O L L E G E ADMINISTRATION 4 FACULTY ....5 CALENDAR F O R 1977-78 .' ADMISSION 8 t 11 REGISTRATION 12 FINANCIAL 14 INFORMATION INSTRUCTIONAL INFORMATION 15 S T U D E N T S E R V I C E S A N D FACILITIES 17 COLLEGE PROGRAMS ACADEMIC CAREER STUDIES/UNIVERSITY TRANSFER 21 PROGRAMS 25 VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS 45 COMMUNITY EDUCATION AND SERVICES 51 COURSE DESCRIPTIONS 53 INDEX CAMPUS 101 MAP 104 Cover and titlepage illustrations by Holly Owen of the Commercial Art Photographs by Mo Simpson Compiled by Information Services Design & Doodles by Kim Steer Typesetting & Layout by Granville Press Printing by College Printers 2 Program Introduction to Capilano College GROWTH OF THE C O L L E G E C O U R S E OFFERINGS Capilano C o l l e g e is a North Shore based community college serving North Vancouver, West Vancouver and Howe Sound. The C o l l e g e opened in September 1968 with classes held for 300 students in West Vancouver High School. At the time, the administrative offices were located in the basement of the school. An interesting selection of credit courses are offered that lead either to transfer into third year at the provincial universities or to a certificate or diploma in the C a r e e r Division. Non-credit special interest courses are offered through the Community Education Division (described in a separate publication) and Vocational and upgrading courses are run under the a u s p i c e s of the Career Division. In August 1973, the C o l l e g e opened Phase 1 at the Lynnmour site in North Vancouver with 50,000 square feet of space. Due to tremendous space limitations, the C o l l e g e acquired 84,000 square feet of prefabricated building space. These buildings are now located just north of the original Lynnmour campus. This main core of the campus is nestled in the trees overlooking the north end of the Second Narrows Bridge. It has been acclaimed as one of the most beautiful natural settings of ail the colleges in British Columbia. The original building on the Lynnmour site houses the Registration Office, the Library, faculty offices, the large Cafetheatre and loungeareas. Pathways through the trees and planted areas lead to separate buildings for the Biology, Chemistry, Physics and Geography labs and the Daycare Centre. Phase 1 Expansion was completed for September 1976 and added a further 50,000 square feet of space which includes a Dynamics Lab and a three-storey Tower building. The business office for the College is located here along with the Art studios, Retail Fashion classrooms, and other offices. A Field House was also completed that year, in conjunction with the District of North Vancouver. It is situated above the District playing field and houses a Universal Gymnasium, saunas and showers. The C o l l e g e is looking ahead to construction of Phase II of the building plan which will replace the existing portable structures with permanent buildings. OBJECTIVES FOR T H E C O L L E G E Capilano C o l l e g e Council (the governing body of the College) has outlined a policy statement describing the objectives of Capilano College, which are: 1. To provide two years of quality and comprehensive postsecondary education to residents of the North Shore and Howe Sound school districts who would, therefore, be more effectively served than by other institutions. 2. To provide a wide range of credit and non-credit courses and to ensure that the credit courses maintain standards of transfer with other degree-granting institutions where applicable. 3. To identify the needs of the community and to ensure that the curriculum remains flexible in order to meet changing community requirements. 4. To ensure that admissions are open to all who will benefit. 5. To provide career and vocational training and job upgrading. 6. To promote the concept of Community Education in the provision of general interest programs on a cost-recovery basis. 7. To offer some programs in decentralized facilities as close as possible to the area of demand, within practical limits, ensuring that community needs are met with service at the community level. 8. To recognize the necessity of establishing priorities in the objectives of the C o l l e g e to utilize the resources available. 9. To ensure that the C o l l e g e is run to meet the needs of the community it serves, and does not exist for the benefit of any special interest group. College Council College Administration COUNCIL MEMBERS APPOINTED BY THE OF EDUCATION Mr. Ian G Edgar Ms. C e c i l i a Low Mr. P C D . (Peter) Powell Ms. Hilda R i z u n Dr. Lalit M. Srivastava Mr. Jack K. Stathers DEPARTMENT GENERAL ADMINISTRATION Douglas K. Jardine, B . A . S c , Ph.D. Principal (Acting) K.H. Thiel, Graduate Engineer, M.B.A. Bursar Alan P.O. Smith, B.A., M.A. Director of Planning David Allen, B.Sc. Registrar Dave Brewer Director of Supplies and Services Graham Newman, F.I.C.B. Accounting Supervisor Jim Dillion, B.A., L L B . Director of Personnel Ken H u g h e s Facilities Supervisor COUNCIL MEMBERS E L E C T E D BY S C H O O L DISTRICT NO. 44 (NORTH VANCOUVER) Mr. Cliff R. Adkins Mr. M. (Don) Burbidge COUNCIL MEMBERS E L E C T E D BY S C H O O L DISTRICT NO. 45 (WEST VANCOUVER) Ms Audrey Sojonky Ms. Lilian Thiersch COUNCIL MEMBERS E L E C T E D BY S C H O O L DISTRICT NO. 48 (HOWE SOUND) Mr. T.B.M. (Slim) Fougberg Mr. T.J. (Jim) MacDonald REPRESENTATIVES ELECTED C O L L E G E STUDENT SOCIETY Ms. Punam Khosla Mr. Dave Mattatall BY THE CAPILANO REPRESENTATIVES E L E C T E D BY C O L L E G E FACULTY ASSOCIATION Mr. Gordon Wilson Dr. Robert Rennie THE CAPILANO REPRESENTATIVES E L E C T E D A.U.C.E. L O C A L NO. 4 Ms. Carol Tudan Ms Pat Pope BY THE INSTRUCTION S R . Gilbert, B.A., M.A. Dean of Academic Studies and Educational Support Sen/ices (Acting) Harold B. Kirchner, B.Ed., M.Sc. Dean of Career/Vocational Programs Dirk Smit, B.A., M.A. Dean of Community Education D. Affleck, B.A., G.E., M.Lib. Head Librarian Daniel R. Dolphin, B . S c , M.B.A., M.Sc. Director of Training for Business and Industry, Community Education STAFF UNION, 4 Clark, H.., B.H.E. (Brit. Col.), T.T. Dipl. (Brit. C o l ) , Dipl. Alliance Francaise (Paris), Retail Fashion and Coordinator Adam-Moodley, K., B.A. (Natal), U.E.D. (Natal), M.A. (Michigan), Ph.D. (Brit. C o l ) , Sociology Adler, M.T., B.A. (Toronto), M.S.W. (Brit. Col.), Early Childhood Education Affleck, D.E., B.A. (Sask), B.Ed. (Sask), M.Lib. (Washington), Head Librarian Alborg, G , B.A. (Reading), M.A. (Brit. C o l ) , Stan. Teach (U.K.), Life Credit (San Diego), Administrative Science and Office Technology Alderson, S.A., B.A. (Antioch), M.A. (Ohio State), English Clark, S., B.X. (Portland State), L L . B . (Brit. C o l ) , B u s i n e s s Management Clifford, J . , B.A. (Brit. C o l ) , M.A. (Brit. C o l ) , English Connell, P L , B.A. (Brit C o l ) , M.A. (Brit. C o l ) , English Cook, R.D., B.A. (Toronto), Dipl., M e d i a Resources Cotter, E.H., B.F.A. ^Oklahoma), M.A. (Penn State), M.F.A. (Oklahoma), Art Coupe, R., B.A. (Tasmania), Ph.D. (Brit. Col.), English Coupey, P L , B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Brit. C o l ) , English Creer, B., B.Ed. (Brit. Col.), Outdoor Recreation Cumella, A.W.M., B.A. (York), Primary Specialist Cert. (Toronto), Perm. Teaching Cert. (Toronto), Interim Prof. Cert, of B.C., Graduate Dupl. (Brit. Col.), Early Childhood Education Day, E., B.A. (Radcliffe), French Amon, N.E., B.A. (Kent), M.A. (Simon Fraser), Economics Andrews, M , B.A (Denison), M.A. (Brit. C o l ) , History Armstrong. K., Theatre and Women's Studies Athaide, D., B.Sc. (McGill), M.Sc. Prof. Teacher's Cert. (Brit. Col.), B.T.S.D. Avery, D P . , B.A. (York), M.Ed. (Toronto), Psychology Azaroff, P., B.A. (Heb U Dixon, J . E . , B.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Brit. Col.), Philosophy and Coordinator of Fine Arts, Religious Studies, Philosophy, Humanities and Theatre Dow, B., R.I A., B u s i n e s s Management Duvall, J . E . , B.A. (Brit. C o l ) , Dipl. E d . (Sask), B.T.S.D. Israel), M e d i a Resources Bagshaw, R., B.Comm. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Colorado), M.Ed. (Brit. Col.) Counsellor Bannister, J . , B.A. (Brit. Col.), B.S.W. (Brit. C o l ) , Cert of Ed. (Oxford), M.Ed. (Toronto), Nat. Dipl. Distrib., B.T.S.D. Barbazuk, Wm., B.A. ( S a s k ) , B . E d . ( S a s k ) , B u s i n e s s Duzita, Wayne A., B.Comm. (Brit. Col.) Business Management Dyke, S . L , Inst. Tech and Art (Calgary), Art Management Basham, D.F., Outdoor Recreation Eastcott, R.W., Sr. Cert. (Vancouver School of Art), R.C.A., Art Battersby, M „ B.A. (N.Y.U.), Philosophy Bellmaine, M., A A (Colorado Women's College), B.A. (Stanford), M.A. (Cal. State), English, Co-ordinator, Literature Ewing, K . J , B.A. (Michigan), M.Sc. (Michigan), Geography, Outdoor Recreation and Social Sciences, External Coordinator Fahlman, M L , B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Toronto), English, Coordinator, Composition Falls. L , A.R.C.T. (Toronto), B.Mus. (Brit. C o l ) , M.Mus. (Brit. Col), Music Fawcett, S., B.A. (S.F.U.), M.A. ( S . F . U ) , English, Secretary of General Studies Fenge, T., B.Sc. (U. of Wales), M.A. (U. of Victoria), Geography FitZ-Earle, M., B.Sc. (Nottingham), M Sc. (Toronto), P h D . (Toronto), Biology Fladell, E., Advertising C o u r s e C . C . N . Y . , Business Management Forst, G., B.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Brit. C o l ) , English Foster, H.R.K., B.A. (Queen's), M.A., L L B . (Brit. C o l ) , A d ministrative Science and Office Technology Freeman, M „ B.Sc. (Brit. C o l ) , M.Sc. (Cal. Tech.), Ph.D. (Brit. Bennett, M l , B.Ed. Elem. (Brit. C o l ) , Administrative Science and Office Technology Bentley, A.E.T., B.Sc. (Brit. C o l ) , A . M . (Missouri), Ph.D. (Missouri), Mathematics and Coordinator Best, E.R., B.Sc. (Man.), Retail Fashion B i g g i n s , P., B.A. ( M a n c h e s t e r ) , A L A (College Tech Manchester). B . L S . (Toronto), M L S . (Toronto), M.A. (Simon Fraser), Reference and Circulation Librarian and Coordinator B i z z o c c h i , J.V., B.A. (Michigan), T e a c h i n g Cert (Sec.) (Michigan), M e d i a Resources Boyde, J . E . , B.A. (Simon Fraser), Outdoor Recreation Bradbury, B., B.A. (Victoria U. of Wellington, N.Z.), M.A. (Simon Fraser), History and Social S c i e n c e Budget Coordinator Brown, J . , B.Sc. (Man.), P.G. (Van. G e n ) , Early Childhood Education Col.), Physics Furstenwald, C , B.A. (Mexico), Spanish Gallacher, R.J., B.A. (Brit. C o l ) , Teachers Cert. (Brit. C o l ) , M.A. Brown, T.J., B.Sc. (Bristol), Geography Burns, W., L L . B . (Brit. C o l ) , Legal Studies (Brit. C o l ) , Religion Gargrave, A . J . , L L . B . (Brit. Col.), Legal Studies Gibson, W m . G , B.A. (Sask), Dipl. E d . (Sask.), Dipl Ed (Calgary), M.Sc. (Brit. C o l ) , Biology and Coordinator Gilchrist, A.B., Ph.D. ( S . F . U ) , Chemistry and Coordinator of Burstein, F„ B.A. (Wash. St. Louis), M.A. (Boston), Ph.D. (Boston), English, Humanities, Coordinator, W o m e n ' s Studies Bury, N., B.A. (Brit. C o l ) , A.C.I., Administrative Science and Office Technology Cantin Orr-Ewing, L , B.A. (Montreal), M.A. (Simon Fraser), French Chemistry, Physics and Geology Glass, R., B.A. (Calif.), M.A. (Southern Calif), French and English Goff, Wm.S., B.Sc. (Victoria), M.Sc. (Brit. C o l ) , Mathematics Gregory, R., B.A. (Yale), M.A. (Brit. C o l ) , Economics Groves, P.A., B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Brit. Col.), Sociology Gruen, F„ B. Management Eng (Rennsselaer), B u s i n e s s Management Carter, A.W., B.Sc. (U. of Alberta), C & G Certificate (London), Business Management Carter, S., B.A. (Louisiana), Cert, of Ed. (Louisiana), M. of Lib (Wash.), Librarian, Reference and Orientation and Coordinator Champion, H., B.Sc. (South Africa), B.Sc. (South Africa), Laboratory Supervisor, Chemistry Chester, Neil, B.Ed (Saskatchewan), B.A. (P.E.), Saskatchewan), M.P.E. (Brit. Col.), Athletic Coordinator and Outdoor Recreation Hankin, B., B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Wash), German Humanities Coordinator Heidt, K M . , Ph D (U of Hamburg), Anthropology Henry, M l . , B.A. (Alta), M.Sc. (Brit. C o l ) , Physics 5 and Hind, J . , B.A. (Simon Fraser), B.T.S.D. Mallory, D.J., B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Brit. Col.), Mathematics Marliave, J.B., B.Sc. (Wash.), Ph.D. (Brit. Col.), Biology Marshall, D.F., Elem. " B " Cert. B.C., Art Marshall, James R., Dipl. Operations Management (B.C.l.T), Systems Analysis & Design (College of New Caledonia), Business Management Maxwell, E., LL.B. (Brit. Col.), Legal Studies Mees, M., Art Hindmarch, G , B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Brit. Col.), English Hodgins, B.W., B.P.E. (Brit. C o l ) , Outdoor Recreation Irvine, R.F., Teaching Training Cert. (Sask.), B T S D Jacquet, J.V., French Language Lab Supervisor, Coordinator of Modern Languages Jantzen, D., B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (York), English Jarvis, James, Recreation B.A., M.A., Reg Lands Architect, Jean, P., B.A. (McMaster), M.A. (Windsor), Outdoor Psychology Jelensky, M., St. John's R e d Cross, Outdoor Michaels, L , B.Sc. (Alta), B.Ed. (Alta), Communications Business Management Recreation Mier, P L . , B.A. (S.F.U.), M.A. (Toronto), Political Science and Jensen, J . , B.A. (Brit. C o l ) , M.A. (Brit C o l ) , Fine Arts General Studies Jones, D., B.A. (Dalhousie), M.A. (Dalhousie), Counsellor Miles, C , B.A. (Brit. C o l ) , M M deJong, Carl, B.A. (Brit. C o l ) , M.B.A. (U. of W. Ont), Business and (Victoria), Music Miller, A., B.A. (Brit. Col.), Retail Fashion Management Kassam, N., L L . M . (Yale), Legal Studies Moe, S.E., B.A. (Mexico), M.A. (Mexico), Psychology and Keating, T, B.Sc. (Nova Scotia), Retail Fashion Women's Studies Kelgard, D.S., B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Brit. Col.), Anthropology Molnar, F.S., Dipl. Fine Arts (Pennsylvania), Art Kellington, tp., A.A.S., M e d i a Spec. Cert. (Cap College), M e d i a Resources Moseley, B., B.A. (Calif), M.B.A. (Calif.), Business Management Kempo, O , B . A (Alta), Dialogue Canada M.A. (Brit. C o l ) , P h D Mullen, Brian, B.Sc. (Brit. Col.), M.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Business Management Murray, R., B.S. (San Fran. State U.), Administrative Science and Office Technology (Brit. Col.), Kenny, C , B.A. (Georgia), R e g . Cert. M.T. (N.A.M.T.), M u s i c Naumann, R., Vancouver School of Art, Cert, and Credential, (In- Kilgore, G.S., B.A. (New College), M.A. (Simon Fraser), History Kilian, C , B.A. (Columbia), M.A. (Simon Fraser), C o m munications stituto Allende), Art Nodwell, A.K., B.Mus. (Brit. C o l ) , M.Mus. (Victoria), M u s i c Norris, Kingan, E.N., N.D D. (Blackpool), A.T.D. (Manchester), R.C.A., Teachers Cert. (Manchester), Teachers Cert. B.C., Art Kiss, A., B.Ed. (Brit C o l ) , Administrative Technology M.A. LeCouteur, P., B.Sc. (Auckland), M.Sc. (Auckland), Ph.D. (Calif.), Chemistry Plant, L P . , I.D., Administrative Science and Office Technology and Legal Studies Podolak, P., Retail Fashion Powley, Michael, B.Ed. (Brit. C o l ) , M.B.A. (S F.U.), Outdoor Recreation Priester, C.L., F.C.B.A. (Queens), B.A. (Sir George Williams). M.A. (Brit C o l ) , Business Management and Coordinator Price, C M . , B.S.Mus. (Danbury State), M.A. (Columbia), M . S C . (Oregon), Reference Librarian and Coordinator Ramsey, Frank, B.Sc. (McGill), B.T.S.D Read, B.A. (Brit. C o l ) , M.Sc. (Brit. C o l ) , Ph.D. Reid, B., B.A. (Alta), Communications Reid, F., M.A. (Edinburgh), French Rennie, L.J.M., B.A. (Brigham Young), Early C h i l d h o o d Education Rennie, R., B.S. (Brigham Young), M.S. (Brigham Young), Ph.D. McKeown, T., B.A. (Brit Col.), M.A. (Brit. C o l ) , English Art, D.W., (McGill), Chemistry Mcintosh, C , B Comm. (Brit. C o l ) , C.G.A. (Brit. Col.), Business Management of Art Penn, M.H., B.A (Alta), M.A. (Brit. C o l ) , Counsellor McGillivray, B.P., B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Brit. Col.), Geography, Social S c i e n c e s Personnel and Evaluation Coordinator School Business Paulson, J . C . , B.F.A. (Pacific Lutheran), Coordinator. Loblaw, Douglas, B.A. (U. of Toronto), Business Management Ludgate, A., Lab. Supervisor, Administrative Science and Office Technology McDonnell, L , B.H.E. (Brit. Col.), Lab Supervisor, Biology McGrady, L.B., B.A. (Toronto), LL.B. (Manitoba), Labour Studies Vancouver Cert., Pareis, E.N., B.Sc. (Rutgers), Ph.D. (Texas), Psychology Pass, J . , B.A. (Brit. C o l ) , B.T.S.D. Lee, G , B.Sc. (Brit. Col.), M.Sc. (Brit. C o l ) , Ph.D. (Brit. C o l ) , Physics, Division Chairman, Natural Sciences Leflufy, R., Business Management Leskard, S., Dipl. (St. Martin's London), Art Lind, K.M., B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Brit. C o l ) , Anthropology Linschoten, R., B A A . (Ryerson), M e d i a Resources Little, D.V., R.N. St. Paul's, P.H.N. (Brit. Col.), Early Childhood Education George, Accountant Oberndorf, Allen G., B.S. (U. of New Haven), M.I.M., Thunderbird G r a d , S c h o o l of International B u s i n e s s , B u s i n e s s Management van den Ouden, C , Graphic Dipl., Vancouver, M e d i a Resources Palffy-Muhoray, P., B.A.Sc. (Brit. C o l ) , M.A.Sc. (Brit. C o l ) , Physics Pape, A G . , B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Simon Fraser), M e d i a Resources Kobylansky, K.A., B.Mus. (Brit. Col.), M.Mus. (Brit. Col.), M u s i c Kowall, T.W., A . B . (Stanford), M.A. (Brandeis), Learning Assistance Program MacLachlan, Chartered O'Connor, R., Grad. Ryerson, Business Management Science and Office Lavalle, E M , B.Comm. (Brit. C o l ) , LL.B. (Brit. C o l ) , (Duke), Political Science R.W., Management Chicago (Brit. C o l ) , Academy of Fine Art, Art Mathematics Maclagan, D.T., A . O . C . A , R.I.D.I.A, I.D.C, Art Reveley, M.T., B.Mus. (Brit. C o l ) , M u s i c McLaren, D., Cert. Sheridan College School of Design, B.H.Sc. Richards, V , Senior Litigation Secretary, Administration Science and Office Technology and Legal Studies (Guelph), Art Richmond, L.J., M Art. E d . (W. Wash. State College), Teacher Cert. (London, England), Art Richter, Mervin, B.A. (U. of S a s k ) , B.Ed. (U. of S a s k ) , Business Management McLean, L , B.A (Brit. Col.), Legal Studies McMaster, N. B.A. (Brit. C o l ) , M u s i c Therapy, M u s i c MacNeill, M., B.A. (Alta), M.A. (Man), PhD. (Calgary). Psychology Mah, J . G . , B.A. (Brit. C o l ) , B.S.W. (Brit. C o l ) . M.S.W. (Toronto), Counsellor Ricker, N.A., B.A (Calif). M.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Brit. Col.), Biology and Outdoor Recreation 6 Trew, M., B.A. (Kansas), M.A. (Missouri), Ph.D. (Michigan), Women's Program Developer Robinson, Dennis, C.A., Business Management Rodger, E.G., Lucie Clayton School, Dupl. (London Eng.), Retail Fashion Rosenberg, A . C , B.A. (Toronto). M.A. (Toronto), Fine Arts Ross, B.A., B. Journalism (Missouri), Teachers Cert. (Brit. C o l ) , Administrative Science and Office Technology Russell, Shirley, St. John's First Aid Certificate, B.T.S.D Saint-Pierre, Guy, B.A. (Sir George Williams), Licence es Lettres (U. de Montreal), M.A. (U. de Montreal), French Salter, R., B.A. (N.Y. State), M.A. (N.Y. State), Sociology Sanderson, C , B.Sc. (England), Lab Supervisor, Biology Sanguinetti, S.P., B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Brit. C o l ) , Political Troup, V . N . B.Sc. (McMaster), M.Sc. (Brit. C o l ) , Biology Trowbridge, Brian, B.A., (Carleton), LL.B. (Brit. C o l ) , Business Management Vick, A . H . , B.Comm. (Brit. Col.), Business Management Vickars, K . B.Ed., Perm Teaching Cert. (Brit. Col.), Dipl. Pitman's Business College, Administrative Science and Office Technology Wade, L.K. B.Sc. (Brit. Col.), M.Sc. (Brit. C o l ) , Ph.D. (Australia), Biology Walker, Alan, L L . B . (Brit. Col.), Legal Studies Waterman, A., B.Sc. (Brit. Col.), M.Sc. (Simon Fraser), B.C. Teaching Certificate, Mathematics White, B P . , B.A. (Simon Fraser), M.A. (Simon Fraser), Outdoor Recreation and Coordinator Whittaker, E N . , B.A. (Brit. C o l ) , English Williamson, J . , B.A. Teaching Cert., (Victoria), Legal Studies Williamson, L P . , B.A. (Victoria), M.A. (Carleton), LL.B. (Brit. Col.), Legal Studies Science, Social Science Division Chairperson Sayre, J . , B.S.B.A. (Denver), M.A. (Boston), Economics Schermbrucker, Wm.G., B.A. (Capetown), P.Grad. Cert, in Ed. (London), M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Brit. Col.), English Schmidt, L; B.Ed. (Alta), M.Ed. (Alta), Ph.D. (Alta), Counsellor Siddall, P., Dipl. Royal College of Art, London, England, Retail Fashion Siegrist, B.G., M.B.A. (Simon Fraser), Counsellor and Coordinator Sinclair, D.. Commercial Guitarist, Music Sommers, C M . , B.A. (Minnesota). English Speer, H.L.. B.A. (San Fran.), M.A. (Princeton), Ph.D. (Princeton), Biology Wilson, G.F.D., B.Sc. (N.Y. State), M.A. (Brit. C o l ) , Geography Wittman, M., B.A. munications (Toronto), M.A. (Brit. Col), Com- Wood, A . J . , National Dipl. in Design (Liverpool), Art Teachers Dipt (Liverpool), Art Woodall, Heather, Sir George Williams School of Art (Montreal), Art Worman, E , B.A. (Toronto), Dipl. C h i l d Study (Toronto), Early Childhood Education and Coordinator Wright, Richard, Outdoor Recreation Yackness, H. Barry, B.Comm. (Brit. Col.), M.B.A. (Simon Fraser). Business Management Yasinski, Daniel, Art Stewart, V.J., Royal Society of Arts Dipl., Administrative Science and Office Technology^ Stewart, W., B.A. (Simon Fraser), Administrative Science and Office Technology Taylor, M., B.Sc. (Alta), Retail Fashion Thomlinson, A . G . , B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.Sc. (Brit C o l ) , Prof. Teacher's Cert. (Brit. Col.), B.T.S.D and Geology Tilley, W . F . L , B.Ed. (Brit. Col.), Coordinator, Administrative Science and Office Technology Program, Coordinator of Legal Studies Toth, Endre, B.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Business Management Young, D.E., B A (Simon Fraser), S.R.N. (London), S . C . M . (Scotland), B.T.S.D. Zimmer, E., B.A. (Vermont), M.A. (N.Y.), Communications Zimmerman, W.A., Art ( Towson, K.V., B.Sc. (Simon Fraser), Mathematics 7 Calendar for 1977/78 The College year is divided into two terms of approximately fifteen weeks each. FALL TERM 1977 August 2-26 Fall 1977 Mail Registration (Only tor North Shore residents or returning students) August 29 Course Change Day 10.00 a m . to 9:00 p.m. (For students who have registered by mail, but need to alter their course registration) August 30 In-Person Registration 10:00 a.m. to 9:00 p.m. September 5 Labour Day - College C l o s e d September 6 C l a s s e s commence October 7 Deferred fees due. Last day to receive 80% refund of tuition and lab fees. October 10 Thanksgiving Day - College C l o s e d November 10 Last day to officially change a course or withdraw from a course. November 11 Remembrance Day - College C l o s e d November 21-December 16 Mail Registration (Only for North Shore residents or returning students) December 12-16 Examination Week December 16 Last day of classes December 26 Boxing Day - College C l o s e d December 27 College C l o s e d 8 SPRING TERM 1978 January 1 New Year's Day January 2 College C l o s e d January 4 Course C h a n g e Day 10:00 a m . - 9:00 p m. (For students who have registered by mail, but need to alter their course registration) January 5 In-Person Registration 10:00 a m . - 9:00 p.m. January 9 Classes Commence February 9 Deferred fees due. Last day to receive 80% refund of tuition and lab fees February 23 & 24 Mid-term break. C o l l e g e C l o s e d March 9 Last day to officially change or withdraw from a course. March 24 Good Friday - College C l o s e d March 27 Easter Monday - College C l o s e d April 3 April 28 April Mail Registration 17-21 Examination Week April 21 SUMMER Last day of classes. TERM 1978 M a y 4 In-Person Registration 10:00 a m . to 9:00 p.m. M a y 22 Victoria Day - College C l o s e d 9 ADMISSION PROCEDURE 1. Application for admission to the C o l l e g e may be made at any time. 2. Obtain an Admission application form from the Registrar's Office. Timetables giving the times of course offerings will be available approximately seven weeks prior to the commencement of any semester. 3. Complete the application form and bring or mail it to the Registrar's Office. 4. Persons wishing to enter full-time or part-time programs of studies are advised to consult with a Counsellor and/or instructor before applying to the College. 5. Completion of admission will be formalized by the Registrar's Office which will return a "Permit to Register" to the applicant. GENERAL ADMISSION POLICY Any person who is 18 or older and who is a Canadian Citizen or Landed Immigrant is eligible for admission to Capilano College. Persons under 18 years of age are also eligible if they are in at least one of the following categories: i) They have a B.C. Secondary School graduation certificate or equivalent educational records. ii) They are secondary school students attending a school in the C o l l e g e Region (West and North Vancouver and Howe Sound school districts) and have the written recommendation of their school principal. iii) Persons at least 16 years of age who can satisfy a College Counsellor that they possess an interest in and an aptitude for a vocation for which the College provides instruction, may be eligible to enter the related College vocational program. ADMISSION OF PERSONS FROM OTHER ADMISSION TO HOWE SOUND C O U R S E S Each semester Capilano College offers a limited program of courses at its Learning Centre in Squamish. Students from Squamish and other Howe Sound communities who wish to attend these courses should contact the Squamish Centre (8925322) for Admission details. COUNTRIES A s per the general policy above, persons from other countries will only be eligible for admission if they can present documentation indicating that they are Landed Immigrants in Canada. PERMANENT STUDENT NUMBER When a student is first admitted to the College s/he is assigned a permanent student number. This number controls the Student's Record, Statement of Grades and College Identification Card. A student's number will change only if the student's name is changed. The student is requested to familiarize him/herself with this number. LANGUAGE REQUIREMENT Any applicant is required to be functional in the English Language and, therefore, may be required to demonstrate his/her competency in the English language. 11 Registration REGISTRATION POLICY - ACADEMIC STUDIES PROGRAM d) Those students who wish to enroll in courses in the A c a d e m i c Division must submit the results of the B.C. G o v e r n m e n t E n g l i s h P l a c e m e n t Test with their registration forms. A s Capilano C o l l e g e was set up primarily to serve the residents of the three school districts of North Vancouver, West Vancouver, and Howe Sound, those residents and returning students will be given priority of registration in Academic Studies programs/courses at the College Those students who have not taken the B.C. Government English Placement Test should t a k e t h e C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e S c r e e n i n g Examination before registering for any English, Humanities General or General Studies course. Schedules of English Screening Examinations will be posted in the reception area, Student Info Centre and the Humanities Division. This priority of registration is that only registration applications from residents or returning students will be p r o c e s s e d during the designated mail registration periods, (or in advance of inperson registration for any particular semester). During inperson registration for e a c h semester, anyone meeting the above admission eligibility criteria may then register in those courses where there are still s p a c e s available. 2. For this registration priority policy, "residents" and "returning students" are defined as: a) Resident i) A person who has lived in the College Region for'at least four months as of the first day of the term for which application is made. OR ii) A person who is paying school taxes in the College Region as of the first day of the term for which application is made. OR iii) A person whose parents or legal guardians are currently paying school taxes as of the first day of the term for which application is made. b) b) Registration applications must first of all be submitted to, and approved by, the pertinent program coordinator. For new students this will often involve an interview and counselling. Returning Student Any student who has registered for, and has attended, credit classes at Capilano College. Returning students who have been academically disqualified in the previous semester should consult a Counsellor about eligibility. REGISTRATION PROGRAMS POLICY - For Career/Vocational Program/Courses a) B e c a u s e of the high demand for, but limited number of s p a c e s in, most Career Programs, registration screening for these programs commences at least four months in advance for Fall registration and two months in advance for Spring registration. Admitted students wishing to register in programs should c h e c k actual advance registration times with the pertinent program coordinator. Advance registration for Career Students can be in Career courses only; registration for A c a d e m i c studies courses ("electives" to Career students) can only take place during regular registration for the A c a d e m i c Studies programs/courses. c) Through this program of advance registration for Career programs, registration (and payment of fees) can often be completed prior to the normal mail registration period. However, once the formal mail registration period for the whole College has commenced, registrants who have been accepted into a Career program or course and who have not completed (by fee payment) the advance registration, must submit their approved registration form (with fees) to the Registrar's Office either during the designated mail or in-person registration period. CAREER/VOCATIONAL Because many of the more s p e c i a l i z e d programs and courses offered by the Career/Vocational Division of the C o l l e g e are unique to the province, there is no priority of registration except that as a guideline, a majority of the students shall be residents of North Vancouver. West Vancouver and Howe Sound School Districts. d) Registration forms and timetables (which include Career courses) may be obtained from the Registrar's Office. e) Registration into vocational programs must be carried out through the pertinent coordinator at any time relative to the start-up time of the particular program. REGISTRATION PROCEDURE REGISTRATION FOR HOWE SOUND C O U R S E S 1. Students who wish to register in courses held at the C o l l e g e ' s Squamish Centre should contact the Centre (892-5322) for information. For A c a d e m i c Studies Programs/Courses a) For Returning Students and Residents (either just admitted or p r e v i o u s C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e students) registrations may be submitted during mail registration for any semester or during in-person registration. b) "or non-resident or non-returning students who have been admitted, registration may only be carried out during tha designated in-person registration days. C O L L E G E IDENTIFICATION CARDS To use the Library Services of the College, a student must have a College Identification Card. These cards will be available from the Registrar's Office two weeks after the beginning of classes during the Fall Term. c) Obtain a registration form and timetable from the Registrar's Office and return the completed form either during mail or in-person registration. Persons are urged to register as realy as possible to avail themselves of a better course selection. If the card is lost, a duplicate may be obtained from the Registrar's Office at the cost of $2.00. 12 REGISTRATION S C H E D U L E 1977 - 78 SUMMER/78 A P R 3-28 FALL/77 A U G 2 - 26 SPRING/78 DEC 16-21 C O U R S E C H A N G E DAY (For students who have registered by Mail, but need to alter their course registration) A U G 29 10 a.m. - 9 p.m. JAN 4 10 a m . - 9 p.m. I N - P E R S O N REGISTRATION A U G 30 10 a.m. - 9 p.m. JAN 5 10 a.m. - 9 p.m. MAY 4 10 a.m. - 9 p.m. CLASSES COMMENCE SEPT 6 JAN 9 Dependent upon course FINAL W I T H D R A W A L NOV MAR 9 MAIL REGISTRATION (Only for North Shore residents or returning students) EXAMINATION WEEK DATE 10 APR D E C 12 - 16 13 17-21 Financial Information F E E S POLICY a) DEFERRED F E E S All c h e q u e s and money orders should be made payable to "Capilano C o l l e g e " , and must be accompanied by a completed registration form. b) Underpaid registrations will be returned unprocessed. Students who are unable to pay the full amount of their tuition fees may pay part of their tuition on a deferred fees basis. All other applicable lees are due and payable in full at the time ol registration. c) A charge of $5 will be levied for costs of handling c h e q u e s returned by the bank for nonsufficient funds or other reasons. Students wishing to defer part of their tuition fees are required to fill out an Application for Deferred Tuition Fees, available from the Financial A i d Office. d) Post-dated c h e q u e s or separate c h e q u e s for tuition fees and Student Society activity fees will not be accepted Tuition fees may be deferred on the following schedule: e) Students whose fees are to be paid by agencies, other than Government Scholarships, are required to present a letter to this effect at registration. Credit Hours 15 or more f) The "student copy" of the registration form will be the only income tax receipt issued. FEES S C H E D U L E Tuition Fee» Lab Fee* Maximum Deferred Payment $52.20 The full amount owing must be paid in full within one month of the first day of classes. $7.00 per credit hour to a maximum of $105.00 per term. Any person 65 years of age or over is entitled to free tuition, and is not required to pay student activity fees. Applicants for this special senior citizen fee waiver need only produce appropriate identification such as the Courtesy C a r d for Senior Cititens or their Pharmacare card. Senior citizens will be required to pay all lab fees. S c i e n c e lab c o u r s e s and C a r e e r Program c o u r s e s may require an assessment for supplies or special a c t i v i t i e s , a n d s t u d e n t s s h o u l d be prepared to pay these special fees at the time of registration. In most cases the amount to be a s s e s s e d is stated in the introduction to the program For further information, contact the program coordinator. REFUND POLICY Lab Fee C o u r s e " X " Lab Fee Course " X " Sub-total Student Activity Fee credit hours at $1.00 per credit hour TOTAL 1. A complete refund of fees will be made when courses or programs are cancelled. 2. Refunds may also be granted to a student on the basis of a complete or partial official withdrawal (see s c a l e below). 3. Student Society activity fees may be refunded subject to Council Policy No. 48, upon written application to the College Council, c/o Business Office, such application to be received within two w e e k s of the close of registration. S C A L E OF REFUNDS SAMPLE F E E CALCULATION: credit hours credit hours credit hours Sub-total Minimum Downpayment $52.50 SPECIAL F E E WAIVER FOR SENIOR CITIZENS Student Activity Fee $1.00 per credit hour to a maximum of $15 00. (This fee is non-compulsory for courses given in the Howe Sound School District.) Course " X " at Course " X " at Course " X " at Total Tuition Fee Due $105.00 $XX XX XX XX XX XX xx XX $XX 14 a) Students who enrol during early Registration and withdraw before the first day of c l a s s e s will receive an 8 0 % refund of tuition fees, and 100% of lab fees. Student Society activity fees will not be refunded, except as per item 3 above b) If an application for withdrawal is received within one month of the date classes commence, 80% of both tuition and lab fees will be refunded. Student Society activity fees will not be refunded, except as per item 3 above. c) From the date following the last day specified in b) until the end of the term, no refund will be granted. REFUND DEADLINES Fall - Last day to receive a refund of 80% of tuition and lab fees is October 7, 1977. Spring - Last day to receive a refund of 8 0 % of tuition and lab fees is February 9, 1978 Instructional Information ACCREDITATION O F STUDENTS Certificates and Diplomas G O L L E G E CERTIFICATE A certificate will be awarded to a student who completes the requirements of a prescribed Vocational-Technical or Career Program or its equivalent, provided that s/he has earned at least three credit hours in English and has a Cumulative Grade Point Average of 2,00 or better. A S S O C I A T E IN A R T S A N D S C I E N C E D I P L O M A A student who has completed the requirements of any fourterm College program may receive an Associate in Arts and Science Diploma, provided s/he has fulfilled the following conditions: a) Completed at least sixty credit hours or its equivalent. b) Thirty credit hours must be completed at Capilano College. c) Obtained a Cumulative Grade Point Average of 2.00 from the sixty best credit hours. d) Fulfilled the requirements of the program in which the student is enrolled. e) Obtained three credit hours in English. f) A c a d e m i c transfer students and Career/Vocational students may be required to obtain six credit hours made up of one course each from any two of the three following lists. LIST A Biology Chemistry Mathematics Physics Geology General Studies Education LIST B Economics Geography Political Science Psychology Sociology Anthropology General Studies Education LIST C Art English Literature Fine Arts Modern Languages History Philosophy General Studies Religious Studies AUDIT STATUS A student may attend all meetings of a class without receiving credit. The audit student attends all classes, seminars, labs., etc., of the class and pays the normal tuition fee. S / h e is not required to sit examinations or submit essays. The status of audit may be denied by an Instructor if the student has not participated in the class; this denial may b e appealed through the grade appeal process. Audit students will be accepted on a space-available basis. VISITORS A person may attend a class session as a visitor for a limited period of time, provided s/he has permission from the Instructor in advance. This privilege does not extend to science and language labs or courses requiring the use of machinery or materials. A visitor is not registered, does not sit examinations, does not receive credit and attends not more than 3 weeks during the term. CREDIT HOURS A credit hour normally represents one hour per week of classroom work per term. Most courses offered are three credit hour courses. A s such, they normally require three class hours per week and may, in addition, require laboratories, seminars and tutorials. FOURTH INSTRUCTIONAL HOUR A n additional and optional fourth hour of instruction will b e offered in each three credit hour course but will not necessarily follow the regular three hour instructional period. This extra educational opportunity may take the form of a workshop, seminar, field-trip or similar activity, at the discretion of each instructor and as circumstances allow. Students should understand that fourth hour activities will not be a factor in determining final grades. Attendance will be on a voluntary basis. C O U R S E OVERLOAD REGULATIONS During the Fall and Spring Terms, a student may not take more than sixteen credit hours of academic courses or more than the full requirements of a Career Program without written permission from the Dean of A c a d e m i c Studies or the Dean of Career/Vocational Studies, a s appropriate. Course overloads are granted in exceptional circumstances to students with a minimum G.P.A. of 3.00 in the previous term. STATUS OF STUDENTS ACCORDING TO PROGRAM Full-time College Student - A full-time College student is one who is enrolled in at least fifteen credit hours of academic work, or one who is enrolled in a full Career Program. Part-time College Student - All other students. Note: There is no required minimum number of courses which . must be taken at Capilano College. ATTENDANCE A student is expected to attend all classes in which s / h e is registered. Since evaluation of progress in any course is cumulative, based on class assignments, participation and examinations, regular attendance may be essential for s u c c e s s . Irregular attendance may result in lowered grades or s u s p e n sion. A student expecting to be absent from c l a s s e s b e c a u s e of prolonged illness is advised to notify his/her instructor as soon as possible and to arrange to make up missed instruction. The instructor may require that a medical certificate be presented to the appropriate Instructional Dean to re-instate the student. If illness prevents a student from writing a final examination or assignment s/he may be assigned a grade or granted a deferral at the discretion of his/her instructor. In s u c h cases, a medical certificate must be submitted to the appropriate Instructional Dean within one week of the date of the examination or d u e date of the assignment. THE INSTRUCTIONAL YEAR The A c a d e m i c Year is divided into two four-month terms, Fall and Spring, and an equivalent Summer Session of two months (May and June). A course pursued progressively for two terms normally constitutes an academic year in that subject. C O U R S E CREDITS A student will receive credit only for the courses and sections in which s / h e is officially registered, according to the records maintained by Student Records, in the Registrar's Office. C O U R S E C H A L L E N G E PROCEDURE The C o l l e g e has a policy which allows registered C o l l e g e students to request examination for achievement in certain courses. By this procedure, a student may receive credit for a course. Interested students should consult a Counsellor for current information on this challenge procedure. There are certain courses which may not b e challenged. A student challenging a course will be required to pay the normal tuition fee for that course. 15 GRADING STUDENT R E C O R D S Capilano C o l l e g e uses the following categories of grading and recording. Letter Grade Meaning Grade Points A Superior 4 B Above Average 3 C Satisfactory 2 D Minimal Pass 1 F Failed 0 1* Incomplete 0* W* Withdrawn 0* • Not calculated in Grade Point Average "I" GRADES "I" grades are given at the end of a term when, in the judgement of the Instructor, the student would have a reasonable expectation of passing the course but has not completed the work required of him. An "I" grade is only awarded where the Instructor and student have arranged for the work to be completed by a specified date, which is noted in the class list with grades. The student granted an "I" grade must complete the necessary assignments on the date specified by the instructor on the grade sheet. Upon completion of the required assignments the student will receive the predetermined grade specified by the instructor. Failure to complete the necessary assignments by the date specified will result in an " F " grade recorded on the student's transcript. All student records are kept in the Registrar's Office. The information on file for a student is always available to that student for examination. No information on file is divulged to any agency or person other than the student. PROVISIONAL STANDING A student who has not maintained a scholastic standard acceptable to the C o l l e g e is subject to Provisional Standing. a) A student is placed on Provisional Standing after s/he has attempted at least 15 credit hours with a Term G.P.A. of 1.50 or less. If a student is placed on Provisional Standing, s/he will be advised by letter. ' b) Upon re-registration, the student is expected to achieve a Term G.P.A. of over 1.50. If this occurs, the student is no longer on Provisional Standing. If this does not occur, the student is required to withdraw for at least one term, unless s/he elects to switch to a different college program, e.g., A c a d e m i c to Career, or vice versa. c) A student who has withdrawn from the College, as outlined in Section (b) above, may re-register after one term's absence from the C o l l e g e . d) If a student who has been required to withdraw wishes to re-enter the College without a term's absence and can demonstrate exceptional circumstances that c a u s e s his/her disqualification, s/he may petition for consideration, by writing a letter to the Principal outlining his/her exceptional circumstances. REPEATING A C O U R S E All " F " grades are recorded on the student's transcript. These grades are assigned a value of zero in the calculation of a student's Cumulative Grade Point Average. Courses may be repeated for the purposes of improving grades. Credit will be granted for the duplicate course receiving the higher grade. B a s e d on the above grading system an instructor will confirm or deny the "audit" status of a student. A denial ruling is open to appeal by the student. ACADEMIC DIFFICULTIES Students who are experiencing difficulties in their course work during a term may be referred by an Instructor to a Counsellor. The student is encouraged to consult with his/her Instructor and Counsellor to evolve a satisfactory plan which will remedy these difficulties. GRADE POINT A V E R A G E Grade Point Averages are reported on each Permanent Student Record. The G.P.A. is the sum of the grade point hours earned in the term divided by the number of credit hours taken which are applicable to the Grade Point computation. C H A N G E S OR WITHDRAWALS FROM C O U R S E S STATEMENT O F GRADES All changes to registered courses and sections must be made on a C o u r s e s Change Form and submitted to the Registrar's Office. After Late Registration all course or section changes must be signed on the C o u r s e Change Form by the Instructors involved. A Statement of G r a d e s is either mailed or distributed from the College Reception Desk. Errors and omissions in the Statement of Grades should be reported immediately to the Registrar's Office. If a student does not complete a course but does not withdraw from it officially, an ' F ' grade will result. If the student does officially withdraw from a course no record of the course appears on the Statement of Grades. A P P E A L O F FINAL G R A D E S If a student wishes to appeal a final grade, his/her request must be submitted in writing to the Chairperson of the A p p e a l s Committee. A p p e a l s by proxy will not be considered. A letter of appeal must state the grounds of appeal and be accompanied by a fee of five dollars for each course in which re-assessment is sought. A student may appear before the A p p e a l s Committee upon request of the Committee. The student may request to be invited. Appeals, together with the appeal fee must be received by the Chairperson of the Appeal Committee not later than two weeks after the issuance of the grade in question. A p p e a l s are considered by an A p p e a l s Committee, consisting of representatives of faculty, students and one of the Instructional Deans. In each case, all term grades, including the final examination mark, are taken into consideration. The student will be informed in writing of the Committee's decision. If the mark is changed, the five dollar fee will be refunded; otherwise, it will be retained. Students are urged to obtain the A p p e a l s Procedure Brochure, available from the Registrar's Office. C O U R S E VERIFICATION Two months after the beginning of each term the Registrar's office will issue C o u r s e Record Verification forms to each student. It is the student's responsibility to check their list of courses. If a student believes that there is an error in his/her registration, s/he must correct the errors with a C o u r s e Change Form before the final withdrawal date. Failure to correct the error will result in an 'F' grade on the student's transcript (or no credit being granted for work done). C H A N G E OF NAME AND/OR ADDRESS It is the responsibility of the student to inform the Registrar's Office of any changes in his/her name, address, or phone number. OFFICIAL TRANSCRIPT OF MARKS LIMITATIONS O F S P A C E The official Transcript of Marks is obtainable only from the Registrar's Office. The official transcript must bear the signature of the Registrar and official College Seal. It is a College policy to provide students with as much choice of programs and options as possible. However, it must be realized that limitations of space, equipment and budget are likely to restrict the students' range of choice. The College, therefore, reserves the right to cancel programs where numbers and facilities are inadequate. Official transcripts are issued only at the request of the student. The student must complete a Transcript Order Form, and pay 50c per copy in order to obtain a copy. 16 Student Services and Facilities S T U D E N T RESPONSIBILITIES Capilano C o l l e g e a s s u m e s that students who enrol will seriously attempt satisfactory completion of all studies which are undertaken. The College also assumes that students are mature and responsible and will conduct themselves accordingly. Some classes are s c h e d u l e d at Centres other than Lynnmour. Students are advised to make the best timetable for themselves in view of college services which are offered in West Vancouver, Howe Sound and other parts of North Vancouver. All courses for any one student may not necessarily be held at one Centre. COUNSELLING The services of trained counsellors are available to all students and to residents of the College Region. Counsellors assist students in the educational planning and provide guidance in the solution of academic and personal problems. The C o l l e g e counselling objective is to help students achieve self-direction in decision-making and planning. If you are experiencing difficulty of any kind with which you could use assistance you are encouraged to contact C o u n selling Department personnel. There is a reception d e s k located in Room A 110 of A building and lower floor, north end of N F building. The College Admissions Advisor visits all secondary schools in the College Region each Spring to speak to student groups about opportunities offered by Capilano College. School students planning to enter the C o l l e g e may take advantage of early admission interviews at their school by contacting their school Counsellor for the appropriate dates. GROUP PROGRAMS These are programs designed for personal development. They include programs to consider areas of personal growth, career choice, human sexuality and life style development. They are listed in the course offerings under Counselling Group Programs. They are non-credit courses, generally offered without charge. Some have limited enrolment. WOMEN'S RESOURCE CENTRE A Women's Resource Centre has b e e n established and is available to students, staff, faculty and members of the community. The resources include a Community Resource File for the North Shore, a speaker's bureau, bibliographies of materials for Women's Studies and various books and periodicals by and/or about women. On-campus seminars,-group programs in conjunction with the Counselling service on a drop-in basis, and an ombuds service are also available. For further information or to d i s c u s s the program and your needs, contact the Women's Studies Program Director. LEARNING ASSISTANCE CENTRE The Learning Assistance Program is a resource centre for those who seek to increase their learning efficiency. E a c h term the Program staff offer several Workshops on study skills and reading. Students are welcome to work with the Coordinator on an individual basis as well. Times and dates for the workshops are published in the C o l l e g e ' s timetable Appointments to see the Coordinator can be made through the Centre. The Learning Assistance Centre has materials on a wide variety of learning and teaching practices. Information on how to take notes, efficient reading, time management, and writing examinations is available in handout forms. Students have acc e s s through the Centre to electric typewriters, cassette recorders, and reading machines. Drop by for information regarding their use. Students may use the Program to improve their communication skills, analyze the circumstances of college education, and evaluate their own educational objectives. The Learning Assistance Program is a tool for people to use in the realization of their educational goals. (Students should also see Mathematics Tutorial Room.) TESTING SERVICES The C o l l e g e also offers students a comprehensive testing program. Vocational interest, personality and aptitude tests are available free of charge to students and residents of the community. Test results are often helpful in making career choices. All testing is done on a voluntary basis and results are confidential. notes on E n g l i s h . 010 and FINANCIAL A I D / A W A R D S A N D P L A C E M E N T The Financial A i d Office, located in N F 102 (North C a m p u s ) may be contacted for information and assistance regarding the Canada Student Loan and British Columbia Student Assistance Program, the Howe Sound Allowance, and bursaries, scholarships and loans. Students who may need financial aid can obtain copies of the Financial A i d brochure at the Financial A i d Office. Applications are available at the office. The Financial A i d person is available to d i s c u s s financial assistance with interested students. HIGH S C H O O L E Q U I V A L E N C Y E X A M I N A T I O N S Capilano College is an approved testing centre for the government-sponsored High School Equivalency (GEO) Examinations. These exams are written at least four times per year and are open to all individuals over 19 years of age. Students who wish to apply to the Canada Student Loan and B.C. Student Assistance Program are encouraged to apply at least two months before registration. Information and application forms are available from the Counselling Department. The Howe Sound School Board provides an a l ^ - ^ n c e of $50.00 per month, payable at the end of the 'er to students whose parents reside in the Howe T strict. Students are required to complete at least four c iurs . and enclose a transcript of marks with the application. Inf' ation on application procedures may be obtained at the Financial A i d Office. A job board with listings for part-time and summer e m ployment is located outside the Financial A i d Office. CAREER DEVELOPMENT RESOURCE CENTRE The C o l l e g e assists students in considering career options and selecting a career by providing in-depth information on a wide variety of career options. The C a r e e r Development Resource Centre houses a collection of vocational literature, pamphlets and reference works available for use in the Centre in room N F 102. Students wishing to utilize the materials should contact the Receptionist at the reception station, lower floor, north end of N F building. 17 AWARDS ATHLETICS Dean'* List Capilano C o l l e g e encourages a program of intramural and extramural athletics for both men and women students. The College is a full member of Totem Conference, which is the governing body for all inter-college athletics in the province of British Columbia. Provincial champions are determined annually with winners advancing to a Western Canada final in most sports. In hockey and basketball, the opportunity to advance to a national final is afforded successful teams. The calibre of competition on the inter-college level is excellent with the athletic program being structured to provide an easy meld of academic and athletic pursuits for student athletes. Intercollegiately, Capilano College competes in Hockey, Basketball, Rugby, Curling and Soccer. Special recognition will be accorded students who complete a full program of studies at the C o l l e g e with a 3.50 or higher grade point average during a term. Students with "I" grades are not eligible for the Dean's list. Governor General's Silver Medal This medal is awarded each year by His Excellency the Governor General of C a n a d a to the graduating student who has achieved the best scholastic record in attaining his/her diploma at Capilano College Merit List Special recognition will be accorded part-time students with a 3.50 cumulative grade point average or higher who have successfully completed a minimum of 30 semester hours at Capilano College. At the present, the C o l l e g e does not have its own gymnasium, and all programs must operate in rented community and school facilities. Despite this limitation, the many exceptional athletes that attend the institution e a c h year, working in conjunction with an experienced Blues coaching staff, have combined to produce several Totem Conference and Western Canadian (4West) championship teams. Capilano C o l l e g e is proud of the accomplishments of its student athletes and of its growing reputation for athletic excellence. Principal's Citizenship Award This award is given in recognition of the student who has made the greatest contribution to C o l l e g e life. Principal's Awards One of these awards is made in each of the two Instructional Divisions, to the full-time student who achieves the best scholastic record during the academic year. Opportunities to take part in intramural activity are also provided by the College. Activities offered vary from year-toyear in compliance with e x p r e s s e d interests, but usually include such sports as swimming, badminton, hockey, soccer and tennis. LIBRARY SERVICES The M e d i a Centre, as an integral part of the instructional and learning process, provides library services for the C o l l e g e and its community. Information, media resources and services are provided by highly-qualified library staff and growing collections of both print and audiovisual materials. Study areas are provided in both the North and South Library. A i d in the use of library facilities is available along with indexes to the various collections in the South Library. The library staff welcomes the opportunity to assist the student at all times when the M e d i a Centre is open. The C o l l e g e Athletic Department, working in conjunction with the Community Education Division, annually sponsors at minimal cost, several instructional programs directed toward both the student body and the North Shore Community at large. These programs include introductory Karate, Pre-Ski Fitness and the B.C. Coaching Development Program. The Fitness Centre is located in the west corner of the South Parking lot. The facility contains showers, locker rooms, saunas, an equipment room and an exercise area, complete with weight training and fitness testing facilities. S c h e d u l e d fitness sessions are intermingled with large blocks of open facility time. The Fitness Centre's professional staff will provide personal consultive and evaluative services relative to health, physical fitness and weight control, on an appointment basis. The Fitness Centre is yours; make good use of it. Capilano College students have complete a c c e s s to all materials and services provided upon presentation of a current College identification card. Residents of the College district, teachers employed in the district and students from other B.C. community colleges and B.C.I.T, upon applying for a borrower's card, may sign out material not in immediate demand by College students and faculty. Capilano College students have similar borrowing privileges from B.C.I.T., other community college libraries in B.C., and those public libraries which make up the Greater Vancouver Public Library Federation. Several Library brochures explaining the location and use of resources and services as well as other sources of information in the Greater Vancouver area are available at both library locations. It is recommended that students visit their library first when requiring resource assistance. First A i d and Health Services are located in Room N B 102 on the North C a m p u s . The Community Health Nurse is available to provide the following services to students and employees: PLAGIARISM - AND HOW TO AVOID IT 1. First A i d - phone local 271. If no answer contact the College switchboard " 0 " . 2. Health Counselling - to both individuals and groups in preventive health care as well as emergency care. Some areas of counselling involve: nutrition, weight control, communicable diseases, immunization, birth control, short and long term illnesses and pre and post natal care. 3. Physical Health Care - involves vision check, hearing tests (oto chek), blood pressure check, weight (skin caliper test), pregnancy tests (slide test), allergy injections (referral from physician). 4. Stop Smoking Clinics are offered free by the nurse using Dr. Alan Best's (U.B.C.) techniques. If interested, phone local 271 or visit the Health Services. 5. Pamphlets and Teaching A i d s on various topics such as: nutrition, heart, smoking, pregnancy, diseases, respiratory illness, cancer, venereal diseases, and birth control. FIRST AID AND HEALTH SERVICES Plagiarism is the presentation of another person's words or ideas without acknowledging their source — as if they were o n e ' s own. S t u d e n t s in doubt about the n e e d for acknowledgement should take care to avoid unintentional plagiarism by learning proper scholarly p r o c e d u r e s . A document explaining these procedures is available from the Media Centre, Learning Assistance Centre or Instructional Divisions. Intentional plagiarism is not only dishonest, but a rejection of the principles of scholarship. A plagiarized college assignment, therefore, will ordinarily receive no credit. At the instructor's discretion, the plagiarist may receive an F for the paper or for the course. MEDIA PRODUCTION SERVICES M e d i a production equipment and facilities are available for film, tape and graphic production in the M e d i a Production C e n tre which is located in rooms N B 1 0 9 and 110. Qualified media staff are available to give assistance in this production as required. Referrals to outside agencies, individuals can be made through your Health Services. 18 INFOCENTRE The purpose of the Information Centre, which is organized by the Student Society, is to centralize and facilitate information relevant to students. The Centre deals with both internal and external information, including housing and jobs. It is located across from the reception d e s k in the lobby of building " B " . The I N F O C E N T R E hours are: Monday to Friday - 1 0 a.m. to 4 p.m. STUDENT SOCIETY The Student Society is incorporated under the Societies Act of British Columbia. It was established in order to represent the interests of all students of Capilano C o l l e g e in a number of methods. The elected body of the Student Society is responsible for ensuring that students are represented on all decision making committees of the C o l l e g e . They also are responsible for maintaining active membership within the B.C. Student Federation and the National Union of Students. The Society provides services to students that are not under the jurisdiction of the College Administration such as the organization of films, socials, course unions, c l u b s and general information services. For further information students may call 986-1813 or go to the office in A114. BOOKSTORE The Capilano College Bookstore caters especially to the needs of the C o l l e g e students, but is also open to the general public. It is located in the N E building on the North C a m p u s , adjacent to the Cafeteria. The Bookstore stocks required and recommended textbooks for C o l l e g e courses as well as a small selection of extracurricular reading material. In addition, there is a reasonable variety of supplies and stationery available. A Postage Stamp Sales A g e n c y is located in the Bookstore, as well as a mail bag for the added convenience of those wishing to post their mail on campus. THE BLUE JAY BOUTIQUE , The Blue Jay Boutique is a small shop, located on the second floor of the tower, operated by the Retail Fashion students. Serving the specialty needs of the student body as well as the educational needs of the fashion merchandising students, it sells fashion items, greeting cards, and accessories, as well as art objects on a consignment basis. A special feature is a "new-to-you" clothing section. The boutique is open from Monday to Thursday, from 12 noon until 2 p.m. during the term. PARKING Parking is available to all students on the north and south parking lots only (for exact locations, consult the site plan at the back of the calendar). The following parking regulations, which have been d e s i g n e d to meet the District Fire Marshall's instructions, are in effect: LOST AND FOUND Students can make inquiries regarding items Lost or Found at the C o l l e g e Reception Desk located in the main building on the South C a m p u s . FOOD SERVICES U n l e s s otherwise noted, food services are available in Building N E , North C a m p u s , and in the Cafetheatre, South C a m pus. The cafeterias are open Monday through Friday, and operating hours will be posted at the start of the Fall semester. Limited vending machine service is also available when the regular food services are closed. a) N o parking is permitted on roadways or designated service areas. b) All traffic and parking signs must be observed. c) V e h i c l e s parked in unauthorized areas will be towed away at the owner's expense. It has been observed that ample s p a c e is available at all times on the south parking lot. 19 College Programs 20 Academic Studies/university Transfer ENGLISH P L A C E M E N T TEST Students who plan to enter academic courses at any B.C. Post-secondary institution, including Capilano College, must have taken or be prepared to take the Provincial Government English Placement Test. Students should sit this test as early as possible at sessions announced by the Ministry of Education. A c a d e m i c transfer courses offered at Capilano College provide the student with a variety of academic options within the framework of a two-year, comprehensive college. Students transferring to an university can select full programs of study acceptable for equivalency to courses in the first two years of university (see note on Counselling). Students who desire to take part-time academic studies or who are interested in academic courses at the first or second year level without the intention of continuing to upper-level study can select from a range of courses in various disciplines. Students in need of extra help in key areas of academic study can select courses aimed at basic literacy (see notes on English placement exam and Math lab.). Students interested in special fields of study such as Women's Studies, Labour Studies, interdisciplinary studies or self-paced learning can select from innovative programmes in these areas (as offered from year to year). Mature students, and people who have not attended college previously or for many years, are urged to enrol in any of these courses and, in fact, form a large and successful portion of the academic study body. The focus of academic instruction at Capilano College is on disciplinary and inter-disciplinary study of the highest intellectual calibre. The C o l l e g e carefully reviews its curriculum and approaches to ensure academic currency and acceptable university equivalency. Those students who have not taken the B.C. Government English Placement Test should take the Capilano C o l l e g e English Screening Examination before registering for any English, Humanities General or General Studies course. Schedules of English Screening Examinations will be posted in the reception area, Student Info Centre and the Humanities Division. Students should note the general information in the English course descriptions and the descriptions particularly of English 090, 091, and 010. The English instructors are happy to assist students who need help in basic composition; all academic instructors are able to help students with basic writing problems. MATHEMATICS TUTORIAL ROOM (NF 108) This room is equipped with learning aids, calculators and reference textbooks. Students taking Mathematics courses are encouraged to make use of this area to study Mathematics, and to seek aid from the Faculty member on duty. It is available to all Mathematics students during the posted hours of operation. A significant, basic library collection is available as are full media reference services to complement the courses of study. TRANSFER TO AND FROM OTHER INSTITUTIONS A counselling and admissions placement staff assists students in selecting the best program of studies. The final responsibility for course selection, however, rests with the student. The A c a d e m i c Division takes seriously its responsibility to maintain transferability with other post-secondary institutions. To this end, meetings are held with other institutions to ensure that current practise is commonly acceptable and that a full transfer package can be articulated. C h a n g e s in programs, new courses or new course numberings are carefully compared between institutions and this College strives to offer the most complete two year package possible within budget and facility restraints. ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA A student who has completed the requirements of any fourterm College program may receive an Associate in Arts and Science Diploma, provided s/he has fulfilled the following conditions: There is agreement among all public B.C. C o l l e g e s to accept each other's credits upon transfer, if applicable to a program given and the admitting c o l l e g e , and given suitable equivalency. Capilano C o l l e g e reserves the right to review individual course credit. Transfer credits are granted to students on admission for acceptable work done at other institutions; the transfer credits reduce the total number of credits which are required at Capilano College for a certificate or diploma. Students wishing transfer credit should present suitable documentation to the Registrar's office for adjudication by the appropriate faculty. All approved transfer credits are noted on the student's Permanent Student Record. Full information on transfer of specific courses is available from the Admission Advisor, Counsellors and in the pertinent Instructional Division. a) Completed at least sixty credit hours or its equivalent. b) Completed at least thirty of those credit hours in residence at Capilano College. c) Obtained a Cumulative Grade Point Average of 2.00 from the sixty best credit hours. d) Fulfilled the requirements of the program in which the student is enrolled. e) Obtained three credit hours in English, plus six credit hours made up of one course each from any two of the three following lists: UST A Biology Chemistry Mathematics Physics Geology General Studies Education LIST B Economics Geography Political Science Psychology Sociology Anthropology General Studies Education LIST C Art English Literature Fine Arts Modern Languages Music History Philosophy General Studies Religious Studies ACADEMIC C O U R S E DESCRIPTIONS Full descriptions of all academic courses can be found in the alphabetical listings following. Students are urged to read carefully the general discipline information included in each such section. It is the student's responsibility to be familiar with the special information needed to select academic courses. COUNSELLING All academic students are advised to see the Admissions A d visor or a Counsellor to plan their courses of study. Students should consult the Counselling information (p. 17). 21 WOMEN'S STUDIES PROGRAM A Women's Studies Program, consisting of a variety of transfer credit, college credit and credit-free courses, has been developed at Capilano College. The Women's Studies C o m mittee, which is advisory to all segments of the Women's Studies Program, is made up of representatives from the college faculty, staff, student body and the community. In addition to the Women's Studies C o l l e g e credit and transfer credit courses, there are academic and career courses in other disciplines of special interest to women. A brochure will be available each term listing additional short, credit-free courses, workshops and other presentations of special interest to women in the college and the community. A Women's Resource Centre has been established and is available to students, staff, faculty and members of the community. The resources include a Community Resource File for the North Shore, a speaker's bureau, bibliographies of materials for Women's Studies and various books and periodicals by and/or about women. For further information or to d i s c u s s the program and your needs, contact the Women's Studies Program Director. LABOUR STUDIES The Labour Studies Program is designed to serve the needs of trade-union organizations and workers in general. A Program Advisory Committee has been established which gives on-going advice and direction on course content, offerings, time-tabling, and instruction. GENERAL STUDIES Capilano College offers a special course of interdisciplinary study, the " C a p A . " This course is usually team-taught and looks at particular topics from a variety of perspectives. For additional information, see the course listings. SELF P A C E D LEARNING (SPL) In keeping with the C o l l e g e ' s policy for the development of alternative instructional modes, it is now possible for the student to pursue his studies in first year Political Science and first year Chemistry on a self-paced time line. These packaged courses, prepared for home study with the aid of cassette tapes, manuals, slides and film loops, are designed to offer students who are unable to maintain regular attendance at the Lynnmour Campus or a satellite centre the opportunity to pursue college courses. They are also available to students who are attending any college centre, providing these students with a viable alternative to the usual lecture/tutorial instructional format. FOCUS CANADA The Social Sciences will offer the following two programs to students who wish to concentrate their studies on Canadian Content courses. All courses hold full transfer credit within the appropriate discipline, and transfer into the Canadian Studies Program at S.F.U. No pre-requisites are required. PROGRAM I B.C. STUDIES FALL SPRING History 203 Sociology 201 Political S c i e n c e 202 Anthropology 121 Geography 106 NOT O F F E R E D 1977/78. PROGRAM II C A N A D A STUDIES FALL SPRING Anthropology 204 Economics 107 Geography 220 History 110 Political Science 200 Anthropology 121 Geography 220 History 111 Course descriptions for the above are all listed in their respective disciplines within this calendar. Students may wish to choose electives in related subjects in Humanities and Natural Sciences. For further information, contact faculty in the Social Science Division. A s well as these packages of courses, it is possible to arrange timetables of other, related courses. Students should see a Counsellor and mention the special interest they wish to emphasize. Some examples include: Protest in the Twentieth Century Religious expressions in various disciplines Philosophy and the Philosophy of Science Social investigations from a labour viewpoint The position of women in society The position of ethnic/religious/sexual minorities SCIENCE TRANSFER REQUIREMENTS — U.B.C. P R E - M E D A N D PRE-DENTISTRY a. ENGINEERING COMPUTING SCIENCE GEOLOGY, GEOPHYSICS PHYSICAL G E O G R A P H Y AGRICULTURE a. FORESTRY, P H A R M A C Y a. NUTRITION and DIETETICS HOME ECONOMICS GENERAL a. b. c. REHAB MEDICINE b. DENTAL HYGIENE b „ c. c. Physics 104, 105 may be taken instead but U.B.C. may require Ph 135 (U.B.C.) to be taken in transfer year. When possible, students are encouraged to take the higher level courses. When Chemistry 104, 105 is required, Chemistry 110, 111 is not only acceptable, it is preferred. Pre-dental hygiene students must also take two semesters of psychology. 23 SCIENCE: GENERAL INFORMATION Elective Science Elective from Mathematics, Physics Mathematics 235). A. Non-Science Students Students planning to continue studies at a university are a d vised to consider the following courses to fulfill their Science requirement: iii) Mathematics First Year Biology 104, 105 (Note: Transfer credit for course sequence is limited to non-science students.) Chemistry 104, 105 Geology 110, 111 Geography 112, 114 Mathematics 100, 101 or 101, 102 Physics 104, 105 Mathematics 112/113 Mathematics 114 English (6 credits) Elective (12 c r e d i t s ) * (Mathematics 101, 102 are recommended) * In order to maintain options for other majors it is advisable to consult calendars for requirements (e.g. to maintain Physics or C h e m i s t r y as p o s s i b l e alternatives, P h y s i c s 1 1 0 / 1 1 1 , Chemistry, 110/111 should be taken). Second Year Economics students may take Mathematics 100, 101 but Mathematics 112, 113 and 114 is the recommended course sequence, in addition any other Science course can be selected. Please check the course description. pre-requisites given in the individual Mathematics 200 Mathematics 230/231 Mathematics 215 Mathematics 235 Electives B. S c i e n c e Students Students transferring to a professional school at U.B.C. should consult chart page 20. iv) Physics Students transferring to the Faculty of Science at a university should take the following: i) (recommended First Year Physics 110/111 Chemistry 110/111 Mathematics 112/113 Mathematics 114 English (6 credits) — see course description Non-science elective (6 credits Second Year Biological Sciences (including Biochemistry). First Year Biology 110/111 Chemistry 110/111 Physics 110/111 (U.B.C.) Physics 104/105 (S.F.U.) Mathematics 112/113/114 English (6 credits — see course descriptions) Second Year Physics 200/201 Physics 210/211 Physics 220/221 Mathematics 200 Mathematics 230 Mathematics 235 or 231 (honours) Mathematics 215 (Honours) Non-science Elective (6 credits) Science Elective (3 credits) (Mathematics 235 recommended for Honours) (Mathematics 230 recommended for Majors) A complete selection of second year courses which meet the requirements of all three B.C. universities is available. Consult the Biology Department for the specific requirements to transfer into third year at the university of your choice. ii) Chemistry First Year Chemistry 110/111 Physics 110/111 Mathematics 112/113/114 English (6 credits — see course descriptions) Elective (6 credits) v) Other Programs or Combinations of Programs: Second Year Consult Natural Science Division for course selection, particularly with regard to Second Year choices. Chemistry 200/201 Chemistry 204/205 (Transfers to U.B.C. consult a faculty member.) Physics 200/201 Physics 210/211 Mathematics 230, 231 or 235 (depending upon university — consult a faculty member) Mathematics 200 Lab/Course relationship Many courses require that students complete a lab and/or tutorial. Students should ensure that they are aware of any such lab requirement and that their timetables include both lab and lecture hours. Students should note that it is necessary to pass the lab in order to pass the course. 24 Career Programs TRANSFER TO AND FROM OTHER Career Programs offered at Capilano College prepare adults for employment in business and industry. All secondary school graduates are eligible for admission; those without Grade XII standing may also apply and will be considered on the basis of their particular experience, maturity, ability and interest. INSTITUTIONS There is agreement among all public B.C. C o l l e g e s to accept each other's credits upon transfer, if applicable to a program given at the admitting college, and given suitable equivalency. Capilano C o l l e g e reserves the right to review individual course credit. The suggested curriculum for e a c h program includes required, recommended and elective courses. Every attempt is made to plan a program of studies- best suited to individual needs; however, each student must assume final responsibility for selecting his/her program. Transfer credits are granted to students on admission for a c ceptable work done at other institutions; the transfer credits reduce the total number of credits which are required at Capilano College for a certificate or diploma. Students wishing transfer credit should present suitable documentation to the Registrar's office for adjudication by the appropriate faculty. All approved transfer credits are noted on the student's Permanent Student Record. Full information on transfer of specific courses is available from the Admission Advisor, Counsellors and in the pertinent Instructional Division. To provide the student with an insight into human nature, studies in the humanities and behavioural sciences form an important part of Career Programs. The student studies some of the methods of inquiry into the nature of man, the natural world and social institutions. These studies provide the prospective graduate with an opportunity to learn about the relationship of his/her career to the economic world in which he must perform. CAREER PROGRAMS OFFERED Communications courses also form part of every Career Program. These are designed to assist the student to write clearly and speak well. S u c h courses provide the resources to back up the special talents of the Career Program graduate. In most programs "on-the-job" work experience forms part of the curriculum. This type of experience brings relevancy to the material under study. The Career Division prepares its graduates for positions in business and industry as well as in the field of the applied arts. The courses offered in the various programs are under constant review to make certain that students are exposed to the latest of techniques and skills. Advisory committees, composed of employers in the business, industrial, professional and social services are constantly reviewing and making recommendations for all programs. Enrolment in some C a r e e r Programs may be curtailed due to space and equipment limitations. Consequently, those students who contemplate entrance to Career Programs are encouraged to apply early. Applicants are required to have an interview with the Program Co-ordinator prior to admission to any of the C a r e e r Programs. The particular career program, and specific options within the various program divisions offered in the 1977/78 academic year are listed below. C R E A T I V E A N D A P P L I E D A R T S DIVISION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 9. S T U D E N T C O U R S E A N D WORK LOAD Career Program course work approximates 21 1/2 hours per week. However, some programs may require as many as 32 hours and others as few as 16 hours per week. It is therefore strongly recommended that students not accept employment while undertaking full-time studies in any one of the Career Programs offered at Capilano College. E M P L O Y M E N T OPPORTUNITIES FOR T H E G R A D U A T E Crafts Program — 2 years Commercial Art Program — 2 years Art Education Program — 2 years Bachelor of Fine Arts Program — 2 years A d v a n c e d Art Study Program — ongoing Retail Fashion Program — 2 years Commercial M u s i c Program — 1 and 2 years M u s i c Therapy Program — 2 years B U S I N E S S DIVISION 10. Accounting/Financial Management Program — 11. Marketing Management Program — 2 years Although employment opportunities for the graduates of career programs have to date been good, the College is in no position to guarantee job positions for the graduates of particular career programs. 12. Employment opportunities are largely based on the advice of specialist Advisory Committees. The advice provided by these committees may be tempered by rapidly changing economic conditions, alterations in the requirements of certifying bodies, and the specific needs of particular employers. These conditions can completely alter the employment possibilities for individual graduates in a very short time. EXEMPTION STANDING - CAREER STUDENTS Computer Systems Management Program — 13. Public Administration Program — E D U C A T I O N DIVISION Students granted such exemptions will have their total course load reduced by the number of exempted credit hours to the maximum of two courses or six credit hours to the maximum of two courses or six credit hours per academic year without effect upon the status of the Certificate or Diploma in the particular program. Such exempted credit hours are not necessarily transferable to other institutions. Exemption in e x c e s s of two courses, or six credit hours, may be awarded a student only upon the recommendation of the appropriate program co-ordinator and the Dean, Career Programs. 25 2 years 2 years 14. Early Childhood Education Program — 15. M e d i a Resources Program — 2 years 2 years 16. Program for the Developmentally years. A P P L I E D S C I E N C E DIVISION Students enrolling in a Career Program may be exempted from certain courses within the program upon the successful demonstration of acquired skills and knowledge in specific course areas. Such exemption standing will be noted on the Permanent Student Record. 2 years Handicapped — 17. Outdoor Recreation Program — 18. Wilderness and Leadership Program — 2 2 years 2 years 19. C h e m i c a l and Metallurgical Technology — 1 year B.C.l.T. transfer ADMINISTRATIVE S C I E N C E & O F F I C E T E C H N O L O G Y DIVISION 20. Administrative Assistant Option — 1 year 21. Bilingual Secretary — 2 years 22. Legal Assistant Program — 2 years 23. Para-Legal Studies Option — 1 year 24. Office Technology Program — 2 years 25. Secretarial Program - (General, Legal, Medical, or Executive) — 2 years or 1 year • 26. Public Relations Program — 2 years or 1 year * waiting Ministry of Education approval. Students will learn to evaluate, organize, and analyze data, research information, draft briefs and, in general, expand their executive potential as well as to acquire skills relevant to their specific occupations. A research paper germane to the student's professional interest must be satisfactorily completed before a College Certificate is awarded the graduate. This particular option is suited for persons who have had at least two years of work experience. Administrative Science and Office Technology Programs The content and sequencing of courses are listed below. Changes may be arranged to meet individual or class needs. It is possible to enroll as a full-time or part-time day student. CAPILANO C O L L E G E CERTIFICATE Administrative Science and Office Technology is a diverse division that offers men and women excellent instruction and rewarding, exciting opportunities for career development. Responsive to current and future employment trends, courses provide advanced training which more than meets the challenge of a technologically progressive business community. With input from advisory committees, programs of study are continually being developed, expanded or refined to meet the personal and professional needs of employees and employers. Within the A d ministrative Science and Office Technology Program there are several possible occupational options from which to choose — for those considering careers, as well as for those already e m ployed. CREDIT LAB HOURS HOURS 27 3 6 6 39.0 3 Major Program Requirements Recommended C o u r s e s Electives FIRST TERM (Fall) Business 152C o m m e r c e 184- Commerce 196- CAREER PROGRAMS AND OPTIONS C o m m e r c e 259 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Administrative Assistant Option - 1 year Certificate Bilingual Secretary - 2 year Diploma Legal Assistant Option - 2 year Diploma Para-Legal Studies Option - 1 year Certificate Office Technology Program - 2 year Diploma Secretarial Program - (General, Legal, Medical or Executive) - 2 year Diploma or 1 year Certificate • 7. Public Relations Program - 2 year Diploma or 1 year Certificate SECOND TERM (Spring) Business 153Commerce 195- Commerce 198- PURPOUE FOR PROGRAMS Commerce 260- The primary objective, of study are to develop individual talents and professional skills to a high degree of proficiency and to provide a thorough understanding of the principles and practices of various professional, business or government offices. Capilano College graduates are in great demand and readily find employment in law firms, the public service, banks, advertising and public relations agencies, hospitals and educational institutions. Students registered in any one of the options may participate in Directed Work E x p e r i e n c e Laboratories held during fall, spring and summer terms. These Laboratories furnish students with the opportunity and practical experience of at least 30 hours of work "on-the-job" in order for them to appreciate the realities of their future careers, •waiting Ministry of Education approval. THIRD TERM (Summer) Commerce 2 6 1 B S M G 172- Practical Accounting I Organizational & Office Dynamics I Introduction to Research OfficeAdministration Administrative Assistant Option English 100• Elective The increasing complexity of modern industry, business and government necessitates s p e c i a l i z e d training and continuous education. Increasing more rapidly than the supply is the demand for persons who can assume the roles of professional administrative personnel. Emr ' v m e n t opportunities abound for those who have sufficient k 3dge, expertise and initiative. This option is designed for pro-;.;active administrative personnel whose family and occupationa' responsibilities preclude daytime study. C l a s s e s are s c h e d u l e d twice a week from 6:30 p.m. to 10:00 p.m. Courses listed are intended to provide students with the knowledge and skills they roouire to function efficiently in complex administrative settings, to enhance individual talents and to increase chances for s u c c e s s and promotion. The program is deliberately broad in scope. It is not limited to one particular sphere of business. 3 15 _3 10.5 Practical Accounting II The Roles of Women and M e n in Business Research Design Work in Society I 3 3 1.5 _3 10.5 Work in Society II Administrative Practices and Organization • ElectiveElectiveFOURTH TERM (Fall) Commerce 185- 3 3 , — Public Relations Writing 3 _3— 9 3 3 _3 9 • Political Science 199 or any appropriate C o m m e r c e or Bus. Mgt. course is recorr. n e n d e d . 26 • FOURTH TERM Bilingual Secretary Program A constant need exists in government and in industry for the services of secretaries and personnel proficient in translation skills. By and large the job opportunities open to those with the ability to speak more than one language are rewarding professionally and financially. To qualify for a position, a person must possess not only bilingual fluency but must also demonstrate secretarial skills and must understand the policies and principles of the organization for which she/he plans to work. Capilano C o l l e g e ' s bilingual diploma program has been planned with these considerations in mind. Courses include recent developments in office technology, public, human and cultural relations skills, and intensive audio-visual training in the French language. For French-speaking students, equivalent English courses are substituted. Graduates may obtain positions in government, the diplomantic service, in business or industry, in Canada or abroad. ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA CREDIT HOURS Major program requirements Recommended C o u r s e s Commerce 177 C o m m e r c e 185 Commerce 304 Communications 251 French 261 French 271 • •Electives Commerce 158 Commerce 300 V - C o m m e r c e 350 & 357 Communications 150 French 160 French 170 Electives S E C O N D TERM Commerce 154 C o m m e r c e 184 C o m m e r c e 301 Typing I Bilingual Office Technology Directed work Experience Skills L a b in French or English Basic Communications Dialogue Canada/ English 090 Cultural Seminar C o m m e r c e and French Electives 12.5 Typing II Bilingual Office & Organizational Dynamics Directed Work Experience French 106 Communications 151 French 161 French 171 Skills L a b in English or French Translation Techniques Bilingual Bus. Writing Dialogue Canada English 091 Cultural Seminar C o m m e r c e 166 C o m m e r c e 156 C o m m e r c e 303 Communications 250 French 260 French 270 • •Electives Bilingual Bus. Reporting Dialogue Canada Cultural Seminar French, Commerce or Humanities 1 3 3 1 _6_ 21.5 ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA CREDIT HOURS Major Program Requirements Recommended Courses 3 3 3 _3 20.5 .5 3.5 4.5 3 3 3 3 3 _3 20.5 „ 63 15 78 LAB HOURS 0 3.5 Program Requirements: Students are expected to maintain at least a " B " average throughout the Program. A research paper germane to the student's field of interest must be satisfactorily completed before a Diploma is awarded. In order to receive the Associate of Arts and Science Diploma, students must complete a work study practicum, six months in length and relevant legal work. This should be embarked upon at the end of the third term. 1.5 The program is designed to permit students to " s p e c i a l i z e " in their third and fourth terms. CREDIT LAB FIRST TERM HOURS HOURS .5 C o m m e r c e 300 ~ 2 Legal Assistants are highly trained men and women who o c cupy important positions in law offices. The graduates of this program are skilled technicians or specialists who have studied legal theory and procedures and who can apply this knowledge to assist legal practitioners. Legal Assistants will be working in a professional environment, directly or independently, under the supervision of a Barrister/Solicitor. Since one of the functions of a legal assistant is to relieve the lawyer of many routine legal and administrative responsibilities, students will learn to prepare legal documents in accordance with Supreme Court Rules, to carry out investigations and examinations, to handle legal correspondence, and to act in a supportive capacity within the law firm or legal department. In complicated legal matters a legal assistant may work directly with the lawyer, but in many cases independent judgement is required. The demand for para-legal assistance is a relatively recent professional development in British Columbia but the future for para-legal personnel appears exciting and unlimited. Typing S p e e d Development Production Typing I Shorthand Directed work Experience 1.5 1 •THIRD TERM Commerce 164 3 3 Legal Assistant Program 1 C o m m e r c e 351 Adv. Bilingual Bus. Reporting Dialogue C a n a d a Cultural Seminar French, C o m m e r c e or Humanities 1.5 4.5 3 3 .. CREDIT LAB 3C HOURS HOURS Those students who wish to replace the core secretarial courses in this program with administrative type courses may do so only with consultation and the approval of the program C o ordinator. . FIRST TERM Commerce 152 Typing S p e e d Development Shorthand s p e e d Development Public Relations Directed Work Experience * Some of the courses listed for Third and Fourth Terms may be replaced by substitutes. Consult the Co-ordinator for suitable type courses. • * Electives must be chosen in consultation with the C o ordinator. LAB HOURS 69 15 84.0 C o m m e r c e 174 English 100 Legal Studies 150 Legal Studies 152 Legal Studies 153 .5 ^-y 27 Directed Work Experience Composition Introduction to Legal Studies Basic Litigation Procedures Basic Corporate Procedures 1 3 3 1.5 1-5 CREDIT LAB HOURS HOURS Legal Studies 154 Legal Studies 157 Legal Studies 176 Legal Studies 179 Land Registry System Wills and Probate Legal Office Procedures I Role of the Legal Assistant Legal Aid Specialty Legal Office Management Specialty It is anticipated that students on this option will be in a position to challenge the basic procedural courses. 1.5 Although some procedural courses are suggested, the emphasis in the Para-Legal Studies option is on providing students with a thorough grasp of the theoretical apsects of the practice of law and practices within the legal office. C o u r s e s may be taken in any order and individuals are encouraged to adapt a program that meets their specific interests and requirements. Programs must be approved by the Co-ordinator. Students must provide evidence that they have legal office experience before being admitted; a research paper must be completed before a Certificate is awarded. 3 19.0 S E C O N D TERM Communications 151 Legal Studies 177 Commerce 301 Legal Studies 151 Legal Studies 162 Legal Studies 163 Legal Studies 165 Business Writing Legal Office CAPILANO C O L L E G E CERTIFICATE Directed Work Experience Major Program Requirements Recommended Courses Legal Studies II Litigation REQUIRED C O U R S E S Commerce 196/198 • Commerce 199 English 100 Legal Studies 150/151 Legal Studies 170 Legal Studies 180 3 3 3 6 3 3 21.0 • Students with extensive legal office experience may be given exemption credit. Corporate Procedures Mortgages and Conveyancing 19.0 SUMMER TERM * Legal Studies 170 CREDIT HOURS 21 18 39 0 Legal Research Research Design . . . Career Practicum . . . Composition Legal Studies Legal Research . . . . Contracts I 3 3.0 The summer term is not mandatory and students may make up this course during the third and fourth terms. P L U S A N Y O F THE F O L L O W I N G C O M P L E M E N T S TO M A K E A TOTAL O F 39 CREDIT H O U R S . THIRD TERM Legal Studies 181 Contracts II 3 Business 173 Consumer Law 3 C o m m e r c e 186 Consumer Counselling 3 Legal Studies 163 Corporate Procedures 3 Legal Studies 253 Company Law 3 Legal Studies 270 Labour Law 3 OR 18.0 LITIGATION SPECIALTY Legal Studies 162 Litigation Procedures 3 Legal Studies 172 Legal Documents 3 Legal Studies 252 Torts 3 Legal Studies 256 Family Law 3 Legal Studies 258 Criminal Procedures 3 Legal Studies 268 Criminal Law _3 OR 18.0 PROBATE AND PROPERTY SPECIALTY Legal Studies 181 Contracts II 3 Legal Studies 154 Land Registry System 1.5 Legal Studies 157 Wills and Probate 1.5 Legal Studies 165 Mortgages and Conveyancing 3 Legal Studies 154 Municipal Law 3 Legal Studies 255 Real Property 3 Legal Studies 257 Estate Planning _3 Commerce 396 Communications 152 Legal Studies 159 Legal Studies 160 Legal Studies 161 Legal Studies 172 Legal Studies 180 Introduction to Research Technical Writing Legal Office Accounting EXAMPLE: COMMERCIAL 1.5 3 3 Legal Theory Legislative Process 1.5 Legal Documents . . Contracts I The remaining 3 credit hours must be chosen to complete a specialty 3 21.0 FOURTH TERM Commerce 198 Research Design 1.5 Commerce Career Practicum 6 199/200 Legislative Legal Studies Process 171 1.5 The remaining 9 credit hours must be chosen to complete a specialty 9 OR AND CORPORATE SPECIALTY 180 LEGAL AID SPECIALTY Business 173 Consumer Law 3 Legal Studies 169 Citizen Advocacy 3 Legal Studies 250 Law in Society 3 Legal Studies 258 Criminal Procedures 3 Legal Studies 259 Human Rights 3 Legal Studies 268 Criminal Law* _3 OR 18.0 L E G A L O F F I C E MANAGEMENT SPECIALTY Business 152/153 Practical Accounting I & II 6 Business Mgmt 161 Credit and Collections 1.5 Commerce 184 O r g a n i z a t i o n a l and O f f i c e Dynamics 3 Legal Studies 159 Legal Office Accounting . . . . 3 Legal Studies 181 Contracts II 3 Legal Studies 270 Labour Law 3 19.5 18.0 0 * Legal Studies 1 70: Legal Research forms an essential part of the program and may be taken either in the summer, evenings, or possibly on a weekend depending on when the course is offered. Para-Legal Studies Option This option is designed for students who have at least two years of legal office experience, who wish to specialize in the following areas of study: Commercial and Corporate Specialty Litigation Specialty Probate and Property Specialty 28 business procedures, particularly within the area students choose to seek employment. Students on this option may specialize, in the third or fourth term, by electing legal or medical procedural courses Individual p r o g r e s s and achievement of specific performance objectives are e m phasized. Office Technology Program This program is d e s i g n e d to assist the students in ascertaining and sharpening their clerical skills, in developing their marketable aptitudes and in expanding their abilities and knowledge. Clerical positions are as diverse as the wide variety of fascinating occupations in which they abound; many clerical positions offer excellent opportunities for advancement. The following program of study provides students with a solid background for occupations involving; bookkeeping, banking, communications, data control, payroll, purchasing, public relations and numerous other essential responsibilities within fields such as advertising, marketing, purchasing, transportation, manufacturing, public sen/ice, law and medicine. ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA CREDIT LAB HOURS HOURS 60 _I8_ 78 0 TT~ Major Program Requirements Electives FIRST TERM Business 150 C o m m e r c e 152 C o m m e r c e 158 Commerce 183 Communications 150 Elective Essentials of Bookkeeping Typing I Office Technology Calculators and Calculations Basic Communications A S S O C I A T E IN A R T S AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA 3 4.5 3 .. 1.5 1.5 Communications 151 Elective THIRD TERM Mathematics 099 C o m m e r c e 164 Commerce Commerce Commerce Commerce 166 186 258 180 Commerce Commerce Commerce Commerce Elective 176 197 199 259 CAPILANO C O L L E G E CERTIFICATE 7 Major Program Requirements Electives „ „ „ _ _ „ FIRST TERM Business 150 Essentials of Bookkeeping C o m m e r c e 152 Typing I C o m m e r c e 156 Alphabetic Shorthand . . . C o m m e r c e 158 Office Technology Communications Basic Communications .. 150 Elective** 33 6 390 Commerce 184 Essentials of Bookkeeping II Introduction to Data Processing Typing II Organization & Office Dynamics Business Writing 3 Communications 151 5 3 1.5 Essentials of Bookkeeping Typing II Shorthand S p e e d Development Organizational & Office Dynamics Business Writing 3 3 •' Machine Transcription . . . C o m m e r c e 164 Typing S p e e d Development I Production Typing I Shorthand S p e e d Development Professional Development Seminar . . . Office Procedures I C o m m e r c e 180 3 Practical Mathematics . . . Typing S p e e d Development I Production Typing I Consumer Counselling .. Office Procedures I Professional Development Seminar . . . Credit and Collections .. Typing S p e e d Development Production Typing II . . . . Career Seminar Career Practicum Office Procedures II 19.5' ——• 15 3 1.5 1.5 3 3 3 15 3 3 19.5 2 C o m m e r c e 258 Elective** 5 6.0 1.5 1.5 0 3 1.5 3 3 3 ~210 ~TI" 1.5 1.5 1.5 3 1.5 3 3 3 3 M a c h i n e Transcription Commerce 174 Typing S p e e d Development II Production Typing II Shorthand S p e e d Development Public Relations Office Procedures II — 8 0 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 3 1-5 3 3 — 3 3 18.0 3 * * Electives should be chosen in consultation with Co-ordinator. A student whose goal is to become either a legal, medical or executive secretary will be assisted in choosing the appropriate courses. 5 1.5 * Public Relations Program This is a two year Career Program designed to train individuals to be qualified Public Relations practitioners. No similar program exists in British Columbia, therefore graduates will find a ready market for their skills. C o u r s e s will involve study in every area of public relations as well as background courses in the humanities and social s c i e n c e s . Candidates with some experience in public relations will also be considered for admission to a one year certificate program. 6 19.5 C o m m e r c e 163 C o m m e r c e 185 Commerce 259 Elective** 1.5 1.5 3 1.5 3 3 1 3 4.5 1 FOURTH TERM Commerce 176 Commerce 179 0 6 Commerce 162 C o m m e r c e 166 Commerce 178 1 3 2 THIRD TERM 3 4.5 0 LAB HOURS 3 4.5 4.5 3 3 Elective** Elective FOURTH TERM Business Management 161 Commerce 165 64.5 10.5 Business 155 C o m m e r c e 154 Commerce 177 S E C O N D TERM Business 155 Business Management 180 Commerce 154 Commerce 185 Major Program Requirements Electives S E C O N D TERM 3 3 3 19 5 CREDIT HOURS 1.5 Secretarial Program (Legal, Medical or Executive) A secretarial position has always been an excellent springboard from which a person can enter any number of interesting fields, such as advertising, editing journalism, public relations, legal and public service. Today, even men are obtaining the practical skills that secretarial training provides. This program is geared specifically towards improving practical skills, and towards providing students with an understanding of At the time of printing the final content of the program has not been finalized. The Co-ordinator of the program will supply more detailed information on request. • T h i s program is awaiting final approval from the Department of Education. 29 CREDIT LAB HOURS HOURS THIRD T E R M Art Program Art 250 Art 257 Art 260 Art 262 Art 282 Elective This recently expanded program offers a wide variety of Fine and A p p l i e d Arts courses which are structured into five basic options: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Art 2 5 5 Art 261 Art 263 Art 265 Art 283 Elective The Art Education and the B.F.A. Studio options are primarily for students intending to continue their studies following a one or two-year experience at this C o l l e g e , whereas the Crafts and the Communicative Arts options can lead directly into employment. Consisting of basic art experiences designed to thoroughly prepare students for entry to the Vancouver School of Art or to any other Art School, this program is also appropriate for those wishing to enter fields where a generalized practical art background would be an advantage. In addition, the varied nature of the courses offered in this program provides an excellent opportunity for students to investigate the visual arts on a more tentative basis or to enrich their lives through creative experiences in selected areas of study. Students enrolled in other College programs are invited to take one or more courses on an elective basis. 30 12 36 78 B.F.A. S T U D I O P R O G R A M T R A N S F E R C U R R I C U L U M Art 152 Life Drawing 3 Art 158 Design I 3 English Any transferable English course 3 Art 100 History of Art I 3 Elective 3 Elective 3 Elective 3 21 CREDIT L A B HOURS HOURS 66 9 6 6 78 9 SECOND Art 178 Art 184 English ART EDUCATION CURRICULUM Art 101 Elective Elective Elective FIRST T E R M Art 164 Art 172 Art 174 Art 178 Art 183 C m n s 153 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 21 TERM Design II Life Drawing Any transferable English course History of Art II 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 3 —?_ 21 0 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 — 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 0 THIRD T E R M 3 Art 250 Art 260 English Elective Elective Elective 3 S E C O N D TERM Introduction to the Visual Arts II General Drawing II Painting II Sculpture II Design II Printmaking II Communications and the Arts 0 A S S O C I A T E IN A R T S A N D S C I E N C E D I P L O M A Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements Electives A S S O C I A T E IN A R T S A N D S C I E N C E D I P L O M A Art 101 3 3 3 3 3 3 This program is d e s i g n e d for students planning to apply for admission to the second or third year at U.B.C. in the B.F.A. Studio program. Those applying for this program are reminded that their admission to the U.B.C. program is by selection, based on standing, courses and assessment of portfolios. The year of admission, whether second or third, will be at the discretion of the Department at U.B.C. Art Education 3 3 3 3 3 3 3_ 21 3 U.B.C. Bachelor of Fine Arts Studio Program Lab Fees: Lab fees must be paid at time of registration. The exceptions, for which no lab fees are charges, are: Art 100, 101, 173, 193, 260, 261 and Communications 150, 153. Art 154 Art 158 Art 167 Art 171 Art 182 C m n s 150 Painting M e d i a II 19th and 20th Century Art . A d v a n c e d Life Drawing II . . Sculpture IV Printmaking IV 18 Note: Students enrolled in the Art Program should be prepared to purchase supplies in amounts ranging from $25.00 to $75.00 per term. Introduction to the Visual Arts I General Drawing I Design I Sculpture I Painting I Printmaking I Basic Corhmunications 3 • Students who wish to substitute English courses for C o m munication 150/153 may do so with the Art Co-ordinator's approval. The A d v a n c e d Art Study Program provides opportunities for those who have already gained basic skills and who feel the need for experiences of a challenging and professional nature. Art 100 3 3 3 3 3 3_ 18 FOURTH TERM Art Education Program Bachelor of Fine Arts Studio Program Crafts Program Commercial Program A d v a n c e d Art Study Program Major Program requirements General Education requirements Electives Painting M e d i a Sculpture III 19th and 20th Century Art . A d v a n c e d Life Drawing I . . . Printmaking III FOURTH Art 2 5 5 Art 261 English Elective Elective Elective 3 3 30 Painting M e d i a I 19th and 20th Century Art . TERM Painting M e d i a II 19th and 20th Century Art . Crafts Program Commercial Art Program The core content of this program consists of weaving, fabric printing and pottery but is supported by courses in drawing and design. Those who graduate may seek employment as instructors in a variety of community art programs or in institutions making use of Occupational Therapy. Alternatively, they may establish themselves as practising artists on either a full-time or part-time basis. The crafts offer ideal opportunities for individuals wishing to extend their leisure-time horizons and for students in other programs seeking electives. , A S S O C I A T E IN A R T S A N D S C I E N C E D I P L O M A "The ear is a less trustworthy witness Herodotus 500 B C . Major Program requirements . . . General Education requirements Electives A variety of real and simulated visual communication problems are taken from initial d e s i g n concept to finished art and reproduction. The aim is to provide the job experience demanded by employers and portfolio samples to demonstrate competence. Some graduates may elect to enter the work force, to earn as they learn and gain more experience, but the program recognizes that many may d e c i d e to continue their studies at four-year colleges such as Vancouver School of Art, Graphic Design department. CREDIT L A B HOURS HOURS 54 6 6 66 General Drawing I Design I Fabric Printing I Pottery I Weaving I 3 3 3 3 Weaving II Basic Communications 3 3 18 S E C O N D TERM Art 161 Fabric Printing II Art 164 General Drawing II Art 165 Pottery II Art 168 Weaving I or Art 169 Weaving II Art 178 Design II C m n s 153 Communications and the Arts TERM THIRD Introduction to the Art 100 Visual Arts I Weaving ill Art 267 Pottery III Art 273 Fabric Printing III Art 284 Elective FOURTH Art 101 Art 268 Art 274 Art 2 8 5 Elective TERM Introduction to the Visual Arts II Weaving IV Pottery IV Fabric Printing IV eye." Effective communication relies today, more than ever, on a creative visual component. The Commercial Art Program prepares students for employment in commercial, industrial or educational areas of visual communications. After acquiring basic skills and knowledge during the first two terms, the student is encouraged to concentrate on those areas which talent and temperament suggest are most suitable. CRAFTS CURRICULUM* FIRST T E R M Art 154 Art 158 Art 160 Art 163 Art 168 or Art 169 C m n s 150 than the The curriculum lists several courses which are also offered in other options and departments, including General Drawing, Design and Photography. These are s p e c i a l sections which conform to the Communicative Arts program requirements. While they may be open to students not involved in the complete program, the specific course content should be d i s c u s s e d with the Co-ordinator and be fully understood before enrolment. The program demands that considerable time be spent on aassignments over and above the class hours listed. Studio periods are s c h e d u l e d after many classes, to permit assignments to be completed, using college facilities and equipment. A S S O C I A T E IN A R T S A N D S C I E N C E D I P L O M A CREDIT L A B HOURS HOURS Major Program Requirements 66 12 General Education Requirements 6 Electives 9 81 12 3 3 3 3 3 FIRST T E R M Art 152 Art 154 Art 158 Art 162 Art 175 18 3 Art 193 C m n s 150 3 Life Drawing General Drawing I Design I Lettering and Type Photography for the Graphic Arts Graphic Communications . . . Basic Communications 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 21 0 3 o 15 3 3 3 3 S E C O N D TERM Art 164 General Drawing II Art 170 Graphic Arts Art 173 Introduction to Advertising . . Art 178 Design II Art 184 Life Drawing Art 192 Typography Cmns 153 Communications and the Arts Elective 3 3 15 3 • Students who wish to substitute English courses for C o m munication 150/153 may do so with the Art Co-ordinator's approval. THIRD T E R M Art 251 Art 252 Art 275 Art 278 Art 298 Elective 31 Illustration A p p l i e d Design I Rendering Techniques I — Graphic and Print M e d i a . . . Advertising Design 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 24 3 3 3 3 3 3. 18 0 3 3 6 CREDIT HOURS FOURTH TERM Art 253 Art 269 Art 279 Art 280 Art 295 Elective A p p l i e d Design II A d v a n c e d Illustration Display Design Design Workshop Rendering Techniques II ... 3 3 3 3 3 * 18 3 3 Students desiring an Advanced Art Study Program Certificate may select any combination of the above courses which result in the accumulation of the required number of credit hours. ADVANCED ART STUDY PROGRAM CAPILANO C O L L E G E CERTIFICATE Major Program Requirements 6 Suggested Electives: Art 181, Fashion Illustration II Art 263, A d v a n c e d Life Drawing Suggested Elective: Art 176, Studio and Location Photography Suggested Electives: Art 262, A d v a n c e d Life Drawing Art 180, Fashion Illustration I Advanced Art Study Program This program provides opportunities for individuals to acquire expertise in selected areas of advanced study. The typical candidate will have successfully completed two or more years of study in related fields at this or any other post-secondary institution. Others will have gained equivalent experience outside the formal educational system. A d m i s s i o n to courses in this Program will be at the discretion of the instructors concerned and candidates must be prepared for a preliminary evaluation process which will determine their eligibility. Those admitted to the A d v a n c e d Art Study Program courses will be expected to be highly motivated and capable of serious, sustained effort. A feature of this option is the extended studio time made available to participants on a regularly scheduled basis for the purpose of individual research and development, especially where a c c e s s to essential equipment and facilities are necessary. FIRST TERM Art 306 A d v a n c e d Stone Carving I Art 312 Ceramic Casting and Decorating Techniques I Art 314 Advanced Painting — Ideas and Contemporary M e d i a I Art 316 A d v a n c e d Editioning — Intaglio and Relief I SECOND TERM Art 304 Foundry Practice I Art 310 C e r a m i c Casting and Decorating Techniques II Art 315 A d v a n c e d Painting — Ideas and Contemporary M e d i a II Art 317 Advanced Editioning — Intaglio and Relief II CREDIT HOURS 1? 12 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 IMPORTANT: This particular program has been developed as a means of providing the serious art student who has already achieved a broad art education with the opportunity for further in-depth study in selected art areas. Since students enrolled in this program will require a considerable amount of studio and workshop time using the facilities and equipment of the Art C e n tre, a maximum of two courses only may be taken in any one term. With the prior authorization of the Art Co-ordinator, a student may be permitted to enroll in more than two courses per term. Marketing Management Program The student who enrolls in this program will in the first year take courses that will acquaint him/her with a broad b a s e d understanding of the business environment. In the second year of the program the student concentrates on such areas as Retailing, Consumer Behaviour, Elements of Advertising Strategy, Marketing Research, Merchandising, International Marketing, and Marketing Management. Projects, case problems, special assignments, and field trips are extensively used to stimulate the application of theory and principles, and to develop analytical abilities to achieve greater occupational competence. This particular program prepares the student for a wide variety of challenging positions requiring special skills in such fields as retailing, buying, advertising, insurance selling, and market research. Business Management Programs The accelerating development of scientific knowledge and behavioural s c i e n c e s increases the complexity of modern business management. In order to compete, the prospective business manager must not only be intelligent and hard-working but also have a good business education as well. Computer Systems Management Program This two-year, day-time program provides the student with a comprehensive education in basic managerial skills, and gives a practical foundation for those who wish to enter a career in business either as an independent entrepreneur or as a prospective employee-manager. The following programs are offered by the Business Management Division: 1. Accounting/Financial Management Program - 2 year 2. Marketing Management Program - 2 year 3. Computer Systems Management Program - 2 year In North America, the number of computer installations has grown from about 2000 in 1960 to 100,000 in 1970 and is estimated to reach 400,000 by 1980 The computing industry is currently growing at a 20 per cent annual rate indicating that it will not be too many years until this industry will have the same economic impact as the auto industry has today This rapid growth has produced a serious shortage of qualified computer operators, programmers and systems analysts. Up to 1965, due to costs, computers were available only to the larger businesses. Today a need exists for versatile computer personnel people trained in computer operation, programming, systems analysis, the application of computers, and management. A Capilano C o l l e g e Associate In Arts and Science Diploma is awarded upon successful completion of 93 credit hours in A c counting/Financial Management or Marketing Management. The Computer Systems Management Program requires 91.5 credit hours for a diploma. Developments in the last decade have brought computer capability to an ever-expanding circle of smaller organizations One such development has been the creation of efficient and low-cost minicomputers and small business computers. In terms of number of installations, these small and minicomputers now represent 83 per cent of the total number of computer installations. These small organizations cannot afford specialists in each segment of computer application. Accounting/Financial Management Program This program is d e s i g n e d to provide the student with the opportunity to obtain a sound understanding of accounting principles and concepts as well as other aspects of business. The program prepares the student for a career in public accounting or financial management in commercial or industrial enterprises as well as in government occupations. The student concentrates in his/her second term on courses in financial management s u c h as Cost Accounting, Finance and Managerial Accounting, Taxation and Auditing. Application of principles and theories is stressed through the use of case-method and problem-solving techniques. Further preparation for work in management will be achieved by developing the student's ability to analyze business problems and to arrive at logical solutions. This two year program provides the students with the comprehensive training required to satisfy this new business need for a more versatile computer person. Due to limited s p a c e in the program, all interested persons s h o u l d a p p l y early. Candidates must have a n interview with the Co-ordinator of the program. Entry to the program will be based on interest and aptitude. ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements Recommended C o u r s e s Electives 33 2£E!I HOURS 93 0 0 ; 0 Total 93 Business Management Programs MARKETING MANAGEMENT PROGRAM FIRST T E R M (FALL) Business Management Business Management Business Management 150 158 170 Business Management 172 B u s i n e s s Management 180 Business Management 184 Business Management 290 Communications 150 Communications 161 Economics 100 S E C O N D T E R M (SPRING) Business Management 151 Business Business Business Business Business Management 159 Management 171 Management 176 Management 185 Mangement 262 Business Mangement Communications 151 Economics 101 291 B u s i n e s s Mathematics Marketing I Mathematics of B u s i n e s s and Finance . . . . ' Administrative Practises and Organization Introduction to Data Processing Accounting I Programming I Communications Human Relations in Management Introduction to Economics Business Business Business Business Management 260 Management 263 Management 264 Mangement 266 Business Management 271 Business Management 272 Business Management 273 Business Business Business Business Management Management Management Management Communications 275 280 292 293 161 T E R M (SPRING) 171 Management 157 Management 189 Management 256 Business Management 257 Business Management 261 Business Management 265 Business Business Business Business Business Business Business Management Management Management Management Management Management Management 274 276 277 278 284 294 296 . 3 . 3 4.5 3 . 3 3 4 5 3 4.5 . 3 . 4.5 . 6 3 Statistical Analysis and Application Marketing II A p p l i e d B u s i n e s s Statistics Management in Industry Accounting II Systems Analysis and Applications I Programming II Business Writing C a n a d i a n Economics (Macro and Micro) . 3 3 3 3 3 27 27 .25 5 . 4.5 3 4.5 3 4.5 3 45 3 4.5 . 3 . 4.5 3 . 3 . 6 . 3 3 3 B u s i n e s s Law I Salesmanship I Financial and Managerial Accounting I Finance I A d v a n c e d Data Processing Cost Accounting I Canadian Financial Institutions and Money Markets . . . . Retailing C o n s u m e r Behaviour Elements of Advertising Strategy Marketing Research Auditing Programming III Systems Analysis and Applications II H u m a n Relations in Management B u s i n e s s Law II Elements of Merchandising B u s i n e s s Dynamics II Financial and Managerial Accounting II Corporation and Society Finance II Quantitative A i d s to Decision M a k i n g Cost Accounting II Marketing Management International Marketing Salesmanship II 24 .24 3 3 3 . 3 . 3 3 3 3 4.5 . 3 3 1.5 1.5 3 3 . 3 . 6 . 3 . 3 21 FOURTH Business Business Business Business COMPUTER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT PROGRAM 3 4.5 24 THIRD T E R M (FALL) Business 170 Business 260 Business Management 255 ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL ADMINISTRATION PROGRAM 21 22 5 3 3 3 3 . 3 3 . 3 3 3 3 Taxation Programming IV Management and Information Systems . 6 45 21 34 21 19.5 BUSINESS MANAGEMENT EVENING AND EXTENSION PROGRAMS The evening program of courses is designed to provide the following: A. A practical exposure to the basic managerial skills required in business. Students enrolled in this program complete a series of eight courses taking two courses per term. While the particular sequence of courses is not rigid, the following sequence is recommended: Term 1 BSMG 184: A c c o u n t i n g I plus B S M G 176: Management in Industry Term 2 B S M G 185: Accounting II plus B S M G 172: A d ministrative Practices and Organization. Term 3 B S . G 163: Principles of Supervision and Leadership pfus B S M G 150: Business Mathematics Term 4 B S M G 180: Introduction to Data Processing plus Business 170: Business Law I Satisfactory completion of the above courses will provide the student with a Certificate In Administrative Management. The total number of credit hours for this certificate is 27 credit hours. B. A n opportunity to take courses that carry credit into other certificates, diplomas, or professional designations. Those professional areas currently recognizing courses taken at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e toward their own p r o f e s s i o n a l designations are the following: - Chartered Accountant ( C A . ) - Certified General Accountant (C.G.A.) - Registered Industrial Accountant (R.I.A.) - Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators (I.C.S.A.) - Bachelor of Commerce Degree (U.B.C.) - Bachelor of Arts: Economics and C o m m e r c e (S.F.U.) - Associate of the Trust Companies Institute (A.T.C.I.) Information related to the specific college courses which are recognized by the above named areas can be obtained from the Co-ordinator. Business Management Division. C . The necessary courses to complete the requirements of a Certificate in Municipal Administration: Part I. These particular courses are the following: B S M G 172: Administrative Practices and Organization. B S M G 176: Management in Industry B S M G 184: B S M G 185: Accounting I Accounting II Business 170: Business 171: Business Law I Business Law II Both courses equate to Principles of Administrations Both courses equate to Principles of Accounting Both courses equate to Principles of Law Economics 100: Economics 101: Introduction to Economics Canadian Economics: Macro & Micro Considerations Both courses equate to Principles of Economics D. The opportunity for those people interested in furthering their business skills and knowledge may enroll in one or more courses without any obligation of having to complete diploma or certificate requirements Interested students are asked to contact the Cc-ordinator, Business Management Program for further details about the courses described in this calendar. 35 ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA CREDIT LAB HOURS HOURS Major Program requirements 42 10 General Education Requirements 6 Recommended C o u r s e s 0 Practicum 24 ~72 10 FIRST TERM C m n s 150 Basic Communications . . 3 Education 152 Program Development I . 3 2 Education 154 Health and Nutrition I 3 Education 1 5 5 * * Human Growth and Development I 3 Education 364 Practicum I 6 18 2 Early Childhood Education Program Early Childhood Education is a two-year program preparing the graduate to work in nursery schools,-day-care centres, hospitals and other facilities which serve children with special needs. Although the focus of the program centers primarily on children from 3-5 years, it is not confined to that group. Expanded community needs require the training of personnel to work with both older and younger children in the day-care field Education 155 Human Growth and Development I must be taken prior to or concurrently with Education 152. S E C O N D TERM The core material of the program concentrates on the study of human development and the foundations and philosophy of Early Childhood Education. An interrelated series of courses permits detailed study of program organization, curriculum content and guidance methods. Other areas of study include health, nutrition, first aid, family life, the exceptional child, parentteacher relationships and the administration of pre-school centres. Theory and practice are closely related throughout the program, as students spend regular periods each term observing and participating in the C o l l e g e Day Care Centre and other pre-schools under the supervision of College Instructors. Courses are presented in a manner which promotes active student participation through labs, practical demonstrations, reports, projects and general discussion. Considerable responsibility is given students, enabling them to develop into creative, independent, knowledgeable persons. Education 151 Education 153 Education 156 Education 164 Education 365 Literature for Young Children Program Development II Human Growth and Development II Health and Nutrition II . . Practicum II 3 3 2 2 3 3 6 18 THIRD TERM Education 157 Education 250 Education 252 Education 254 Applicants are required to present a medical certificate and a T.B. X-ray certificate, as well as to arrange an interview with the Program Co-ordinator, prior to acceptance into this program. Education 366 Applicants who have previously taken Early Childhood Education courses elsewhere, including Adult Education courses for which recognition has been granted by the Provincial Child Care Facilities Licensing Board, may submit a record of these courses for consideration for credit towards the C o l l e g e Associate in Arts and Science Diploma. FOURTH TERM Cmns 155 Education 262 Education 264 Individual courses may be taken by students working toward accreditation by the Provincial C h i l d Care Facilities Board, but not wishing to pursue the full diploma. Applicants in either of the above two categories should consult with the Program Co-ordinator for course approval. Education 268 Education 367 36 The C h i l d and Family Life Program Development III Creative Arts for the Young C h i l d Foundations of Early Childhood Education . . Practicum III Communications in Early Childhood Education . . Special Education Pre-School Administration Interpersonal Relationships in Teaching . . . Practicum IV 3 3 2 3 3 §. 18 2 3 3 2 3 3 6 18 2 ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA CREDIT LAB HOURS HOURS Program for the Developmentally Handicapped Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements Practicum FIRST TERM Cmns 150 Education 152 Education 154 Education 1 5 5 * * Education 364 . . . — Communications Program Development I Health and Nutrition I . . . Human Growth & Development I Practicum I 45 6 24 75 3 3 3 10 10 2 3 6_ 2 " Education 155 Human Growth and Development I must be taken prior to or concurrently with Education 152. S E C O N D TERM This program is a two-year course of studies preparing students to work as support staff in facilities which serve persons with special needs, including infant intervention programs, pre-school settings, recreational, residential and rehabilitation programs. Education 151 The core material of the program is the study of human growth and development based on "normative standards." Building on this foundation, the student is introduced to an overview of developmental handicaps of a sensory, mental, psychological and emotional nature. An interrelated series of courses permit detailed study of program planning, guidance methods and interpersonal relationship. Theory and practice are closely related throughout the program, as students s p e n d regular periods each term observing and participating under supervision in a variety of programs including day care centres and other pre-school settings as well as in facilities for the handicapped. Education 164 Education 365 Education 165 Courses are presented in a manner which promotes active student participation through practical demonstrations, reports, projects and discussions. Considerable responsibility is given to students enabling them to develop into creative, independent knowledgeable persons. Education 366 Education 270 Education 153 Education 156 THIRD TERM Education 157 Education 250 Education 252 FOURTH TERM C M N S 155 B e c a u s e this program is closely allied with the C o l l e g e ' s current Early Childhood Education Program, students completing the program for the Developmentally Handicapped will also be qualified to work in day care centres and other preschools. Applicants are required to present a medical certificate and a T.B. X-ray Certificate, as well as to arrange an interview with the Program Co-ordinator, prior to acceptance into this program. Education 262 Education 268 Education 271 Education 367 37 Literature for Young Children Program Development II . Human Growth and Development II Health and Nutrition II . . . Practicum II Field Survey The C h i l d and Family Life Program Development III Creative Arts for the Young C h i l d Practicum [II Volunteer Placement . . . . Communications in Early Childhood Education . . Special Education Interpersonal Relationships in Teaching Individual Project Practicum IV 3 3 2 2 3 3 6 3_ 21 4 3 3 2 3 6 3_ 18 2 3 3 2 3 3 6_ 18 2 Students who register for any of the following individual courses will pay the following fees: Media Media Media Media Media Media Media Media Media Media Resources Program 050 051 052 053 072 073 074 081 151 $ 5.00 $ 5.00 $ 5.00 $10.00 $2500 $25.00 $30.00 $15.00 $15.00 Media 152: $15.00 Media 153: $20.00 Media 170: $25.00 Media 183: $25.00 Media 185: $25.00 iMedia 187: $15.00 Media 189: $30.00 Media 260: $15.00 Media 271: $30.00 Note: Lab Fees for other courses to be arranged by the Department. ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA CREDIT HOURS 81 6 87 Electives STUDIO LAB HOURS FIRST TERM C m n s 150 Cmns 156 Media 152 M e d i a 154 Media 161 Media 183 Basic Communications M e d i a Resources C o m munications Graphics for the Media Specialist Media Applications I . . . . Technical Applications I . Theory and Applications of Photographic Production 3 3 3 6 3 6 24 MEDIA R E S O U R C E S PROGRAM S E C O N D TERM The M e d i a Resources Program trains students for the growing opportunities in using intermediate-level media technologies in all forms of education and training. The program is oriented toward educational institutions at all levels, social agencies, community media and journalism, as well as industry. Work opportunities in this field include production, distribution, training for media skills and social animation roles. The core of the program involves production training in basic and advanced photography, graphics, audio, film, multi-media and television All students are trained in the basic technical and aesthetic skills in these media and complete finished productions in them. M e d i a 185 M e d i a 187 M e d i a 189 In addition the program includes courses in learning theory, resource centres and libraries, basic electronic systems, communications and the politics of media. Elective Assignments and courses focus on the types of needs now being expressed in the media field Field practicums occupy much of the student's time in the fourth term. THIRD TERM Media 151 Media Media Media Media Media Media Media Media Media The program consists of four terms of study and begins each year in the Fall Term. OPTION C O U R S E S Each term the department will offer several courses that are open to college students and community members not enrolled full time in the Media Resources Program. These courses carry college credit and will count towards a Capilano C o l l e g e Diploma. In general, these courses are numbered M e d i a 050 to M e d i a 074. C h e c k the timetable to see which ones will be offered in a given term. 153 155 163 171 253 254 260 261 271 M e d i a 287 Graphics for Multi-Media Productions Film Animation Media Applications II . . . Technical Applications II Small Format Television Advanced Photography .. Audio Production Research Methods for the M e d i a Specialist OR 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 Q J 27 Filmmaking M e d i a Applications III Audio Visual Graphics . . Technical Applications III Educational Television Systems Audio for Film and Television 6 3 3 3 3 ~3~ 3 3 6 3 24 ~~6~ 3 3 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 15 21 FOURTH TERM M e d i a 256 LAB F E E S : Media 301 The M e d i a Resources Program courses generally have a lab fee component which must be paid by the student taking these courses. Lab fees are collected at the time of registration and go towards payment for supplies and depreciation costs of equipment. M e d i a 302 M e d i a 303 Students who registered for a full program will pay the fees listed below: C h o i c e Of: M e d i a 263 Term 1: $60,00 Term 2: $60.00 Elective Term 3: $60 00 Term 4: $40.00 38 Learning Resources Centres Special Instructional Aids Instructional M e d i a Productions The M e d i a Specialist Education and training in .. Technical Applications IV OR Students must demonstrate progress in a small ensemble performance situation or as a soloist in their second year before the Associate in Arts and S c i e n c e Diploma will be awarded. A p proximately eight hours per week for rehearsal should be allocated in the students timetable. Students must play in a prescribed number of concerts, to be determined by the music faculty. N.B.: Those students who wish to enter Theory 100 should know the Rudiments of Theory (Music 010). Students who do not have enough background in theory will be required to take M u s i c 010. Music Programs Music Transfer Program This program is designed for students who desire to go on to a degree program at a Canadian University. All courses in this program carry transfer to the Music Department of the University of B.C. Transferability has also been arranged with the Faculty of M u s i c at the University of Victoria. The program consists of a liberal arts education and specialized music training, including theory, history, and applied music. Capilano College offers two music programs: The Commercial M u s i c Program and the M u s i c Transfer Program. In addition, a M u s i c Therapy program is under consideration for the 1977-78 calendar year. Most courses are open to part-time students. Commercial Music Program This program offers the aspiring jazz musician an in-depth grounding in his field. The working musician will also gain deeper understanding and practice of his craft as a part-time student. Six theory courses offer a thorough insight into the tonal period and 20th century techniques. Orchestration and arranging courses will enable the student to use his/her theoretical knowledge in more practical ways. Improvisation and Private Music Instruction courses develop the soloistic performance of the student. Ensemble courses will permit the student to experience work in a large stage band or in smaller jazz ensembles. ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA CREDIT LAB HOURS HOURS Major Program Requirements 60 General Education Requirements 24 84 FIRST TERM English M u s i c 120 M u s i c 150 M u s i c 164 ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA LAB CREDIT HOURS HOURS 20 58 Major Program Requirements 3 General Program Requirements 20 62.5 FIRST TERM Communications 3 C m n s 100 2 3 Theory V M u s i c 100 1 3 Ensemble M u s i c 150 3 History of J a z z Music 192 1.5 Private M u s i c Instruction M u s i c 164 1.5 Improvisation M u s i c 176 3 2 C l a s s Piano M u s i c 180 3 Repertoire M u s i c 178 5 21 Music 162 M u s i c 262 M u s i c 180 M u s i c 256 Elective Theory VI Ensemble Private Music C l a s s Piano Improvisation Repertoire Orchestration Instruction 3 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 3 3 17.5 English Music 121 M u s i c 151 Music 165 2 1 M u s i c 163 M u s i c 263 M u s i c 181 Music 157 Elective 2 5 THIRD TERM M u s i c 200 M u s i c 252 M u s i c 264 Music 270,, M u s i c 280 •Theory VII Ensemble Private M u s i c Instruction Arranging C l a s s Piano 3 3 1.5 3 1.5 12 Theory VIII Ensemble Private M u s i c Instruction Arranging C l a s s Piano 3 3 1.5 3 1.5 12 1.5 3 1.5 3 3 21 Any transferable English course History II Ensemble Private M u s i c Instruction C l a s s Strings or C l a s s Woodwinds C l a s s Piano Theory IV C h o s e n in consultation with the Co-ordinator 3 3 3 3 1.5 3 1.5 3 3 21 THIRD TERM 2 1 English 200 Music 100 M u s i c 252 M u s i c 162 2 M u s i c 262 Music 190 M u s i c 164 FOURTH TERM M u s i c 201 M u s i c 253 M u s i c 265 M u s i c 271 M u s i c 281 3 3 3 S E C O N D TERM SECOND TERM M u s i c 101 M u s i c 151 M u s i c 165 M u s i c 181 M u s i c 177 M u s i c 179 M u s i c 158 Any transferable English course History I Ensemble Private M u s i c Instruction C l a s s Strings or C l a s s Woodwinds C l a s s Piano Theory III C h o s e n in consultation with the Co-ordinator 2 1 Music 280 Elective 2 5 39 Literature to 1660 Theory V Ensemble C l a s s Strings or C l a s s Woodwinds History III Private M u s i c Instruction C l a s s Piano C h o s e n in consultation with the Co-ordinator 3 3 3 3 3 1.5 1.5 3_ 21 2 1 1 2 6 FOURTH TERM English 201 Music 101 Music 252 Music 163 or M u s i c 263 Music 191 Music 265 M u s i c 281 Elective Literature since 1660 Theory VI Ensemble C l a s s Strings CREDIT LAB HOURS HOURS ... 3 3 3 C l a s s Woodwinds History IV Private M u s i c Instruction C l a s s Piano C h o s e n in consultation with the Co-ordinator 3 3 3 21 2. 3. 1. Major program requirements . General program requirements Full acceptance into the Therapy option may be conditional on an adequate background in music and psychology. In addition to the M u s i c Therapy coursework, appropriate music and psychology courses (to a maximum of 19.5 credit hours per semester) may be prescribed. Some of the extra-musical courses may includeL Human Development 155 Special Education 262 Medical Terminology-Anatomy & Physiology 162-3 Social Psychology 200 Psychology 100 Psychology of Aging 205 Theory of Personality 220 Abnormal Psychology 222 Sociology of the Arts 222 Social Structures 100 Concepts & Theories of Society 101 Both the commercial and music transfer programs offer students enrolled in other College programs a continuing education in music and elective credit. Numerous music courses are available for part-time students. All applicants for either the Career or M u s i c Transfer Programs must do the following: 1. CREDIT LAB HOURS HOURS 57 15 3 All students entering music therapy must: 1. Comply with the general college entrance requirements. 2. Participate in an interview with the M u s i c Co-ordinator and a music therapy instructor. 3. Play an audition on his/her concentration instrument. 4. Take a theory placement test. ' 1.5 15 . ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA Comply with general admission requirements of Capilano College Participate in a private interview with the Co-ordinator of Music. Write a theory placement examination. Applicants for the Commercial M u s i c Program must also: Play an audition on their major instrument. NOTE: All full-time M u s i c students are expected to pay a lab fee of $40.00 per semester. Lab fees for part-time students shall be $8.00 per 3 credit hour practical course and/or $4 00 per 1.5 credit hour practical course. The following group of courses will provide Musicians with the knowledge and e x p e r i e n c e necessary for using m u s i c therapeutically with handicapped people of all ages. All interviews, auditions, and placement tests will be held in May and August of 1977. Interested persons are asked to phone the Capilano C o l l e g e M u s i c Department 986-1911 (local 289) for further details. CREDIT LAB HOURS HOURS SEMESTER I Music 102 Music Therapy Program Music 110 Music 140 Music 164 This program trains students to use music as a therapeutic medium in a variety of treatment settings. M u s i c therapists can be employed in psychiatric settings, schools and homes for retarded children and adults, general hospitals, facilities for handicapped people, correctional institutions, extended care units and geriatric hospitals, schools for emotionally disturbed and behaviour problem children as well as centres concentrating on preventitive medicine such as human growth and awareness institutes. Music 360 Interpersonal Skills for M u s i c Therapists M u s i c Appreciation M u s i c Therapy I Private M u s i c Instruction Practicum I 1-5 3 3 1-5 • _JL_ 12 —-T-= 4.5 SEMESTER 2 M u s i c 111 Music 141 Music 165 Students will be introduced to several established therapeutic models, will develop their musical and interpersonal skills, and apply these developing skills in practicum settings involving psychiatric, special education and chronic treatment for preschool children, adolescent, adults and geriatrics. Practicum work will be done at a number of centres including: Riverview Hospital; U.B.C. Psychiatric Day Care; The Maples; V G H Vanfield Extended Care; Jericho Hill School for the blind and deaf; the U.B.C. Pre-School for Special Children; the Burnaby Mental Health Pre-School Plus. Music 361 Music 176 M u s i c Appreciation M u s i c Therapy II Private M u s i c Instruction Practicum II Improvisation 1 3 3 1.5 6 1.5 .5 2 T5~ 3.5 SEMESTER 3 M u s i c 240 M u s i c 264 Music 362 Psych 201 Music 242 Students will be expected to synthesize personal therapeutic approaches from their own values and abilities, as well as from the course information offered. Graduates will be equipped to design music therapy programs for any age group with mental, physical or emotional disabilities. The graduates can expect to work in such settings as schools, group homes, small treatment centre, or provincial treatment institutions, offering psychiatric, special education and some physiotherapy programs. M u s i c therapists should expect to earn salaries comparable with occupational therapists, psychiatric nurses, clinical psychologists depending on their delegated amount of responsibility on a therapeutic team M u s i c Therapy Techniques Private M u s i c Instruction Practicum III Group Dynamics M u s i c through the Creative Arts 3 t.8 6 3 1 5 2 1 5 — 3.5 15 SEMESTER 4 Music 241 Music 265 M u s i c 363 M u s i c 364 Music 365 Note: This program will be offered upon final approval from the Ministry of Education. 40 Professional Development Private M u s i c Instruction Practicum IV Clinical Orientation Designing M u s i c Therapy Activities 3 1.5 6 3 — 1-5 15 ' 2 3.5 The program will provide the graduate with skills required to plan and operate good outdoor recreation programs and to manage facilities and recreational land and water resources. Skills in summer, winter, and aquatic wilderness leadership will be developed in the skills development courses. Emphasis is placed on experience in the field situation. The program c o m mences with a ten day backpacking expedition which serves as a lab for classroom work. Other trips are placed throughout the program. Outdoor Recreation Programs Each student's particular program concentration will be d e c i d e d in consultation with the program co-ordinator. Flexibility in the second year of the program enables students to specialize in their areas of interest. Students will be required to take first aid as part of their skills development program and will be required to pay an additional tevy to cover partial costs of equipment, field trips, and skills development courses In the fieldwork courses, student attitude and leadership capacity will be taken into account in the instructor's evaluation profile. S p e c i a l i z e d interest areas in the program include parks and recreation area management, ski area management, leadership and programming, and environmental education. Students acquire working skills in specialized areas during their practicum placements. Applicants for the Outdoor Recreation Management Program should familiarize themselves with the following admission requirements: Outdoor Recreation is playing an increasingly important role in the social and economic life of British Columbia. A n increase in available leisure time and public interest in the preservation of natural areas have increased the need for qualified, well-trained graduates capable of planning and directing recreation programs, facilities and teaching outdoor activity skills. • 1. Arrange an interview with the Co-ordinator of the program. (Interviews are held throughout the year.) 2. In order to be considered for the program, applicants must be at least nineteen years of age at the date of entry into the program. 3. After the interview, the Co-ordinator of the Outdoor Recreation Management Program will request the following documentation: a) At least two letters of reference, b) High school or Post-Secondary education transcripts where applicable, c) A letter of application, including a resume of past experiences, d) A doctor's certificate of health, including a chest x-ray. Outdoor Recreation Management Program The Capilano C o l l e g e Outdoor Recreation Management Program trains Para-Professionals to work effectively in a variety of outdoor recreation employment situations. Resource and facility management job opportunities exist in Provincial, and Municipal Park and Recreation agencies and in ski areas. Leadership, instructional and programming job opportunities exist in a variety of community, private and government agencies. photo by D. 41 Basham ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements followed by a third term course of Log Book experience (Practicum). Field trips are scheduled on weekends with classroom lectures on weekday evenings. CREDIT LAB HOURS HOURS 54.5 25 12 66.5 Students will enroll in one course per term, and must successfully complete each course in order to continue in the program Students must also obtain a B grade or better in order to progress to the next course. It is necessary that activity skills and leadership qualities be high in outdoor activities where leaders are responsible for peoples' lives. A student receiving a " C " grade may repeat the course or show proficiency in that activity during the following appropriate term, before continuing in the program. This must be arranged with the consent of the program Co-ordinator and the course Instructor. 25 FIRST TERM C m n s 150 Recreation 150 Recreation 152 Recreation 154 Recreation 160 Recreation 161 Recreation 166 SECOND Basic Communications . . Outdoor Recreation Areas Introduction to Outdoor Recreation Outdoor Recreation Facilities Physical Fitness in Theory and Practice Wilderness Backpacking I Environmental Education 3 3 2 3 3 The period of Log Book Experience is undertaken in the spring or summer of the third term. The log book must be satisfactorily completed in order to achieve college certification. 3 A n additional fee is charged for each course to cover field trips and equipment costs. 3 3 2 ,21 ~~4~ TERM C m n s 154 Recreation 151 Recreation 153 Recreation 157 Recreation 159 Recreation 163 Recreation 164 Communications in Recreation Outdoor Recreation Environments Work, Leisure and Society Skills Development Outdoor Recreation Administration Wilderness First Aid I Nordic Skiing WILDERNESS LEADERSHIP WILDERNESS NORDIC SKIING OPTION 3 3 2 3 1.5 3 WILDERNESS NORDIC SKIING OPTION FIRST TERM Recreation 161 Wilderness Backpacking I . . Recreation 163 Wilderness First Aid I Recreation 164 Wilderness Nordic Skiing I . 3 3 3 19 5 Recreation 254 Recreation 256 Recreation 257 Recreation 259 FOURTH SECOND 5 Interpersonal Relations . . Outdoor Recreation Ecology Outdoor Recreation Program Planning Residential C a m p Management Introduction to Landscape Design and Techniques Skills Development 3 3 Recreation 251 Recreation 255 Human Relations in Management Outdoor Recreation Environmental Management Outdoor Recreation Practicum 3 3 3 TERM Recreation 263 Wilderness First Aid II Recreation 264 Wilderness Nordic Skiing II 3 3 THIRD TERM Recreation 360 2 Log Book Experience 3 WILDERNESS CANOEING OPTION CAPILANO C O L L E G E CERTIFICATE 3 1.5 2 2 1.5 14 3 3_ 11 Major Program Requirements Recreation 161 Wilderness Backpacking I . . Recreation 162 WildernessCanoeing I Recreation 163 Wilderness First Aid I SECOND 3 3 6 12 3 .... 3 3 THIRD TERM Recreation 360 Log Book Experience 3 WILDERNESS BACKPACKING OPTION CAPILANO C O L L E G E CERTIFICATE Major Program Requirements Wilderness Leadership Program 15 15 WILDERNESS BACKPACKING OPTION The Wilderness Leadership Program is designed for the individual currently involved in recreation leadership, either as a vocation or as an avocation. The goal of the program is to provide a means by which individuals realize Wilderness Leadership roles with confidence, safety and a sense of responsibility. The courses are activity-oriented, based on the theory t h a t wilderness leadership can best be promoted by experience over time. Each of the three program areas (Nordic, Canoeing and Backpacking) are covered over a three term period. Students gain experience during two terms of instruction, 3 3 3 TERM Recreation 262 Wilderness Canoeing II Recreation 263 Wilderness First Aid II 3 18 18 WILDERNESS CANOEING OPTION FIRST TERM TERM Cmns 161 —IB- Major Requirements THIRD TERM Cmns 160 Recreation 250 CREDIT HOURS CAPILANO C O L L E G E CERTIFICATE Recreation 161 Wilderness Backpacking I . . Recreation 163 Wilderness First Aid I SECOND TERM Recreation 261 Wilderness Backpacking II Recreation 263 Wilderness First Aid II 1 3 3 . 3 3 THIRD TERM Recreation 360 Log Book Experience 42 3 CREDIT THIRD TERM HOURS Business 150 Essentials of Bookkeeping I Bus. Mgmt. 273 Elements of Advertising Strategy Bus. Mgmt. 271 Retailing C m n s 161 Human Relations in Management Fashion 257 Merchandise Display Fashion 259 Fashion Merchandising Fashion 260 Fashion Work Experience III Retail Fashion Program 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 21 FOURTH TERM The Retail Fashion program prepares students for direct employment in the field of fashion. The program relates directly to the existing fashion merchandising situation by presenting d e t a i l e d b a c k g r o u n d c o u r s e s , pertinent merchandising techniques, and practical on-the-job training. Although further on-the-job training is a s s u m e d once the student is in the field, the course provides in-depth experiences in all major areas of the fashion scene. Many different courses are recommended within the framework of the program to tailor the learning situation to the students' interests and needs. Students who have had equivalent post-secondary courses may make arrangements with an advisor to substitute electives in lieu of prescribed courses. Electives in Art and Business programs are recommended. There will be a $10.00 lab fee charged for Fashion 155, 172, 176, 177, 256 and 265. The optional fourth hour mentioned in the following outline of courses indicates a student/instructor contact, other than an office hour, when a student may have course enrichment. This may take the form of assignment assistance, tutorials, field trips, special speakers or practical work. Basically, it is time programmed right into the Retail Fashion's time-table. Graduates of this program will have skills and knowledge necessary to enter a career in manufacturing, merchandising, or the promotion of fashion ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA CREDIT HOURS Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements 78 6 84 FIRST TERM C m n s 150 Fashion 152 Fashion 154 3 Basic Communications Fashion Work Experience I Personal Development for the Fashion Employee Basic Clothing Construction Methods History of Western Fashion . Fabrics for the Fashion Industry Clothing Design and C o n struction I —-L 21 3 3 Fashion 155 3 Fashion 170 Fashion 172 3 3 Fashion 176 S E C O N D TERM Art 158 Design I C m n s 151 Business Writing Fashion 150 Fashion and the Consumer . Fashion 173 History of Furniture Fashion 177 Clothing Design and C o n struction II Fashion 252 Fashion Work Experience II Fashion 256 Fashion Modelling 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 21 Business 155 Fashion 151 Fashion 251 Fashion 258 Business 260 Fashion 261 Fashion 264 Essentials of Bookkeeping II Textile and Apparel Marketing Fashion Promotion Non-textiles and Accessories Small Business Mgmt Fashion Work Experience IV Introduction to Interior Design 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 21 NOTE: • Students who wish to substitute other English courses for Communications 150/151 may do so. For mature students with relevant fashion work experience an elective may be substituted for Fashion Work Experience upon consultation and approval of the Program Co-ordinator. Open courses are available to other than full time Retail Fashion students with the Co-ordinator's approval. Chemical and Metallurgical Technology Program Through an arrangement with the Engineering Division of the British Columbia Institute of Technology the first year of a two year technology program may be obtained at Capilano College. Upon successful completion of a first year science program at Capilano C o l l e g e and two additional lab courses, a student may transfer to B.C.l.T. for the second and final year of the diploma program in C h e m i c a l and Metallurgical Technology. Students in this program will also take two additional chemistry lab courses. One course is a laboratory workshop and the other a course in C h e m i c a l Laboratory Techniques. These courses may be offered in the evening, during the day or during the summer Persons interested in this program are to arrange for an interview with the Division Chairperson, Natural Sciences to determine the program of science courses to be taken at Capilano College in the first year. The program in C h e m i c a l and Metallurgical Technology provides instruction to those men and women wishing to enter the process industries — either in the laboratory, in the production department, in the Engineering department or in the technical sales department. A s the technology encompasses a broad range of industries and sciences, the training e m p h a s i z e d mathematics, physics, and chemistry, and their application to general problems recurring in the chemical process industries, rather than to specific problems peculiar to a single industry Consequently, the first year is general, but a Unit Processes course and a workshop course are unique to this program. In the second year the curriculum provides considerable analytical laboratory practice, together with such production and engineering training as unit operations, process dynamics and unit projects. Typical of the chemical process industries that will engage graduates from the program are oil refineries, chlorine and caustic soda producers — beet and cane sugar refiners, cement producers, lime and gypsum producers, plastic and resin producers; copper, lead, zinc and other metal smelters; aluminum, iron and steel, magnesium, and bronze smelters; metal fabricators and heat treaters; pulp and paper mills, and cellulose chemical producers, and mining companies engaged in both exploration and production. Typical of the positions graduates would seek upon entering industry would be as chemist and analysts in research, commercial, and industrial laboratories, as engineering assistants in engineering departments of industrial and consulting companies, as production supervisor trainees in production plants, as technical sales trainees in the sales departments of chemical process industries or equipment manufacturers, or as specialists in waste disposal and pollution treatment. 44 At the time of this Calendar compilation, income allowances paid to eligible adults under the terms specified by the Department of Manpower and Immigration are outlined below. A p plicants are advised to consult their local Canada Manpower Centre for further information. Capilano College is offering Vocational Programs and Upgrading C o u r s e s under an agreement with the Department of Education, Province of British Columbia. The purpose of Vocational Education is to provide courses in business, the skilled trades, service occupations and commercial art to adults requiring s p e c i a l i z e d training as well as providing a service to employers throughout the Province. GENERAL ADMISSION Basic Allowance Regular Allowance One Dependent Two Dependents Three Dependents Four or More Dependents REQUIREMENTS Applicants should be: (a) 16 years of age or over; (b) p o s s e s s an interest in, and aptitude for, that particular occupation. Adults who have been out of the public school system for more than a year are encouraged to apply for training even if they are unable to meet the educational requirements outlined for a particular program or course, as other factors such as work experience and maturity will be taken into consideration. $44.00 per $68.00 per $82.00 per $90.00 per $100.00 per $109.00 per week week week week week week Under certain applicable conditions financial assistance may be obtained from a variety of agencies such as Worker's C o m pensation, Social Welfare, Indian Affairs, and others. Enquiries should be address to the agencies concerned Under certain conditions Unemployment Insurance benefits may be paid to students not eligible to receive C a n a d a Manpower training allowances. Consult Manpower Centres for full information. Manpower sponsored students who are enrolled in programs spanning the Christmas - New Year period may lose their wage-replacement allowance for up to four days due to closure of the institution. All students who successfully complete vocational courses and who desire to apply credit for these courses towards a College Certificate or Diploma should contact a counsellor at the College. PROGRAMS OFFERED Although several additional vocational programs and upgrading courses are being considered by the College, in consultation with the Ministry of Education, the following programs will be offered in the 1977/78 terms. Please consult the Registrar's office of the College for further information about new courses and programs offered by the College. COUNSELLING SERVICES Assistance and guidance is provided to those people interested in the types of programs available. Gary Siegrist, the Career Program Counsellor, is available to students who may have concerns about personal difficulties or questions relating to academic and career choices. FEES Basic Training Skills Development (B.T.S.D.) Basic J o b Readiness Training (B.J.R.T.) Career Alternatives Program ( C A P . ) Employment Orientation for Women (E.O.W.) F e e s for all pre-employment training courses are $15.00 per month. FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE P R E - E M P L O Y M E N T AND FULL-TIME UPGRADING PROGRAMS Prospective students who have been out of the regular school systems one year or more should seek counsel at the nearest C a n a d a Manpower Centre, as under certain conditions training costs and income replacement may be provided to sponsored students. Persons not eligible for sponsorship by Canada Manpower should see the Career Program Counsellor to determine other sources of financial assistance. Business Office Upgrading - 6 week Vocational Program Commercial Bookkeeper - 8 month Vocational Program Commercial and Secretarial Upgrading - 4 month Vocational Program Clerk Typist - 4 month Vocational Program Legal Stenographer - 8 month Vocational Program Legal Stenographer Upgrading - 4 month Vocational Program M e d i c a l Office Assistant - 8 month Vocational Program 45 Employment Orientation for Women (E.O.W.) Basic Training Skills Development (B.T.S.D.) (approximately 5 months per level) VOCATIONAL - 6 WEEKS The purpose of this program is to provide the opportunity for mature students to attain the equivalency of either Grade 8, 10 .or 12 in Mathematics, Science and English. This program will enable the student to qualify for employment or for vocational training. C o u r s e s are directed toward vocational goals and instruction, is to a large degree, individualized. There exists a very great need for women, particularly those who have been at home for many years, to gain assistance and support in returning to work. A s a result of being out of touch with the labour market, women are unrealistic and lack confidence in establishing career goals. In addition, due to societal expectations and conditioning, women often fail to consider areas of employment for which they may be very suitable. Students may be enrolled at the beginning of any month throughout the year. During the first month the interests, goals and previous educational experience are considered in determining which of the three levels is appropriate for the student. This intensive 6 week program will be organized in the form of seminars and will focus around four major areas. There will be assignments and exercises relating to subjects discussed, also a short list of recommended reading. Following are the main areas to be covered: The program consists of the following three levels in Mathematics, Science and English: B.T.S.D. Level 2 - equivalent to Grade 8 B.T.S.D. Level 3 - equivalent to Grade 10 B.T.S.D. Level 4 - equivalent to Grade 12 1. Basic Job Readiness Training (B.J.R.T.) 2. VOCATIONAL - 8 W E E K S An eight week program designed to help individuals who have had difficulty in maintaining a rewarding work life in exploring the career goals open to them. The program involves intensive self-assessment, occupational orientation, exposure to social services in the community and a one-week work practicum. Potential students should contact their local Canada Manpower Representative. 3. Career Alternatives Program (C.A.P.) VOCATIONAL - 4 MONTH PROGRAM CAPILANO C O L L E G E CERTIFICATE 16 0 This program is designed to provide a supportive framework in which individuals will be able to explore career and e m ployment possibilities in line with their skills and potential abilities. Special attention will be paid to the particular difficulties the individual might face in returning to the work force, and the ways in which these problems may be overcome. Encouragement will be given to the individual who is considering alternate types of employment. This program should provide many new experiences for people who have been restricted because of family, economic, educational, or social considerations. 4. Careers Seminar - provides students with an opportunity to explore Career possibilities through informal meetings with representatives from a wide range of professions. Emphasis is placed on discussion of career options within each area and upon practical information relative to speaker's expertise. Professional Development Seminar - provides an opportunity for women to meet in a group setting to explore present or future career concerns relating to status, age, image, opportunities for employment and advancement, information services, etc. Emphasis will be placed on meeting the needs of the individual. Vocational Skills Seminar - a tutorial for individual counselling and assistance. Several of the sessions will be devoted to experiential activities and group discussions on subjects related to personal development, such as communication skills, group dynamics, body language and assertiveness training. The rest of the time will be spent in group discussion and individual counselling regarding career options and issues relating to the student's involvement in the Employment Orientation for Women Program. Organizational and Office Dynamics Seminar - provides persons with practical experience and skill in handling potential human relations p r o b l e m s . P r o b l e m areas include troublesome employer/employee relationships, supervisory difficulties, grievances, discrimination, office protocol, etc. Business Office Upgrading • This is not a Business Office Training Program . CREDIT LAB TERM (4 months) HOURS HOURS Communications 150 Basic Communications . i 1 Commerce 180 Professional Development Seminar . 3 Careers Seminar 1 Commerce 197 Commerce 199 Career Practicum 3 Vocation Skills Lab in C o m m e r c e 358 Changing Technology . Vocational Skills Lab in 4 Job Exploration Commerce 359 _2_ 6 Electives 14 16.0 N.B. Students who are unable to study full-time may select those courses which would be most useful. I A VOCATIONAL - 6 W E E K S This refresher program will serve the needs of people already familiar with the typewriter keyboard and a system of shorthand, but with insufficient s p e e d to market either of these skills. The Business Office Upgrading Program will provide students with the opportunity to improve their skills to a competitive level and will include typing s p e e d development drills; shorthand speed development; timed typing production; dicta-typing; office machines, s u c h as I B M . Executive Typewriter, word processing equipment, and basic business English required by clerical workers. It will also entail the composition and typing of resumes and application forms, and laboratory time in which to practice and develop skills. There are two other vocational programs designed to assist people in the area of employment. Students may apply to be sponsored by Canada Manpower. Call 988-1151 for further information about Employment Orientation for Women (6 weeks) or Basic J o b Readiness Training (up to 4 months). NOTE: Students without shorthand may take the program 46 Commercial and Secretarial Upgrading Commercial Bookkeeper VOCATIONAL - 4 MONTHS CAPILANO C O L L E G E 21.0 CREDIT HOURS The objectives of this program are to improve office skills and procedures, to study new developments and techniques in business and industry; and to meet the demands that changing technology imposes on the job market. LAB VOCATIONAL - 8 MONTHS CREDIT LAB HOURS HOURS 39.0 CAPILANO C O L L E G E CERTIFICATE The objective of the bookkeeping option is to provide students with a basic understanding of the theory of accounting and its practical application within an office environment. E m phasis is placed on the necessity of keeping adequate and accurate records. The option includes courses that provide excellent training in general office and administrative skills. FIRST TERM Business 152 Commerce 152 Commerce 183 Practical Accounting I . . . Typing I Calculators and Calculations Commerce 184 Organizational and Office Dynamics Communications 150 Basic Communications . . Legal Studies 180 Contracts I Commerce 360 Vocational Skills Lab . . . 3 4.5 3 PER Commerce 158 Commerce 184 Communications 150 1. 15 2. Practical Accounting II Business Credit and Management 161 Collections Commerce 158 Office Technology Commerce 258 Office Procedures I Communications 151 Business Communications Legal Studies 181 Contracts II Math 099 Practical Mathematics . . . Vocational Vocational Commerce 360 Skills Lab 3 1.5 Commerce 166 Commerce 171 Commerce 1 77 C o m m e r c e 258 3 3 3 19.5 3 6 10.5 N.B. Students have the option of taking Commerce 300, 301 and 302 during or at the end of terms. E K 1.5 3 3_ 9 1.5 Typing 1 Alphabetic Shorthand Essentials of Bookkeeping 4.5 4.5 1.5 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 ... Advanced Secretarial Upgrading Commerce 162 Commerce 164 Commerce 165 1.5 3 3 .. £ 3 Basic Secretarial Skills SECOND TERM Business 153 Office Technology Organizational and Office Dynamics Basic Communications W Plus at least 12 credit hours from the following options (These courses must be chosen in consultation with the Co-ordinator). In addition 12 lab hours will be s c h e d u l e d for students in this program. C o m m e r c e 152 Commerce 156 Business 150 6 10.5 HOURS WEEK 3 3 3 3 195 Students must take the following courses: Machine Transcription . . . Typing S p e e d Development I Typing S p e e d Development II '. Production Typing I S p e c i a l i z e d Shorthand .. Shorthand S p e e d Development Office Procedures I 3. Commercial Bookkeeping Upgrading Business 153 Practical Accounting II .. Commerce 154 Typing II Commerce 183 Calculators and Calculations Math 099 Elements of Business Math 15 1.5 3 1.5 1.5 1.5 3 3 3 4.5 1.5 3 1.6 3 1-5 CREDIT LAB HOURS HOURS SECOND TERM (4 Months) Typing II 1.5 Commerce 154 4.5 Typing S p e e d Commerce 164 Development 1.5 Legal Machine Commerce Transcription 3 162/163 Shorthand S p e e d Commerce 177 Development 3 1.5 Business Communications 3 Communications 151 Legal Studies Basic Conveyance 1.5 & Mortgage Procedures 155 1.5 Legal Studies Basic Corporate Procedures II 1.5 156 Legal Studies Basic Litigation 1.5 158 Procedures II Legal Studies Legal Office 177 Procedures II 3 7.5 22.5 VOCATIONAL - 4 MONTHS CAPILANO C O L L E G E CERTIFICATE 21.0 CREDIT HOURS The objectives of this vocational program are to provide basic office skills and procedures."As well as providing a foundation in practical skills, the courses are designed to increase versatility, initiative, resourcefulness and to strengthen organizational ability. Students will have the opportunity to participate in the Directed Work Experience Laboratory after completing the program. CREDIT LAB HOURS HOURS TERM (4 Months) Business 150 Commerce 152 Commerce 158 Commerce 183 Commerce 197 Commerce 199 Commerce 302 Communications 150 •„ Vocational ^ Commerce Essentials of Bookkeeping Typing I Office Technology Calculators & Calculations Career Seminar Career Practicum Directed Work Experience Basic Communications Skills Lab in Typing 3 4.5 3 3 1 3 .. Legal Stenographer Upgrading 1.5 1.5 3 .... 6 ~22 ~T5 Legal Stenographer VOCATIONAL - 4 MONTHS CAPILANO C O L L E G E CERTIFICATE VOCATIONAL - 8 MONTHS CAPILANO C O L L E G E CERTIFICATE 21.0 CREDIT HOURS This intensive 4 month upgrading training program is designed to provide students who have work experience with excellent skill development, legal procedures, practical experience and sufficient related theory to enable them to qualify for immediate employment in law firms Legal secretaries are in great demand and graduates of this program should have no difficulty in obtaining interesting and rewarding positions. 39.0 CREDIT HOURS The exacting field of law offers excellent career opportunities for students graduating as legal secretaries. Employment opportunities are plentiful since experienced office assistance is not always readily available and busy lawyers do not have the time to train personnel themselves. The 8-month Legal Stenographer program at Capilano College covers three main categories of information: courses which provide a fundamental understanding of the legal system in B.C.; legal shorthand and typing; and legal office procedures. CREDIT LAB TERM (4 Months) HOURS HOURS Commerce Machine Transcription 162/163 - Legal 3 3 Commerce 164 Typing S p e e d Development I 1.5 C o m m e r c e 177 Shorthand S p e e d Development 3 3 Communications Basic Communications . . 3 150 Legal Studies Basic Litigation 152 Procedures I Legal Studies Basic Corporate 153 Procedures I -5 Legal Studies Basic Conveyance 155 & Mortgage Procedures '-5 CREDIT LAB FIRST TERM (4 Months) HOURS HOURS Commerce 152 Typing I 4.5 1.5 C o m m e r c e 156 Alphabetic Shorthand . . . 4.5 15 Communications 150 Basic Communications . . 3 Legal Studies Basic Litigation 152 Procedures I 1.5 15 Legal Studies Basic Corporate 153 Procedures I 15 t.5 Legal Studies Land Registry 154 System 15 1.5 Legal Studies 157 Wills and Probate 1.5 1.5 Legal Studies Legal Office 176 Procedures I 3 21 9 Legal Studies 157 Legal Studies 161 Legal Studies 176 48 Wills & Probate Legislative Process I . . . . Legal Office Procedures I 1 5 1 5 1 1 15 t-5 3_ 21.0 9 5 C A P I L A N O C O L L E G E C E R T I F I C A T E 39.0 C R E D I T H O U R S M a r l is* a I iVieaiCal FIRST T E R M Off JCO A c C I C t f l i n t M o O l O l a l l l Communications C o m m e r c e 154 C o m m e r c e 164 C o m m e r c e 300 Health 158 Health 160 Health 162 Health 164 V C o m m e r c e 352 CREDIT LAB HOURS HOURS 3 4.5 1.5 Basic Communications . . Intermediate Typing Typing S p e e d Development Directed Work Experience Medical Office Procedures Introduction to Health Care Anatomy and Physiology Medical Terminology . . . . Typing Laboratory _ 1.5 1 3 3 3 3 22 S E C O N D TERM Communications 151 C o m m e r c e 158 Commerce I VOCATIONAL - 8 MONTHS 162/163 C o m m e r c e 165 The role of the person who trains as a M e d i c a l Office Assistant is extremely varied. Work as a medical assistant, a medical secretary, a clinic or hospital receptionist, or a hospital admitting officer, are some of the job possibilities. Graduates may choose employment with a medical specialist with a general practitioner. In most cases the Medical Office Assistant will have the duties of a receptionist, a clinical or general office assistant. The emphasis on each of these roles will vary with the individual office, but in each case it is a position or responsibility and requires superior personal qualities; maturity, stability and competance.before Students must be able to type accurately at a rate of 60 w.p.m. a Certificate is awarded. C o m m e r c e 184 Commerce 301 Health 161 Health 163 Health 165 V C o m m e r c e 352 Business Writing 3 Office Technology Medical Machine 3 Transcription Typing S p e e d Development Office & Organizational Dynamics Directed Work Experience Introduction to Health C a r e II Anatomy and Phisiology II Medical Terminology II . . Typing Laboratory 3 1-5 2 3 8 3 1.5 3 1 3 3 3 3.5 • 6.5 N.B. Business 150 is strongly recommended as 23.5 an elective 49 Community Education/Services Capilano College exists to provide its district communities with the broadest possible range of educational services. Many residents of North and West Vancouver and Howe Sound school district take advantage of the C o l l e g e ' s extensive offerings of post-secondary accredited courses and programs in A c a d e m i c Studies and Career/Vocational training. Others look to Capilano College to respond to their educational needs of a different nature. Such needs may be for s p e c i a l i z e d training in career skills, programs in personal development, leadership and assistance in solving community problems, learning how to use leisure time effectively, and programs which contribute to the enrichment of the cultural, intellectual and social life of the community. The College is committed and equipped to provide such community education services. It aims to do this by involving itself, through the Community Education Division, in the everyday life of the community, to discover new needs for educational activities. A s a result of this involvement the College expects and is prepared to work with individuals and groups to organize courses, workshops, seminars and conferences, or less formal activities such as public meetings, concerts, lectures and other events on a variety of subjects. In short, the C o l l e g e wishes to find out what people want to learn and how they want to learn it. The three divisions of the College (Academic Studies, Career/Vocational and Community Education) share responsibility for program design and instruction. The more formal community education activities, such as courses and seminars, are non-credit in nature, that is they do not carry college postsecondary accreditation or certification. They are further characterized by being generally shorter in length than regular credit courses, and more concentrated in their schedules of presentation. Other than occasional provision for informal assignments, there are no requirements for evaluation, assessment and grading. - work with other community agencies (educational and social service) to design community development educational programs which aim at making the community a better place to live, or assist individuals and groups to overcome economic and other obstacles, or help people to solve community problems. Such programs may deal with family life education, volunteer skills training, training programs for personnel in social service or other community agencies, and community action programs. - the College will assist in organization of public meetings, seminars and other presentations on subjects of current community concern and interest. Film series, concerts and other cultural events are presented where such events can complement other programs in the community. Community non-profit groups are invited to use the College facilities when available for special meetings or events. - public and private organizations are invited to use the services and facilities of the C o l l e g e ' s Conference Centre to arrange conference activities for sharing information on current business concerns, organizational and technological change, and social issues. The C o l l e g e can provide program design and administrative services as well as facilities for conferences. SQUAMISH AND HOWE SOUND The C o l l e g e wishes to ensure that residents of all its district communities have convenient a c c e s s to its programs and services. In 1973, Squamish residents were provided with the first of a series of regular College credit courses. A program of such courses is now offered every Fall and Spring semester. In 1975, the College opened its Squamish Learning and Information C e n tre, which now accommodates the credit program, provides educational and community information services and allows Howe Sound residents to arrange for Counselling services. A s needs and interests are identified, a variety of non-credit courses and other activities will be offered in Squamish and other Howe Sound communities to complement both the C o l l e g e ' s credit program and the Howe Sound Adult Education and Recreation programs. For ease of identification the program and service activities which comprise the C o l l e g e ' s community education activities are grouped as follows:- - - working with the business and professional communities in the public and private sector to identify short and long-term needs for training of employed persons. The College is prepared to design and present custom-made courses and seminars in small business management and operation, management and supervisory skill development, and continuing professional education. INFORMATION ABOUT COMMUNITY EDUCATION Capilano College Community Education activities are a d vertised by means of brochures distributed periodically throughout the School Districts, as well as through newspaper advertising and directed mail. Community members are invited to contact the Community Education Division any time to determine current offerings or to suggest how the C o l l e g e can assist them with their learning needs and interests. 986-1911 local 321. programs of non-credit short courses and workshops in the Creative and Liberal Arts and Leisure/Recreation for personal enrichment and enjoyment. 51 3. Students may register only for those subjects in which they have p a s s e d the pre-requisite courses or their equivalent. In unusual cases a pre-requisite may be waived in writing by the Co-ordinator of the subject field. Pre-requisite Waiver Forms for this purpose are available in the Registrar's Office. Course Numbering System 4. If no pre-requisites are listed in the Calendar, the course has no pre-requisite for admission. No. 001-999 — Make-up courses, including community service courses and courses (or a series of courses) in preparation for specific certification outside the College. These are not transferable to university. No. 100-149 — C o u r s e s normally taken in the first college year of a Career Program. These are not transferable to university, unless so stated in the course description. No. 200-249 — C o u r s e s normally taken in the second college year of a program for university transfer. Class Descriptions No. 250-297 — C o u r s e s normally taken in the second college year of a Career Program These are not transferable to university, unless so stated in the course description. CODE No 198, 199, 298 and 299 — R e s e r v e d for special projects usually carried out by individual students or groups of students after consultation and with written permission of the subject Co-ordinator On the right hand side of each class description, there is a series of code letters and number, for example: Mathematics XYZ Calculus (F)(3,0,0) Chemistry M N P Biochemistry (F,S)(3,3,0) No. 300-309 — Workshops, laboratory courses field work, etc. when taken apart from a specific theoretical course. Psychology A B C Interpretation: Abnormal (F,S,SU)(3,0,1) The first letter(s) indicate the Term in which the class will be offered. E x a m p l e : F - F a l l , S - S p r i n g , S U - S u m m e r . Thus, Mathematics X Y Z is to be offered in the Fall term; Chemistry M N P , is to be offered in the Fall and Spring term; Psychology A B C , is to be offered in Fall, Spring and Summer term. NOTE: Students planning to take academic courses should carefully note the following: 1. There are a few courses which, though academic in nature, are not intended to be transferable to the universities. Credits earned for such courses count toward an Associate in Arts and Science Diploma. These are designated: "This course is not transferable to university." The first number indicates the number of credit hours granted for the course and the number of hours taught per week, the second number denotes the number of lab hours per week, and the third number denotes the number of seminar/tutorial/4th instructional hours per week. Thus, Psychology A B C , is offered three times a week for three hours with no lab time and with one hour per week of seminar/tutorial. Chemistry M N P , is offered for three hours per week with three hours of lab per week with no seminar/tutorials. 2. There is a number of new courses for which transfer status is being negotiated at the time of printing the Calendar, but for which transferability has not yet been granted. Such courses are designated: "University transfer credit being applied for." Students should check the transfer status of such courses at Registration, before enrolling. 54 Art Anthropology Students who intend to major or minor in Anthropology should take both Anthropology 120 and 121 if they will be attending the University of British Columbia, Simon Fraser University or University of Victoria. Anthropology 2 0 0 and 2 0 2 received unassigned credit in Anthropology at the above universities. A n thropology 249 and 204 receive Anthropology credit at University of Victoria, Simon Fraser and credit is being applied for at the University of British Columbia. ANTHROPOLOGY 120 - INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL A N THROPOLOGY (F,S) (3,0,1) A survey of the discipline to include the study of human evolution and our place among the primates; structure and organization of society and the individual and society. Emphasis will b e placed on the comparative study of social institutions of non-Western cultures. PRE-REQUISITES Where pre-requisites are indicated it should be understood that these may be waived in writing by either'the Program C o ordinator or the instructor concerned when it is felt that a student p o s s e s s e s the ability to cope with the requirements of any given course. ANTHROPOLOGY 121 - INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL A N THROPOLOGY (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Anthropology 120 or by written permission of the Instructor. A n examination of anthropological concepts and theories of culture, as well as the analysis of cultural institutions such as kinship, economics, religion and politics. A N T H R O P O L O G Y 200 - INTERMEDIATE SOCIAL A N THROPOLOGY (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Anthropology 120 or by written permission of the Instructor. A study of the social structure and organization of various cultures of the world. Emphasis on the dynamics of culture, the cross-cultural approach, and theoretical issues in anthropology FOURTH INSTRUCTIONAL HOUR An additional and optional fourth hour of instruction will be offered in each three credit hour course but will not necessarily follow the regular three hour instructional period. This extra educational opportunity may take the form of a workshop, seminar, field-trip or similar activity, at the discretion of each instructor and as circumstances allow. Students should understand that fourth hour activities will not be a factor in determining final grades Attendance will be on a voluntary basis. HISTORY O F ART C O U R S E S Students in the Art Program may wish to consider the following courses offered elsewhere in this Calendar under, "Fine Arts". Fine Arts 100, Fine Arts 101, Fine Arts 200 and Fine Arts 2 0 1 , and Fine Arts 2 1 0 These courses provide transferability of credits to U.B.C. and to certain other institutions. ANTHROPOLOGY 202 - INTRODUCTION TO CULTURAL E C O L O G Y (S) (3,0,1) A study of the interaction of people with their environment, ecosystems, and cultural patterns. Themes will be selected from humans in nature; war and population control; the archaeological record; the ecology of food production; adaptive strategies; problems of survival. ART 059 — POTTERY FOR BEGINNERS I (F.S) (3,0,1) A n introductory course for those with little or no previous experience. Instruction in the basic pottery p r o c e s s e s of clay preparation, handbuilding, wheelwork, application of glazes, firing and studio disciplines Lab fee: $7 00 ANTHROPOLOGY 204 - ETHNIC RELATIONS (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of the relations between ethnic groups including an examination of how ethnic groups come to be defined, how they are maintained, stereotyping, and how these processes interrelated with other social variables such as economics, education, violence, and the family. The focus will usually be on B.C. Students will be engaged in some primary research. ART 060 — POTTERY FOR BEGINNERS II (F,S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Art 059. The further development of basic pottery skills. A n introduction to the theory and practice of g l a z e formulation. Lab fee: $7.00 ANTHROPOLOGY 249 - COMPARATIVE C U L T U R E S : A FIELD STUDY IN ANTHROPOLOGY/GEOGRAPHY (SU) (3 or 6) Pre-requisite: Anthropology 120 or by written permission of the Instructor. A n interdisciplinary field study course to consider in depth a particular geographic area and its people Comparative institutions, cultural ecology, the landscape, methods of fieldwork. Students and Instructors study in the field; each year will alternate between British C o l u m b i a / C a n a d a and a foreign country. ART 100 — INTRODUCTION TO T H E VISUAL ARTS I (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the study of painting, sculpture and architecture — the discussion of concepts and problems in style, iconography, criticism and aesthetics. Although historical consideration will be inevitable, this is not a chronological survey of the visual arts. N o lab fee. Note: This course combined with Art 101 carries 3 transfer units to U B.C. 55 ART 101 — INTRODUCTION TO T H E VISUAL ARTS II (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Art 100 Further study of painting, sculpture and architecture, to acquaint students with and engage them actively and critically in problems of style, iconography and aesthetics. N o lab fee. Note: This course combined with Art 100 carries 3 transfer units to U.B.C. ART 152 — LIFE DRAWING (F) (3,0,1) The study of drawing from the human figure; exercises in developing visual perception, memory, and basic drawing skills. Contour, cross-contour, gesture, mass, volume, and action drawing from direct observation. Study of line and line characteristics in pencil, pen, and charcoal techniques. Emphasis on empathy and instinctive rendering, on developing visual sensitivity, and thought-hand co-ordination. Note: This course carries 1.5 transfer units to B.F.A. Studio Program at U.B.C. L a b fee: $7.00 ART 154 — G E N E R A L DRAWING I (F) (3,0,1) The study of drawing media and techniques, including pencil, pen and ink, charcoal, pastel and brush. Stylistic and strategic problems encountered in drawing from both direct and observation and the imagination. A n introduction to drawing the nude human figure, with emphasis on proportion and the interpretation of the pose in terms of line, volumes and planes The development of visual perception and graphic sensitivity Lab fee: $7.00 ART 158 — DESIGN I (F) (3,0,1) ART 165 — POTTERY II (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Art 163 Further study of wheelwork techniques and an introduction to glaze theory and exploration of glaze material. Projects and experimentation with more advanced pottery shapes and designs. Labfee: $7.00 ART 167 — S C U L P T U R E I (F) (3,3,1) The study of the fundamentals of sculpture and threedimensional form Exercises in sketching and modeling in clay on the basis of direct observation from the model. The study of three-dimensional form through the investigation of plane, mass and volume elements. Note: This course carries 1.5 transfer units to B.F.A. Studio Program at U.B.C. L a b fee: $7.00 ART 168 — WEAVING I (F) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the materials and primary equipment of weaving, including spinning and dyeing, projects on the branch loom, Salish loom, board and frame weaving. The history of weaving. Weaving a tapestry. Lab fee: $7.00 ART 169 — WEAVING II (S) (3,0,1) Introduction to the mechanical loom. The basic weaves and their derivatives, pattern drafting, g a u z e and leno weaves. A n approach to texture and colour. Garment weaving. Lab fee: $7 00 ART 170 — GRAPHIC ARTS (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite — Art 175 A n introduction to the concepts and principles of design with study of basic visual material and form, pictorial organization and composition, process and psychology of visual communication; characteristics of visual form and exercise in creating meaningful graphic communications using basic shapes. A basic course in graphic arts processes, including letterpress, gravure, lithographic and silkscreen reproduction. Instruction in the technology of colour reproduction by four colour process and by pre-separation, duplicate letterpress plate making, step-and-repeat printing and bindery procedures. Students will produce line and halftone negatives and offset plates and perform basic negative stripping operations. Field trips to printers and plate makers. L a b fee: $20.00 Note: This course carries 1.5 transfer units to B.F.A. Studio Program at U.B.C Lab fee: $7 00 ART 160 — FABRIC PRINTING I (F) (3,0,1) The study of hand-printing techniques on fabrics: block printing, silk screening, and batik. Study of dyes and fabric printing inks; introduction to fabrics, textures and weaves as related to household or commercial uses. L a b fee: $7.00 ART 161 — ART 171 — PAINTING I (F) (3,0,1) Investigation of the characteristics of painting media and their application to problems of imaginative and representational composition. Developing personal modes of expression and a form vocabulary. Basic design considerations as applied to the picture plane and pictorial space: abstract values and their significance for the painter. Lab fee: $7 00 FABRIC PRINTING II (S) (3,0,1) More advanced projects using handprinting techniques on fabrics. Further study of the use of handprinted textiles with the addition of padding and stitching. Lab fee: $7.00 ART 172 — ART 162 — LETTERING AND TYPE (F) (3,0,1) PAINTING II (S) (3,0,1) Traditional and contemporary methods of painting; theory and practice. Basic techniques and their application to figurative and non-figurative themes: further development of personal modes of expression. Introduction to present trends in painting. Historical origins of the alphabet, numerals and letter styles. Proportion and spacing. Lettering indication in pencil, brush, chalks and felt markers. Comprehensive and reproduction lettering. L a b fee: $10 00 Lab fee: $7.00 ART 163 — POTTERY I (F) (3,3,1) An introduction to basic processes of pottery, including slab and coil techniques, firing, wheelwork, and primary glazing techniques. Lab fee: $7 00 ART 173 — INTRODUCTION TO ADVERTISING (S) (3,0,1) Historical background. Social, economic and commercial significance. Strategy and tactics. The science and the art. Media, Management. Costs. Legal aspects. Emphasis on the role of the designer and artist. No lab fee. ART 164 — GENERAL DRAWING II (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Art 154. Further exploration of drawing media and techniques, with emphasis on a more conceptual and interpretive approach. The sustained investigation of a theme through a variety of strategic and technical approaches. Additional experience in drawing the nude human figure. Synthesis and analysis of the graphic elements perceived in a pose. Interpretive stylization and distortion. Lab fee: $7.00 ART 174 — SCULPTURE II (S) (3,3,1) Further study and practice of sculpture, investigating threedimensional form. Introduction to wood-carving with emphasis on basic design concepts and individual expression. Note: This course carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A Studio Program at U.B.C. Lab fee: $7.00 56 ART 250 — PAINTING MEDIA I (F) (3,0,1) ART 175 — PHOTOGRAPHY FOR T H E GRAPHIC ARTS (F) (3,0,1) Basic photography with emphasis on optical and chemical principles, to prepare students for Graphic Arts in the Spring Term. The u s e of the 35 mm camera. Lab fee: $20 00 ART 176 — (3,0,1) The investigation of painting media on the basis of student interest and preference — spontaneous and sustained a p proaches to a variety of themes derived from nature, objects and the imagination. Introduction to painting the nude model. A d vanced study of colour theories and their application to pigments. Further investigation of present trends in painting, including guest speakers and fieldtrips. L a b fee: $7.00 STUDIO AND LOCATION PHOTOGRAPHY (S) Pre-requisite: Art 175 Instruction in studio lighting and procedures, photography on location and advanced darkroom techniques for black and white film. Introduction to close-up photography and the effective exposure of colour film. L a b fee: $20.00 ART 251 — ILLUSTRATION (F) (3,3,1) Pre-requisites: Art 164, Art 184 The rendering of scenes and situations according to specific provisions, utilizing a variety of mediums and techniques. Working from actuality and researched reference material. Lab fee: $10.00 ART 178 — DESIGN II (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Art 158 Further study of design principles, pictorial organization, characteristics of visual form and media; extensive study of colour, colour theory, and characteristics Practice of design through individual and group projects involving the use of colour and colour materials; emphasis on research and creative production. Lab fee: $7 00 ART 180 — ART 252 — FASHION ILLUSTRATION I (F) (3,0,1) ART 253 — APPLIED DESIGN II (S) (3,3,1) Drawing the Fashion Figure. A course to develop skill in the illustration of garments, layout and finished artwork which could be utilized in showroom and advertising situations. Lab fee: $10.00 Pre-requisite: Art 252 Further study to advance the student's ingenuity in visual communications thinking and skill in graphic representation. Assignments will be planned to assure the student a portfolio of representative sample design solutions Lab fee: $10.00 ART 181 — FASHION ILLUSTRATION II (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Art 180 A more advanced study of the Fashion Figure with emphasis on texture and colour as related to the needs of Fashion Illustration. A similar emphasis will be placed on the conceptual layout and finished art techniques for reproduction. Lab fee: $7.00 ART 182 — APPLIED DESIGN I (F) (3,3,1) The application of design and rendering skills to the development of solutions to graphic design problems. Emphasis will be on concept rather than on " c o m p r e h e n s i v e " finish. Assignments will demand practical solutions and professional presentation, to be completed by deadlines. L a b fee: $10.00 ART 255 — PAINTING MEDIA II (S) (3,0,1) Further study and practice of painting in the medium of the student's individual choice. Sustained development of themes, according to the student's preference. Additional experience in painting the nude. Continuing investigation of contemporary modes of expression, including guest speakers and field-trips. The study of more complex compositional problems, representational, semi-abstract and abstract. L a b fee: $7.00 PRINTMAKING I (F) (3,0,1) A foundation course for those with little or no experience. A n introduction to the basic techniques of hardground, softground, drypoint and aquatint. Lino, wood, relief and mono prints. Most work will be produced in black and white, with some discussion of the u s e of coloured inks. L a b fee: $7.00 ART 257 — SCULPTURE III ( F ) (3,3,1) A study of classical and modern sculpture; the investigation of modern sculpture forms through the student's work; experimentation and work in several media: metal, plastics, wood, cloth, paper, stone and those producing both soft and hard three-dimensional forms and constructions. Lab fee: $7.00 ART 183 — PRINTMAKING II (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Art 182 Concentrated study of black and white and colour printing methods. Study of ink formulation and grinding, single and multiple plates and the collograph. L a b fee: $7.00 ART 260 — 19th AND 20th CENTURY ART (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Fine Arts 100 and 101 or Humanities 100 and 101 or Art 100 and 101. ART 184 — LIFE DRAWING (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Art 152 Further study in drawing from the human figure; exercises in perceiving and visualizing the elements of rhythm, plane, mass and volume; interpretative stylization and distortion; synthesis and analysis or graphic elements perceived in a pose, personality or form. Drawing from observation and reflection, with emphasis on imaginative interpretation and investigation of technique. Note: This course carries 1.5 transfer units to B.F.A. Studio Program at U B.C. Lab fee: $7.00 ART 192 — A study and discussion of key movements and figures in the art of the 19th and 20th Centuries. A study in depth of the contemporary art schools, trends, and philosophies with emphasis on preparing the student to understand the changes and new directions in visual arts since 1775. Note: This course combined with Art 261 carries 3 transfer units to U.B.C. No lab eee. ART 261 — 19th AND 20th CENTURY ART (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Art 2 6 0 The growth of two and three-dimensional design in 20th C e n tury art movements, including "Art N o u v e a u " , Bauhaus and the contemporary European and North American art trends; new discoveries in the field of form organization and the visual language in the present day. TYPOGRAPHY (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Art 162 A study of the history, classification and recognition of the principal type faces in u s e today. Instruction in the basic mechanics and technology of type setting and how to measure, specify and order type Exercise in the effective application of typographic design to visual communications.Lab fee: $10.00 Note: This course combined with Art 260 carries 3 transfer units to U.B.C. N o lab fee. 57 ART 262 — ADVANCED LIFE DRAWING I (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Art 184 ART 279 — DISPLAY DESIGN (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisites: Art 164, Art 178. The design of merchandising environments and display areas, including exhibition booths, boutiques and store fronts. Perspective renderings and model construction. Field-trips.Lab fee: Lab fee: $10.00 Life drawing with emphasis on an interpretative and creative approach; study in depth of drawing techniques and styles in reference to contemporary trends in fine and applied arts; further exploration of graphic elements derived from observation of the human body, action and character Note: This course carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. Studio Program at U.B.C. Lab fee: $7.00 ART 280 — DESIGN WORKSHOP (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisites: Art 252, Art 278 Students will undertake to design and produce specific items for the College or other approved clients, under supervision. Projects will be selected to capitalize on the student's acquired knowledge and skills and will involve his or her personal contact with outside agents and suppliers. The student will be responsible from initial concept to finished product. Preparation of personal portfolios and samples for display. Lab fee: $10.00 ART 263 — ADVANCED LIFE DRAWING II (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Art 2 6 2 Further study and practice of interpretative and creative life drawing, including stylization and abstraction of human form; design element in figurative drawing; experiments with drawing media. Lab fee: $7.00 ART 265 — S C U L P T U R E IV (S) (3,3,1) Advanced problems in sculptural forms. Students will be encouraged to experiment in the media of their choice and to develop their own individual style. L a b fee: $7 00 ART 267 — ART 282 — PRINTMAKING III (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Art 183 or instructor's permission. A comprehensive study of Intaglio and relief printing methods, this course is primarily designed for the advanced etching student. Other areas that come under consideration will include dimensional prints, photographic techniques, the lucite print, uninked embossing etc. Lab fee: $7.00 WEAVING III (F) (3,0,1) Investigations of old and new weaving forms. A d v a n c e d tapestry, pattern weaves, double weave, weighted warp, rope weaving and knotting. Lab fee: $7.00 ART 268 — WEAVING IV (S) (3,0,1) Three-dimensional weaving. Basketry and its use in creating sculptural forms. The study of synthetic materials to create wallhangings. This course includes seminars and field-trips to weavers' studios, art galleries and commercial outlets. ART 283 — PRINTMAKING IV (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Art 2 8 2 or instructor's permission. Designed for the advanced printmaking student, the main concern will be with combination techniques based upon the individual's needs. This course will also help familiarize the student with print exhibitions, competitions, printmaking societies, workshops, etc The students will mount a show of their work as a final project. Lab fee: $7.00 Lab fee: $7.00 ART 269 — A D V A N C E D ILLUSTRATION (S) (3,3,1) Specific assignments geared to students' talents and inclinations. Story illustration, TV and film graphics, annual report covers, product illustration, experiments in illustration media and techniques. Lab fee: $10.00 ART 273 — ART 284 — FABRIC PRINTING III (F) (3,0,1) Projects using a combination of fabric printing methods. More advanced methods of screen printing, including photographic techniques. Study of the history of fabric printing. Lab fee: $7.00 POTTERY III (F) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Art 165 Further exploration of pottery techniques, glaze materials, with increasing emphasis on craftsmanship and design. Study of the world's ceramics. ART 285 — Note: This course carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. Studio Program at U.B.C. Lab fee: $ 7 0 0 ART 274 — FABRIC PRINTING IV (S) (3,0,1) More advanced projects using a combination of fabric printing methods with the addition of padding and stitching. Lab fee: Lab fee: $7.00 POTTERY IV (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Art 273 An exploration of more complex forms made by hand and wheel processes; development of original glazes; study of contemporary styles and creative ceramics. Field trips to ceramic studios and art galleries. ART 29S — RENDERING TECHNIQUES II (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisites: Art 275 Continued study, to develop rendering competence and a personal style. Rendering for "working-art" originating in other courses will be encouraged and supervised. Lab fee: $10.00 Note: This course carries 1.5 transfer units to the B.F.A. Studio Program at U.B.C. L a b fee: $ 7 0 0 ART 275 — RENDERING TECHNIQUES (F) (3,0,1) ART 298 — ADVERTISING DESIGN (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Art 192 This course concentrates on design and layout of newspaper and periodical advertising, annual reports, brochures and posters. Packaging technology and surface design will receive particular attention. Lab fee: $10.00 Pre-requisite: Art 164 The illustration of objects and scenes for retail or editorial use and for newspaper or fine-screen reproduction. Students will explore a variety of mediums, including pen and ink, wash, opaque pigment, fluorographic and overlay. Experience in research and development of reference material. Lab fee: $10.00 ART 278 — GRAPHIC AND PRINT MEDIA (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Art 192 ART 304 — FOUNDRY PRACTICE I (S) (3,3,1) Admission by Instructor Experience in the designing, construction and operation of a small foundry suitable for casting sculptural pieces in aluminum and/or bronze. Practical exposure to sand-casting, the fullmould process, styrofoam casting and the low-wax process. Lab Lab fee: $20.00, S u p e r v i s e d exploration of graphic arts a n d printing techniques of particular interest to the student, and the application of these to real or simulated reproduction problems. Contact with outside trades and suppliers in the course of completing assignments. Lab fee: $20.00 58 ART 306 — ADVANCED STONE CARVING I (F) (3,3,1) Admission by Instructor A study of traditional and contemporary approaches to stone carving, including experience with hand tools, air-powered carving guns and grinders, and electrical tools. The investigation of personal modes of expression as related to the stone carving process. Emphasis on three-dimensional design concepts, the efficient use of tools, materials and equipment. Lab fee: $10.00 ART 310 — CERAMIC CASTING TECHNIQUES I (S) (3,0,1) AND Biology DECORATING Admission by Instructor The investigation of mould-making and casting techniques, with emphasis on porcelain and white pottery bodies. The functions and applications of ceramic decorating media, including underglaze, overglaze, lustres, etc., brushing spraying and photo-silkscreen decals. Consideration will be given to historical and contemporary examples of both functional and sculptural pieces Students will be encouraged to pursue areas of individual interest as the course develops and basic skills are mastered. Lab fee: $20.00 ART 314 — ADVANCED PAINTING — IDEAS AND C O N TEMPORARY MEDIA I (F) (3,0,1) Admission by Instructor. Students enroling in this course should be prepared to consider a variety of alternatives to the traditional attitudes to painting and should be willing to experiment with personal modes of e x p r e s s i o n which may involve materials, concepts a n d processes of an innovative nature. Emphasis will be on personal creativity and divergent thinking rather than the acquisition of a formalized body of knowledge. Candidates for this course will be expected to be highly motivated and capable of sustained, serious effort. Lab fee: $20.00 ART 315 — ADVANCED PAINTING — IDEAS AND C O N TEMPORARY MEDIA II (S) (3,0,1) Admission by Instructor A continuation of Art 314, with added emphasis on the participant's involvement in one or more themes on a sustained basis. Discussions and seminars on the role of the artist in today's Society and the problems of gaining recognition through galleries and other agencies. Guest speakers and field-trips. Lab fee: $20.00 ART 316 — ADVANCED EDITIONING — INTAGLIO AND RELIEF I (F) (3,0,1) Admission by Instructor Designed to meet the needs of the student/artist who, although trained in etching techniques, has not matured as an intaglio image-maker owing to lack of a c c e s s to suitable equipment, facilities and guidance. The student will develop procedures arising from individual needs, enabling the production of finished editions of prints and an expansion of knowledge with respect to the intaglio process. Extended studio time will be a feature of this course. Lab fee: $20.00 ART 317 — ADVANCED EDITIONING — INTAGLIO AND RELIEF II (S) (3,0,1) Admission by Instructor Essentially a continuation of Art 316, this course will concentrate on the needs of the individual who wishes to develop personal editioning procedures and bridge the gap between the student-artist and the exhibiting-artist. The practical problems of establishing a relationship with a gallery and putting on a oneman show will be d i s c u s s e d , as will other methods of gaining recognition by appropriate agencies. It is anticipated that practising artists and gallery personnel will appear as guest speakers. Lab fee: $20 00 Capilano College Biology Department offers a variety of courses. First year students may take the Biology 104/105 series to meet the s c i e n c e requirements for Arts students. Those planning to major in Biology or some other Life Science (Dentistry, Medicine, Agriculture, Home Economics, etc.) should enrol in Biology 110/111. A complete selection of second year courses is available which meets the requirements of all three B.C. universities. (Consult the Biology Department for specific course requirements for third year transfer.) All Biology courses require weekly laboratory periods and/or field trips unless otherwise stated. There is a lab fee for these courses. BIOLOGY 104 — HUMAN BIOLOGY (F) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: None The first semester of a course designed as a laboratory science elective for students who do not plan to take further courses in the biological sciences, except for Biology 204. Basic principles of human biology will be presented and the impact of the environment upon humans will be evaluated Major topics will include human physiology, human genetics and disorders of both. BIOLOGY 105 — ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: None The second semester of a course designed as a laboratory science elective for students who do not plan to take further courses in the biological sciences. Basic principles of ecology will be developed and the impact of contemporary society on the environment will be a s s e s s e d . Major topics include: ecological background and environmental issues. BIOLOGY 110 — INTRODUCTORY BIOLOGY (F) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: None; however, at least Biology 11 is strongly recommended. The standard introductory biology course for students who plan to take further courses in this area. Major topics will include the origin of life; cell structure and function; the types of cell division; introductory genetics; and the process of development. Not offered In Spring 1978. BIOLOGY 111 — INTRODUCTORY BIOLOGY (S) (3,3,1) BIOLOGY 215 — C E L L BIOLOGY (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Biology 214 and concurrent registration in Chemistry 201, if not already completed. An examination of the biochemistry of the cell beginning with the fundamentals or thermodynamics. The bioenergetics of a living unit will be related to ultrastructure. Emphasis will be placed on the interaction of exergonic and endergonic reactions There is no laboratory with this course. Pre-requisite: Biology 110 A continuation of Biology 110 which further develops the discussion of basic biological concepts including evolution; a selection from human physiology; the principles of ecology Not offered in Fall, 1977. BIOLOGY 200 — GENETICS (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Biology 110 and 111, however, Biology 214 is strongly recommended. BIOLOGY (3,3,1) A study of the principles of inheritance, Mendelian and nonMendelian; the chemical nature of the gene, gene structure and function, gene duplication in bacteria and viruses as well as some study of higher organisms including man. There is no laboratory with this course. A comprehensive treatment of introductory microbiology. The origin, basic structure, function, diversity and immunological features of micro-organisms will be discussed. The lab provides practical experience in standard microbial techniques. Pre-requisite: Biology 105 or 111. The first term of an introductory course in general ecology, stressing biotic-environmental relationships at the ecosystem level; concept of the ecosystem, its components and dynamics; energy flow, in ecosystems, nutrient cycling, biogeoclimatic zones with emphasis on British Columbia, vegetation analysis. Emphasis is on principles of plant ecology and on problems in this field. C o u r s e includes a 2-day field trip to Manning Park and the Southern Okanagan Valley. BIOLOGY (3,3,1) 221 — PRINCIPLES O F MICROBIOLOGY (S) Pre-requisite: Biology 220. A continuation of Biology 220, emphasizing the growth, genetics and ecology of micro-organisms. Micro-organisms in agriculture, forestry, various industries, health and sanitation. E C O L O G Y II (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Biology 204 Business A continuation of Biology 204, with emphasis on principles and problems of animal ecology. Included are selected nonBritish Columbian ecosystems; soils, pollution and its ecological significance; population dynamics; the human population explosion; ecological aspects of animal behaviour. C o u r s e includes a 3-day field trip to the Tofino Area, Vancouver Island. BIOLOGY 210 — (F) (3,3,1) PRINCIPLES O F MICROBIOLOGY (F) Pre-requisite: Biology 110 a n d 111, Chemistry 110 and 111. Transfer to U.B.C. requires Chemistry 200/201. BIOLOGY 204 — E C O L O G Y I (F) (3,3,1) BIOLOGY 205 — 220 — MORPHOLOGY O F V A S C U L A R PLANTS Pre-requisite: Biology 110 and 111 A comparative study of the vascular plant groups, the pteridophytes, gymnosperms and angiosperms with emphasis on the evolution, morphology, ecology and function of each of the groups. Discussion of problems in plant morphology. BIOLOGY 212 — INVERTEBRATE Z O O L O G Y (F( (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Biology 110 and 111 A comparative survey of the invertebrates. Major phyla and classes, with emphasis upon evolutionary trends, adaptive biology and ecology of each group. The course is designed around the major unifying concept of evolution. Problems of contemporary interest in the field of invertebrate zoology. The course will include a 3-day field trip to the Bamfield Marine Station BIOLOGY 213 — VERTEBRATE Z O O L O G Y (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Biology 110 and 111 A continuation from invertebrate zoology, covering the vertebrates and protochordates. Emphasis again on evolutionary trends, especially in regards to morphology, function and ecology of each class. Current concepts and problems will be stressed. The lab if designed for examination of representative specimens of existing classes of vertebrates. The morphology and evolutionary trends in organ systems will be e m p h a s i z e d . BIOLOGY 214 — C E L L BIOLOGY (F) (3,3,1) BUSINESS 150 — ESSENTIALS OF BOOKKEEPING I (F) (3, 1.5, 1) A n introductory course d e s i g n e d to cover basic terminology, techniques and applications of accounting, including the theory and practice of keeping adequate records; use of special journals; controlling accounts and subsidiary ledgers; periodic adjustments, closing procedures and preparation of financial statements. The course will include 3 hours of lecture and discussion material and 1 1/2 lab hours per week. Pre-requisite: Biology 110 a n d 111 and concurrent registration in Chemistry 200, if not already completed. An integrated study of cell structure and function as determined by electron microscopy; ultrastructure will be related to cell physiology and biochemistry. The interrelations among the various components will be d i s c u s s e d from an evolutionary viewpoint. Laboratory exercises will concentrate on the u s e of light vs. electron microscopy and through this comparison develop an appreciation for micro units. 60 BUSINESS 152 — PRACTICAL ACCOUNTING I (F) (3, 1.5, 1) Pre-requisite: Bookkeeping 12, " C " grade or better; or by written permission of the Instructor, and/or Co-ordinator. A review of the basics of accounting, with emphasis on practical problem-solving. Material will include s p e c i a l i z e d journals, adjustments, closing procedures, financial statements, payrolls and other matters related to the accounting function. Business Management BUSINESS 153 — PRACTICAL ACCOUNTING II (S) (3,1.5,1) Pre-requisite: Satisfactory completion of Business 152; a grade " B " or better in Business 150; or by written permission of the Instructor, and/or Co-ordinator. Further development of work started in the first term, including balance sheet accounts, emphasizing such problem areas as cash, receivables, depreciation, inventory evaluation; partnerships, budgeting, income tax. BUSINESS 155 — ESSENTIALS OF BOOKKEEPING (S) (3, 1.5, 1) Pre-requisite: Business 150; or by written permission of the Instructor, and/or Co-ordinator A continuation of work begun in Business 150 with emphasis on cash, receivables, payroll and other basic bookkeeping functions. The course will include 3 hours of lecture and discussion material and 1 1/2 lab hours per week. BUSINESS 170 — BUSINESS LAW I (F,S) (3,0,1) This course will e m p h a s i z e the application of legal principles to business relationships through the study of Court decisions (case law) and respective legislation. The areas of study to be particularly covered are the Law of Contract, Law of Commercial Transactions and Sale of Goods Act, Secured Transactions and the Bill of Sales Act of Conditional Sales Act, Creditors Remedies and the Execution Act. BUSINESS 171 — BUSINESS LAW II (F,S) 3,0,1) This course will e m p h a s i z e the application of legal principles to business relationships through the study of Court decisions (case law), and respective legislation. The areas of study to be particularly covered are the Law of Partnership, Admiralty Law, Company Law and the B.C. ' C o m p a n i e s Act, Torts and Insurance, and Real Property. BUSINESS 173 — CONSUMER LAW (F,S) (3,0,1) Thie course will deal with the protection and remedies available to a consumer with regard to everyday transactions, emphasizing both the common law and existing legislation. The areas that will be particularly dealt with are the Law of Contract, Sale of Goods Act, Consumer Act, and the Small Loans Act. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT MATHEMATICS (F) (3,0,1) 150 — BUSINESS Mathematical topics including: basic number theory; sets, relations, and functions; linear algebra and matrix operations; algorithmic methods, numeric analysis and financial mathematics. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 151 — STATISTICAL ANALYSIS AND APPLICATION (S) (6,0,2) The theory and application of statistics as it applies to b u s i n e s s including: data presentation and description; probability theory and distributions; tests of hypnothesis; and predictive and analytic techniques. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 153 — PROBABILITY THEORY — INTERMEDIATE (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Business Management 171 or equivalent. A continuation of statistical analysis introduced in Business Management 171. Intermediate level statistical analysis with an emphasis on applied problems encountered in a business enrivonment. 157 — BUSINESS 175 — BUSINESS AWARENESS (F,S) (3,0,1) BUSINESS MANAGEMENT CHANDISING (F.S) (3,0,1) A survey type course for the layman in business matters. Subjects covered include rules and rights in the market place, business law for everyday living, personal tax facts, the job market, effective human relations in business. A survey course of widely ranging merchandising techniques and strategies covering many commodities. Where possible extensive use of successful merchandisers as guest lectures will be made. BUSINESS 260 — BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 158 — MARKETING I (F.S) (3,0,1) SALESMANSHIP (F,S) (3,0,1) ELEMENTS O F MER- An introduction to professional selling. Communication including effective listening, probing, problem finding and solving and creativity will be c o v e r e d . S p e c i f i c t e c h n i q u e s of professional selling including prospecting, qualifying and contracting prospects. The course will also cover, in depth, the organization and management of sales activities. An introduction to the marketing environment and marketing institutions; detailed study of the basic marketing functions, market research, product planning, selection of trade channels, merchandising advertising, sales promotion and salesmanship, with emphasis on the marketing of industrial as well as consumer goods. BUSINESS 266 — (3,0,1) BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 159 — MARKETING II (F,S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Business Management 158 or by written permission of the Instructor and/or Co-ordinator. A continuation of the work begun in Business Management 158. SMALL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT (S) An examination of the forms and methods of organization and problems of small business in our society, such as failure and s u c c e s s ; capital and credit; planning; financial control; marketing problems; legal relationships. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 161 — CREDIT AND C O L L E C TIONS (F,S) (1.5, 0, .5) papers and financial statements including m e r c h a n d i s e operations. Accounting for proprietorships, partnerships, and limited companies. Procedures and principles applicable to cash, investments, receiveables, inventory, fixed assets, and liaibilities. Accounting for manufacturing operations and basic cost accounting techniques. The analysis of financial data for management, including sources and uses of working capital, cash flow statements and cash forecasting, departmental and branch operations. Accounting aids for management, budget and profit planning, consolidated statements. Canadian tax structure and Federal Provincial tax arrangements, Income Tax. All students are required to complete a practice set during the second term. A study of various types of credit and their u s e by retail businesses, commercial enterprises and consumers, including sources of information; credit policy; control; analysis and collection techniques. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 163 — PRINCIPLES OF SUPERVISION AND LEADERSHIP (F.S) (3,0,1) Study of human elements in organizations, with emphasis on group behaviour Concepts in persuasion, guidance and understanding of the individual within the group. Applications of human relations management, I.e. leadership, power, authority, group dynamics, formal and informal organization, communications, conflict, and the introduction of change. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 185 — (4.5, 0, 1.5) ACCOUNTING II (F,S) BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 170 — MATHEMATICS O F BUSINESS AND FINANCE (F) (4.5, 0, 1.5) Pre-requisite: Business Management 184. A review of basic mathematics and a study of fundamentals of analytic geometry, functions and managerial planning; elements of calculus with business applications; discounts, markups, margin, selling price, mark-downs, simple interest, compound interest, discounting negotiable instruments, instalment purchases, depreciation, insurance. Note: When both Business Management 184 and 185 are completed, they receive 6 semester hours credit in C o m m e r c e at S.F.U., and 1 1/2 hours credit for C o m m e r c e 151 and 1 1/2 hours unassigned C o m m e r c e credit at U.B.C. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 171 — STATISTICS (S) (4.5, 0, 1.5) BUSINESS B U S I N E S S M A N A G E M E N T 187 — E S S E N T I A L S O F MANAGERIAL PRACTICES (SU) (3,0,1) An examination of frequency distributions; averages; index numbers; probability; linear correlation; reliability and sampling. (This course is a condensation of the theoretical aspects of Business Management 172 and Business Management 176.) In this course the five key tasks in managing an enterprise, i.e., Planning, Acquisition of Resources, Organization, Activation and Control are explained. In addition, the key organizational functions of Marketing, Production, Finance and Personnel are covered. The course is essentially an overview of the theoretical framework of the task management APPLIED A continuation of the work begun in Business Management 184. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 172 — ADMINISTRATIVE P R A C TICES AND ORGANIZATION (F,S) (3,0,1) An introduction to the basic nature of business problems and to the administrative process involved in handling them. Study and discussion of actual business situations selected to illustrate typical problems met in industry requiring managerial analysis, decision and action. Note: Students taking this course will receive 1 1/2 hours transfer credit for C o m m e r c e 190 at U.B.C. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 190 — MATH, AND FINANCE LAB I (F) (1.5, 0, .5) ACCOUNTING BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 176 — MANAGEMENT IN INDUSTRY (F,S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Business Management 172, or by written permission of the Instructor and/or Co-ordinator. and An orientation into the nature of business in the private enterprise system, with emphasis on the role and interaction of the three levels of government w i t h business; the role of financial intermediaries and the Capital Market in influencing the behaviour of firms; and the financial function of management. Note: Business Management 1 72 and Business Management 176 taken together receive 3 semester hours credit in C o m merce at S.F.U. A weekly two-hour lab session in which the student with the aid of a lab assistant performs homework assignments in the ft BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 191 — MATH, AND FINANCE LAB II (S) (1.5, 0, .5) ACCOUNTING three aforementioned subjects. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 252 — A S P E C T S O F TAXATION AND PERSONAL INVESTMENT FUNDAMENTALS (F,S) (3,0,1) An examination of the methods of record keeping and tax reporting. An attempt to acquaint the student with some aspects of tax accounting which will allow him to take advantage of current tax-saving alternatives. The investment fundamentals will provide the student with information necessary to establish a personal or family financial plan using such vehicles as stocks, bonds, mutual funds, insurance, real estate to achieve financial objectives. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 180 — INTRODUCTION TO DATA PROCESSING (F,S) (3,0,1) To provide a general orientation to the computer, what it is, how it functions, understanding the capabilities and limitations of computers. It examines the impact of computers on management, decision making and the organization it serves. Note: Students taking this course will receive 1 1/2 hours transfer credit for C o m m e r c e 191 at U.B.C B U S I N E S S M A N A G E M E N T 255 — FINANCIAL AND MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING I (F,S) (3,0,1) BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 184 — ACCOUNTING I (F,S) (4.5, 0, 1.5) The principles and techniques of a complete accounting cycle, covering assets, liabilities and owner's equity; basic a c counting procedures; changes in owner's equity, closing the books; adjustments for accrued revenue, accrued expense, and revenue and cost apportionments. The construction of working Pre-requisite: Business Management 184/185 This course studies the theories underlying financial statement presentations, and is a logical continuation and reinforcement of the material covered in Business Management 184/185 The course encompasses the study of Financial A c counting at the intermediate level. 62 B U S I N E S S M A N A G E M E N T 256 — FINANCIAL A N D MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING II (F.S) (3,0,1) BUSINESS M A N A G E M E N T PROCESSING (F,S) (3,0,1) This course is a logical sequel to Business Management 255 in that it studies current developments in financial accounting and their effects on financial statement presentation. The course encompasses the study of Financial Accounting at a level beyond Business Management 2 5 5 . This course is an extension of Business Management 180. Areas of study include: date entry, data control, operations, systems generation, management of the computer resource, telecommunication systems, data b a s e file organization, decision tables, evaluation of computer facilities, along with a study of various manufacturers' computer systems. 263 — ADVANCED DATA BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 264 — C O S T ACCOUNTING I (F,S) (4.5, 0, 1.5) Pre-requisite: Business Management 184/185 or by written permission of the Instructor and/or Co-ordinator. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 257 — THE CORPORATION AND SOCIETY (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of the interaction of business firms with societies of which they are part; an examination of social responsibility, legitimacy, a c c o u n t a b i l i t y as related to profit m a k i n g organizations; the firm's responsibility with consumers, shareholders, labour, the community and government. Decision-making and planning in organizations using a c counting tools. The nature of accounting controls. Common control methods. Measures of management performance. The role of the management cost accountant. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 265 — QUANTITIVE AIDS TO DECISION MAKING (F.S) (3,0,1) BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 258 — PRINCIPTES OF A D VERTISING, MERCHANDISING AND S A L E S I (F,S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Mathematics 150/151 or by written permission of the Instructor and/or Co-ordinator. Quantitive tools in use in modern management. Inventory models, E O Q , buffer levels and lead times, project planning, PERT, linear regression as a forecasting tool, linear programming as an optimization technique. Emphasis in the first term is placed on understanding the principles and practices of advertising, from a creative and managerial viewpoint. Examination of advertising's effectiveness as a marketing tool, its place in our society, economically and socially, its planning and creation. Areas of study include print and electronic media, with emphasis on theoretical and practical aspects of layout, art, copy, production, planning, media selection and buying, research and testing. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 266 — CANADIAN FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS AND MONEY MARKETS (F,S) (1.5, 0, .5) Examination of financial intermediaries and their role in the commercial structure of society. Money and capital markets as allocators of credit. A firm's and individual's a c c e s s to these resources. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 259 — PRINCIPLES OF ADVERTISING, MERCHANDISING AND S A L E S II (F,S) (3,0,1) The second term applies knowledge of advertising and management techniques to merchandising and salesmanship, and examines the inter-relationship of these three elements. Areas of study include merchandising, promotion principles and techniques, the role and requirements of the sales person, the relationship of promotion to sales and resulting budgeting principles and techniques. BUSINESS M A N A G E M E N T BEHAVIOUR (F,S) (3,0,1) 268 — ORGANIZATIONAL This course deals with the nature of organizations, how they begin, grow and develop and their effects on individual members, constituent groups, other organizations. Further emphasis is p l a c e d on the following t o p i c s : D e c i s i o n m a k i n g , Organizational change and development, Organizational conflict, Management of objectives, Time management and Working with unions. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT MANAGEMENT (F.S) (3,0,1) BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 260 — FINANCE I (F,S) (3,0,1) Business risk and uncertainty. Financial measurements. A n nual rate of return. Net present value, internal rate of return. A n nual cost. Pay-back Period. Anticipating financial needs of the firm. C a s e studies covering financial problems will form a major part of this course. 270 — PERSONNEL This course will explore management skills development in the personnel field. Heavy emphasis will be placed on providing the students with practical tools and experiences in such interviewing areas as recruitment, selection, placement of personnel, job descriptions and analysis; training and performance appraisal; wage and salary administration; union management relations, etc. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 271 — RETAILING (F,S) (3,0,1) BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 261 — FINANCE II (F,S) (3,0,1) Acquiring financial resources, cost of capital, internal financing. Allocating financial resources within the firm. Leverage and liquidity. Administering circulating capital. Financial aspects of mergers and take-overs. Tax considerations. C a s e studies will form an integral part of this course. This course is designed to acquaint the student with the retailer's role in the distribution process, the types of retail establishments and their relative strengths and weaknesses, the analysis of a trading area, site location, store layout, the influence of changing life styles on consumer demand patterns, techniques for determining customer demand, policy formulation, store image, the organization and operation of a retail establishment. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 262 — SYSTEMS ANALYSIS & APPLICATIONS I (F.S) (3,0,1) BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 272 — CONSUMER (F,S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Business Management 180 or by written permission of the Instructor and/or Co-ordinator. BEHAVIOUR This course is to 1 (acquaint the student with the basic concepts of consumer behaviour, 2) explain the inter-relationship that exists between the important variables 3) develop an understanding of consumer decision processes. More specifically the course will analyze the foundation for consumer behaviour, the individual, the environmental influences on consumers, business effeuts, and consumer purchase decisions. A n introduction to business systems and computer based information systems for organizational use. Developing an information system, step by step. Basic principles of systems analysis and design, flowcharting, file design and definition and reporting structure. 63 BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 273 — ELEMENTS VERTISING STRATEGY (F,S) (3,0,1) OF AD- BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 284 — TAXATION (F,S) (3,0,1) A study, largely depending upon the case study method of the Income Tax Act and determination of taxable income and tax payable, thereon for individuals and corporations. Strategic planning to achieve tax minimization is an integral part of this course. The purpose of this course is to treat advertising as an a c cepted part of marketing and to indicate to management and the public the place of advertising in modern society. More specifically the course will cover advertising concepts, a d vertising strategy, the preparation of the advertisement, media mix, research, the integration of advertising programs and legal aspects. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 274 — C O S T ACCOUNTING (F,S) (3,0,1) BUSINESS (6,0,2) II BUSINESS (6,0,2) 277 — Lab fee: $5.00 BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 292 — PROGRAMMING III (F) (6,0,2) Pre-requisite: Business Management 290/291 MARKETING Provides the student with a practical training in the organization and writing of programs in the C O B O L language. Topics include: program organization, program flowcharts, program instructions, compilation, desk checking, debugging, card to printer, disc to printer routines. L a b fee: $5.00 BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 293 — APPLICATIONS II (F) (3,0,1) INTERNATIONAL MANAGEMENT This course is an extension of B M 262 furthering the ability to analyze managerial requirements of information systems, analysis of managerial decisions, information requirements to support these decisions, controls, audit trails, backup and user education. It provides a thorough understanding of payroll, accounts payable, accounts receivable, inventory control, account ledgers. 278 — SALESMANSHIP (F,S) BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 294 — (6,0,2) The scope of this course includes all of the activities which the person in charge of an outside sales force is likely to encounter. More specifically it covers sales organization, operations, planning, analysis and evaluation, and salesmanship techniques. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 280 — S Y S T E M S ANALYSIS & Pre-requisite: Business Management 262 A study of the mechanics of international trade, foreign exchange rates, tariffs, etc. Product-distribution-promotion mixes for export markets of Canadian Industry with emphasis on Pacific Rim and U.S.A. market influences. Adapting domestic marketing techniques to foreign conditions. BUSINESS (3,0,1) PROGRAMMING II (S) This course is an extension of B M 290, strengthening the knowledge of R P G II. Arenas of study include: disk system, management, operation control language, disk fil organizations, a c c e s s methods, file maintenance and system generation. This course introduces the student to the approaches and problems of the marketing decision making under conditions of uncertainty. Marketing planning and strategy, buyer behaviour, product strategy, distribution strategy, promotional strategy, pricing strategy and integrated programs will be evaluated. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT MARKETING (F,S) (3,0,1) MANAGEMENT 291 — Pre-requisite: Business Management 290 The purpose of this course is to relate how to make the most effective use of marketing research in business. More specifically. the course will cover the nature and scope of research, research design, basic methods of collecting data, marketing research procedures and selected applications of marketing research. — PROGRAMMING I (F) Lab fee: $5.00 BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 275 — MARKETING RESEARCH (F,S) (3,0,1) 276 290 — This course provides a general knowledge of computing, using programming language R P G II to describe data processing problems. Areas of study include program fundamentals, card design and implementation, compilation, desk checking, debugging, programming concepts, table handling, introduction to disc systems, and the operation of the computer. A more indepth study of subjects covered in Business Management 264. Cost determination for manufacturing operations, Planning and Cost Control Systems, Performance Evaluation Methods, strategic decision making methods. BUSINESS MANAGEMENT MANAGEMENT (F,S) (3,0,1) MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING IV (S) Pre-requisite: Business Management 292 This course is an extension of B M 292, strengthening the student's knowledge of C O B O L . Areas of study include: table handling techniques, master file updates, file maintenance, program instructions related to disk file handling techniques and programming for efficient execution. Lab fee: $5.00 AUDITING I (F,S) (3,0,1) BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 296 — MANAGEMENT FORMATION SYSTEMS (F,S) (4.5,0,1.5) Objectives, principles and procedures of auditing for internal and external application. The audit of cash, receivables, inventories, investments, prepaid expenses, tangible assets, liaibilities and equity. IN- Pre-requisite: Business Management 262, Business Management 263, Business Management 290, Business Management 291, Business Management 293. This course brings together the various computer concepts that have been studied in the previous three semesters. It involves an indepth computer study of a company situation. Study will include: a complete feasibility study, a total system design including time and cost estimates, a full project presentation, along with complete implementation of one application area of the system BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 282 — AUDITING II (F,S) (3,0,1) This course covers auditing procedures for intangibles, proprietorship, financial statement preparation, the audit report, legal requirements, audit procedures for small businesses, share capital and changes in surplus. 64 CHEMISTRY 111 — SPL — PRINCIPLES AND METHODS O F CHEMISTRY (F,S) (3,3,0) Chemistry Pre-requisite: Chemistry 110. Mathematics 113 and 114 must be taken concurrently, if not already completed. A self-paced learning course equivalent in content to Chemistry 111 and designed to be of particular value to those students who are unable to attend the Lynnmour C a m p u s , or a satellite centre, on a regular basis. CHEMISTRY 200 — ORGANIC CHEMISTRY (F) (3.3,1) ; Pre-requ site: Chemistry 105 or 111 A stuc') of nomenclature; structure; identification and s p e c troscopy of organic molecules, arkanes, alkenes, alkynes, organometallic compounds, alcohols, aldehydes, ketones, ethers, acids All Chemistry courses include weekly three-hour laboratory periods unless otherwise stated. There are lab fees for Chemistry courses. CHEMISTRY 201 — ORGANIC CHEMISTRY (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Chemistry 200 Optical isomerism; carbohydrates; amines, amides, nitriles, nitro, a z o , diazo and related compounds; protein chemistry; electrophilic aromatic substitution; heterocyclics; polymers; natural products. CHEMISTRY 030 — AN INTRODUCTION TO CHEMISTRY (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: None. (No University transfer credit.) This course is designed for those students who have had no previous chemistry, and who wish to go on in Sciences. No labs are given. C H E M I S T R Y 204 — INTRODUCTION INORGANIC CHEMISTRY (F) (3,3,1) The atom, atomic weights, the mole, chemical formulas, ionic and covalent bonding. B a l a n c i n g equations, simple mathematical solutions, acids, bases and salts, equilibrium. CHEMISTRY 104 — (3,3,1) A course for students majoring in the biological s c i e n c e s and for those planning careers in medicine, dentistry, agriculture or forestry. A study of thermodynamics, thermochemistry; equilibrium; acids and bases, p H determinations, solubility products qualitative inorganic analysis, reaction rates and chemical kinetics. Biological application of these topics stressed. This course includes three hours of laboratory work per week. A course specifically designed for nonscience students which also fulfills first-year chemistry requirements for nursing, home economics and physical education. A study of chemical principles; stoichiometry; oxidation-reduction, solids, liquids and g a s e s ; the c h e m i c a l bond; atomic structure; c h e m i c a l periodicity. C H E M I S T R Y 205 — INTRODUCTION T O P H Y S I C A L INORGANIC CHEMISTRY (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite. Chemistry 204 A study of electrochemistry; galvanic cells, oxidationreduction in biological systems; macromolecular systems, main group systematic chemistry; transition elements a n d c o ordination complexes This course includes three hours of laboratory work per week. CHEMISTRY 105 — FUNDAMENTALS O F CHEMISTRY (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Chemistry 104 A study of electrochemistry; introductory thermodynamics; representative inorganic chemistry; equilibrium; acids, bases and salts; organic chemistry CHEMISTRY 110 — PRINCIPLES AND METHODS OF CHEMISTRY (F) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Chemistry 11, Chemistry 12, or Chemistry 030, and Mathematics 12. Mathematics 112 must be taken concurrently if not already completed. A course for students who plan careers in science. A study of stoichiometry; the gaseous state; solids; liquids; solutions; atomic structure; the periodic system; chemical bonding. CHEMISTRY 210 — PHYSICAL INORGANIC I (F) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Chemistry 111 and Mathematics 112, 113 and 114. Mathematics 230 must be taken concurrently, if not already completed. Quantum mechanics, wave equation. Schrodinger equation and Hamiltonian operators, particle in a box derivations Quantum mechanics applied to hydrogen atoms, Electron spin effects Valence bond theory, crystal field and molecular orbital theory a s a quantum mechanical basis for interpretation of coordination chemistry CHEMISTRY 110 — SPL — PRINCIPLES AND METHODS O F CHEMISTRY (F,S) (3,3,0) Pre-requisite: Chemistry 11, Chemistry 12 or Chemistry 030, and Mathematics 12. Mathematics 112 must be taken concurrently, if not already completed. Not offered 1977/78. A self-paced learning course equivalent in content to Chemistry 110, open to any student but designed to be of particular value to those students who are unable to attend the Lynnmour C a m p u s , or a satellite centre, on a regular basis. AND M E T H O D S PHYSICAL Pre-requisite: Chemistry 105 with " B " standing or Chemistry 111, and Mathematics 112, 113 a n d 114. FUNDAMENTALS O F CHEMISTRY (F) CHEMISTRY 111 — PRINCIPLES CHEMISTRY (S) (3,3,1) TO CHEMISTRY 211 — PHYSICAL INORGANIC II (S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisite: Chemistry 210, Mathematics 231 must be taken concurrently, if not already completed. Co-ordination chemistry: nomenclature, history, symmetry, preparation, reactions and mechanisms. V a l e n c e bond theory, crystal field theory, orbital splitting and its application, Jahn Teller effects, molecular orbital theory. Thermodynamic stability and co-ordination complexes C h e m i c a l kinetics, enzyme catalysis. Reaction rates related to crystal field theory and valence bond theory. OF Pre-requisite: Chemistry 110. Mathematics 113 and 114 must be taken concurrently if not already completed. Thermodynamics, equilibrium, acids, bases, and salts; redox equations, electrochemistry; transition metals and their complexes; organic chemistry. Not offered in 77/78 65 C O M M E R C E 154 — TYPING II (F,S) (4.5,0,1.5) Pre-requisite: Knowledge of keyboard; typing s p e e d of 20 wpm. Continuation of s p e e d development and a c c u r a c y in typewriting with emphasis on production, composition of letters and letter styles and extensive practice in typing various office forms. Commerce C O M M E R C E 154 — TYPING II BILINGUAL (F,S) (4.5,0,1.5) COMMERCE (4.5,0,1.5) 156 — ALPHABETIC SHORTHAND (F,S) Beginning'study of an alphabetic shorthand system with emphasis on application of theory and development of speed, utilizing high frequency vocabulary. Successful students should be able to take dictation at 80 wpm after completing one term. This course requires students to put in an additional 1 1/2 hours of lab time per week. C O M M E R C E 158 — OFFICE T E C H N O L O G Y (F,S) (3,1.5,1) tthis course is designed to acquaint students with current trends in office technology and the effects of mechanization on office jobs. Topics such as criteria for selecting equipment, a d vantages of renting or purchasing equipment, maintenance and repair services available will be covered. Demonstrations and operation of transcribing and dictating equipment, electric typewriters, copying and reproducing equipment (including the Gestetner mimeograph, spirit duplicating machine, Gestefax and Thermofax machines) will provide students with practical experience Practical experience in training co-workers in the use of office equipment by preparing and presenting small group and video-taped demonstrations of the equipment available. L a b fee: $5.00 C O M M E R C E 162 — MACHINE TRANSCRIPTION (F,S) (1.5,1.5,-5) Pre-requisite: Typing speed of 30 wpm General, legal or medical machine transcription. Practice in transcribing forms, letters and reports from IBM Executary, Stenocord, and Lanier Edisette dictation equipment. This course entails a mandatory 1 1/2 hour lab. Machine transcription can be taken as a self-paced learning course. Lab fee: $5.00 C O M M E R C E 010 — PERSONAL TYPING (F,S) (3,0,1) MACHINE TRANSCRIPTION — GENERAL Beginning typewriting for students who have had no previous instruction. Mastery of typewriter keyboard by touch; correct typing technique; operation and care of typewriters; development of s p e e d with accuracy; introduction of letter styles. Academic students or community members wishing to learn to type for their personal use will find this an excellent course. Note: This course will not be counted for credit toward A d ministrative Science and Office Technology Career or Vocational programs. Students learn to transcribe mailable business letters, reports and minutes from a variety of transcribing machines at an initial rate of 30 wpm. MACHINE TRANSCRIPTION — L E G A L Of particular value to students wishing to work in legal offices. Legal letters, accounts, wills, and corporate work (incorporation, resolutions, filings with Registrar). Basic commercial (employment, partnership agreements, sales contracts) and litigation documents, writs, statements of claim and defence, affidavits, notices of motion. C O M M E R C E 151 — COMPOSITE BUSINESS OFFICE SKILLS (SU) (4.5,0,1.5) A practical course dealing with the application of skills relating to office machines and office procedures. Operation of work-processing typewriter, dictation and transcription equipment, copying and duplicating machines, calculators, or shorthand machine. Increase in typing s p e e d , production, bookkeeping and shorthand skills may form part of the course. C O M M E R C E 152 — MACHINE TRANSCRIPTION — MEDICAL Medical terminology and transcription of cases and medical reports designed to prepare students to become medical secretaries and typists. Both Legal and Medical Machine Transcription can be taken as self-paced learning courses on or off campus. TYPING I (F,S) (4.5,0,1.5) Introduction to typewriting for students with no previous instruction. Mastery of keyboard by touch systems; correct typing technique; operation and care of typewriters; development of speed and accuracy. Introduction to styles and formats of business letters, memos, manuscript typing. Students should be able to type 30 wpm by the end of four months. C O M M E R C E 152 — C O M M E R C E 163 — MACHINE TRANSCRIPTION (F,S) (1.5, 1.5, .5) General, Legal or Medical Pre-requisite: C o m m e r c e 162 Continuation of work begun in C o m m e r c e 162 on either general, legal or medical machine transcription. Commerce 163 also can be taken as an S P L course. Lab fee: $5.00 TYPING I BILINGUAL (F,S) (4.5,0,1.5) 66 C O M M E R C E 166 — PRODUCTION I (F,S) (3,0,1) C O M M E R C E 180 — PROFESSIONAL SEMINAR (F,S,SU) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Typing s p e e d of 50 wpm A course in which emphasis is placed upon developing a professional and practical approach to typing problems with a minimum of supervision through timed production of work and acceptable work standards. C O M M E R C E 166 — A seminar course designed to provide an opportunity for women to meet in a group setting to explore present or future career concerns relating to status, age, image, opportunities for employment, job security and advancement. Emphasis will be placed upon meeting the needs of the individual within her personal and professional geography The course will include guest speakers, films and extensive group discussion PRODUCTION I BILINGUAL (F,S) C O M M E R C E 168 — WORD PROCESSING (F,S) (1.5,1.5,-5) Word processing — the transformation of ideas into typewritten or printed form has always been a major function of a secretary. This course will acquaint the student with ways to curb the time and cost spent on paperwork. Topics covered include: Processing incoming mail; taking and giving dictation; delegating work to Word Processing Centre; Stationery; and the Word Processing Centre. COMMERCE (1.5,1.5,-5) 171 — SPECIALIZED SHORTHAND C O M M E R C E 181 — WOMEN IN MANAGEMENT (F.S) (3,0,1) This course dealing with the role of woman managers in organizations and b u s i n e s s e s includes practice in problemsolving and decision-making through practice in innovative or creative thinking and analyses of effective management styles. Meeting procedures (Robert's Rules), debating, strategies and tactics also will be studied in order to gain and increase managerial skills. (F,S) C O M M E R C E 182 — (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Completion of one term of shorthand theory. Individualized study and review of student's shorthand system; expansion of vocabulary; s p e c i a l i z e d vocabulary theory; dictation of terminology and s p e c i a l i z e d material apropos to student's choice of career area. COMMERCE (1.5,1.5,-5) 173 — SPECIALIZED SHORTHAND DEVELOPMENT WOMEN AND T H E E C O N O M Y (F,S) A survey a n d analysis of the impact of women on the Canadian economy; the purchasing power of women, their effect on the labour market, the economic consequences of sex and age discrimination; affirmative action programs; women's pension plans; the concept of human resources and human capital development, the interrelationship of wages and productivity, economic and banking systems. (F.S) Continuation of C o m m e r c e 171. C O M M E R C E 183 — (F,S) (3,15,1) C O M M E R C E 174 — TYPING SPEED DEVELOPMENT III (F.S) (1-5,0,-5) C A L C U L A T O R S AND CALCULATIONS A course designed to provide students with a marketable skill in the operation of calculators. Accuracy in fundamental arithmetic computations will be stressed Continuation of C o m m e r c e 165. C O M M E R C E 175 — TYPING S P E E D DEVELOPMENT IV (F,S) (1.5,0,.5) C O M M E R C E 184 — ORGANIZATIONAL DYNAMICS (F,S) (3,0,1) Continuation of Commerce 174. AND OFFICE This course is designed to provide students with basic psychological concepts and practical experience in handling human relations problems in the office. O n e communication model, Tgansactional Analysis, is examined in depth. Other topics include improving interviewing, facilitating, and problem solving skills; supervisory difficulties; organizational games; leadership styles; motivation and conflict resolution. C O M M E R C E 176 - PRODUCTION TYPING II (F,S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: C o m m e r c e 166. Production problems of a more complex nature will be introduced. Lab fee: $5.00 C O M M E R C E 176 — PRODUCTION TYPING II BILINGUAL (F,S) (3,0,1) C O M M E R C E 185 — PUBLIC RELATIONS (F,S) (3,0,1) Economic and social factors that affect relations between the public and media in shaping public opinion Problems e n countered in interpreting an organization to its various publics. Practical information on how to utilize media (print, radio, T V . , etc.) and how to develop or increase public relations skills. C O M M E R C E 177 — SHORTHAND SPEED DEVELOPMENT (F,S) (3,0,1) Ability to take dictation at 60 wpm with fairly accurate transcription. Continuation of s p e e d development along with theory review, increased vocabulary, dictation of familiar and unfamiliar material aiming at 9 5 % accuracy in transcription. COMMERCE (3,0,1) C O M M E R C E 178 — SHORTHAND SPEED DEVELOPMENT (F,S) (3,0,1) 186 — CONSUMER COUNSELLING (F,S) A n analysis of types and groups of consumers; how society is encouraged to consume, methods of counselling and assistance for debtors and creditors; types of credit, credit components, credit cards, credit ratings and the law relating to bankruptcy, the Consumer Protection Act and the Trade Practices Act. Ability to take dictation at 80 wpm with emphasis on reinforcing theory. Continuation of s p e e d development with 95) a c curacy in transcription, increased vocabulary, dictation of familiar and unfamiliar material. COMMERCE (1.5,0,1.5) C O M M E R C E 179 — SHORTHAND SPEED DEVELOPMENT (F,S) (3,0,1) Ability to take dictation at approximately 90-100 wpm with accurate transcription. A d v a n c e d s p e e d development to rates of 100-140 wpm. Dictation of unfamiliar material for varied time lengths, improvement of rapid and accurate transcription skills and shortcuts in shorthand systems. 187 — CAREERS ORIENTATION (F,S) The objective of this seminar is to give Vocational students practical skills in order for them to obtain employment and to relate these skills to particular fields. In addition to this, students will be d i s c u s s i n g aspects of a career, including job satisfaction, setting career goals, time management, job definitions and individual responsibility to one's job. 67 C O M M E R C E 190 — PROFESSIONAL SEMINAR II (F,S) (3,0,1) C O M M E R C E 260 — WORK IN SOCIETY I (F,S) (3,0,1) DEVELOPMENT Ethics and their place in business; a study of ethical theories and b e h a v i o u r s ; morality versus practicality; the beaurocratization of work and its effects on individual values; the significance of work in society A continuation of Commerce 180. The student will participate in a weekly three-hour seminar in order to develop techniques to identify personal strengths and abilities, acknowledge and understand personal achievement patterns, to become aware of his or her own value system, to a s s e s s and achieve immediate and long-range goals that utilize personal capabilities, to identify areas of latent potential and the means of using it more productively; to discover means of resolving conflict, to learn techniques of self-motivation and to increase self-esteem. C O M M E R C E 261 — WORK IN SOCIETY II (F,S) (3,0,1) A continuation of C o m m e r c e 260. Students will examine the Canadian occupational structure and its stratification, class, status, power, reputation and class consciousness; the relationship between structure and life chances; life styles, personality, mortality and reasons for occupational choices. C O M M E R C E 195 — THE R O L E S O F WOMEN AND MEN IN BUSINESS (F,S) (3,0,1) This course will explore the various problems people are facing as a result of changing roles. Jobs are no longer divided along sexual lines. With more equal roles and opportunities for women in the business world, the adjustments both men and women must make are varied and complex. The course will examine the differences between men and women in dealing with problems at work and at home, effectiveness of styles, and comparison of the effects of interpersonal and operational success. C O M M E R C E 196 — C O M M E R C E 299 — CAREER PRACTICUM (F,S,SU) (3,1,1.) This course enables students to participate in actual work situations of their choice and also provides the opportunity to complete research projects in a s p e c i a l i z e d area. C O M M E R C E 300 — DIRECTED WORK EXPERIENCE (F) (1,30,1) In-term work experience involving three lecture hours and at least thirty hours of related office experience in the field. INTRODUCTION TO RESEARCH (F) (1.5,2,.5) Introduction to the design and execution of research projects in business, commerce and the legal field. Necessary statistical tools will be introduced. Emphasis will be placed upon an individualized program of reading; reporting will be planned and executed under the guidance of a faculty member. C O M M E R C E 301 — DIRECTED WORK EXPERIENCE (S) (1,30,1) In-term work experience involving three lecture hours and at least thirty hours of related office experience in the field. C O M M E R C E 302 — DIRECTED WORK EXPERIENCE (S,SU) (1.5,60,1) End of term j ork experience involving six lecture hours and at least sixty hours in the field. C O M M E R C E 197 — C A R E E R S SEMINAR (F,S) (1,2,5) Weekly informal meetings with successful persons from many segments of the community, including lawyers, bankers, stockbrokers, retailers, insurance and advertising executives, accountants, purchasing agents, personnel managers, computer programmers, editors, public servants, college administrators, counsellors and others. Emphasis is placed upon discussion of career opportunities for women within these areas and upon practical information related to the speakers' expertise and the students' interests. C O M M E R C E 303 — DIRECTED WORK EXPERIENCE (F) (1,30,1) In-term work experience involving three lecture hours and at least thirty hours in the field. C O M M E R C E 304 — DIRECTED WORK EXPERIENCE (S) (1,30,1) In-term laboratory involving three lecture hours and at least thirty hours in the field. C O M M E R C E 198 — R E S E A R C H DESIGN (S) (1.5, 2,5) Pre-requisite: Commerce 196 Continuation of work begun in Commerce 196. Investigating and planning a primary research paper. If approved by the C o ordinator, students may use research to fulfill requirements of independent research project. C O M M E R C E 305 — DIRECTED WORK EXPERIENCE (S.SU) (15,60,1) End of term laboratory involving six lecture hours and at least sixty hours in the field. C O M M E R C E 199 — CAREER PRACTICUM (F,S,SU) (3,1,1) This course is designed to enable the student to undertake an in-depth investigation of a specific employment area, to analyze the factors involved in meaningful work and to acquire the skills in securing and maintaining suitable employment. The course enables the student to participate in an actual work situation of his or her choice and provides the opportunity to research a specialized area. It is recommended that this course be taken prior to enrolling in Commerce 300. V - C O M M E R C E 350 — VOCATIONAL SKILLS LABORATORY (F,S) Skills laboratory in business English and correspondence. U p to 3 0 hours of lab work p e r week are involved in this course. V - C O M M E R C E 351 — VOCATIONAL SKILLS LABORATORY (F.S) Skills laboratory in shorthand. Up to 8 hours of lab work per week are involved in this course. C O M M E R C E 258 — OFFICE PROCEDURES I (F,S) (3,0,1) This is a continuation of material introduced in Commerce 184 and 158 on administrative proceudres and office dynamics. Topics include selection and appraisal systems; research techniques relative to management psychology; conference planning; data p r o c e s s i n g p r o c e d u r e s and equipment; preparing minutes; delegation of duties; principles of supervision; and attitude change. V - C O M M E R C E 352 — VOCATIONAL SKILLS LABORATORY (F,S) Skills laboratory in typewriting. Up to 8 hours of lab work are involved in this course. C O M M E R C E 259 — OFFICE PROCEDURES II (F,S) (3,0,1) V - C O M M E R C E 354 — VOCATIONAL SKILLS LABORATORY (F,S) Skills laboratory in Greek a n d Latin for s p e c i a l i z e d terminology Up to 8 hours of lab work per week are involved in this course A course to assist the individual in becoming a more effective supervisor. Delegation of responsibility, motivation, morale and working conditions, effective use of time, reduction of office expanses, compiling data, presenting reports, and improvements in office technology will be discussed. Lab F e e $5.00 68 V - C O M M E R C E 357 — VOCATIONAL SKILLS LABORATORY (F,S) Skills laboratory in French for students wishing to obtain bilingual office positions. This course entails up to 8 hours work per week. Communications V - C O M M E R C E 358 — VOCATIONAL SKILLS LABORATORY (F,S) This course entails up to 8 hours of lab work per week and will investigate changes in technology and their effects on society and upon the job markets. V - C O M M E R C E 359 — VOCATIONAL SKILLS LABORATORY (F,S) (.5,2.5,.5) This course entails up to 8 hours of lab work per week in exploring career possibilities through creative job search techniques. V - C O M M E R C E 360 — VOCATIONAL SKILLS LABORATORY (F.S) This course entails up to 8 hours of lab work per week in bookkeeping and accounting. V C O M 010 — (8 Months) L E G A L STENOGRAPHER PROGRAM L e g a l firms and lawyers are numerous but good legal secretaries are not always readily available. The Legal Stenographer Program provides excellent career opportunities for the graduate. Applicants may apply with no previous stenographic skills. V C O M 020 — COMMERCIAL (4 Months) UPGRADING This program consists of a variety of individual courses designed for persons who have had previous training or experience in general office work and occupational skills. Students may select two or more from the following: Machine Transcription, Advanced Typing, A d v a n c e d Shorthand, C o m munications, Office Technology & Procedures, Legal and Medical Transcription and Bookkeeping. • The level of courses taken will be predetermined by assessment of individual skills and needs. The Communications Program of Capilano C o l l e g e has the broad objective of providing students in the Career/Vocational Programs with competence in the use of the English language and in media communications. The student receives the type of instruction that increases his/her ability to understand the thoughts and ideas of others and to communicate their own thoughts in an effective manner. V C O M 040 — EMPLOYMENT ORIENTATION FOR WOMEN (6 Weeks) Basic technical writing, research papers, spoken presentations, business reports, press reports, and briefs are some of the topics studied in a communications course. Students may in some cases use the teacher as a resource person in the preparation, research and presentation of material while at other times the student will receive instruction from a set curriculum. In still other situations the cirriculum may be varied or modified to adapt to a c l a s s ' s special interest. However, a substantial amount of written work is undertaken by the student so as to develop the necessary processes of thought and selfexpression. There exists a very great need for women, particularly those who have been at home for many years, to gain assistance and support in returning to work. A s a result of being out of touch with the labour market, women are unrealistic and lack confidence in establishing career goals. In addition, due to societal expectations and conditioning, women often fail to consider areas of employment for which they may be very suitable. V C O M 050 — (4 Months) L E G A L STENOGRAPHER Legal Stenographers are in great demand and graduates from the program will have no difficulty obtaining interesting and rewarding positions Local newspapers advertise regularly for legal personnel and salaries start in the $600 range V C O M 060 — MEDICAL (6-8 Months) COMMUNICATIONS 150 — BASIC COMMUNICATIONS (F,S) (3,0,1) A course in the development of writing and speaking skills, with material largely related to specific career goals. Practice in improving English basics, numerous writing assignments, and at least one spoken presentation. STENOGRAPHER COMMUNICATIONS 151 — (S) (3,0,1) Currently there is a great shortage of trained office personnel and the medical field is no exception. With the possible restructuring of B.C.'s health care system and the institution of community clinics, there will be an even greater need for persons to have a background in medical terminology and related skills. BUSINESS WRITING (S) (3,0,1) A course in the basics of business writing: resumes, business letters, and reports. Attention is paid to businesswriting formats and to developing an effective style. Spoken presentations may be required. 69 COMMUNICATIONS 151F — BILINGUAL BUSINESS C O M MUNICATIONS (S) (3,0,1) A course in the basics of business writing both in English and in French. Attention' is paid to business-writing formats and developing an effective style in both languages. At least one spoken presentation in each language will be required. Counselling Group Programs COMMUNICATIONS 152 — TECHNICAL WRITING (S) (3,0,1) A course in the basics of technical writing: research proposals, technical reports, abstracts, and reserach methods. Some attention is given to presentation of technical material to non-technical readers. Spoken presentations may be required, tations may be required. COMMUNICATIONS 153 — COMMUNICATIONS AND T H E ARTS (S) (3,0,1) A course in the use of language in combination with graphic and other arts Some attention will be paid to graphics and language as used in advertising and propaganda. Spoken presentations using audio-visual aids will be required. COMMUNICATIONS 154 — COMMUNICATIONS Counselling and Learning Assistance offer non-credit Group Programs as a service to students and the community without charge The goals of these programs are to provide people with an opportunity to expand self-awareness, personal and career options. The programs combine elements of personal development and skills acquisition. Some programs have limited enrollment Registration information may be gained from the Counselling Reception desk or the Group Programs brochure. IN RECREATION (S) (3,0,1) A course in writing and s p e e c h a s they relate to Outdoor Recreation Management: reports, press releases, articles and briefs. Spoken presentations may be required, required. COMMUNICATIONS 155 — COMMUNICATIONS IN EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION (S) (3,0,1) A course in effective verbal and non-verbal communication, and in the writing of letters, reports and briefs. Spoken presentations may be required. COUNSELLING GROUP PROGRAM 010 — DEVELOPING A CAREER (F,S) (0,0,2) A ten week group program devoted to individual career decision making. The first half will assist students in an evaluation of life goals and decisions about desirable life styles. The second half will concentrate on choice of career paths to realize the chosen lifestyle. This will include information gathering, career strategies, alternative careers and career plan. The group will respond to the concerns of students in a relatively unstructured format. The program may be taken separately, but would be especially beneficial if taken concurrently with the seminar on Developing Personal Potential. COMMUNICATIONS 156 — MEDIA R E S O U R C E S C O M MUNICATIONS (F) (3,0,1) A course in specific writing and speaking skills related to the Media Resources student. Emphasis will be placed on interviewing t e c h n i q u e s , s t o r y - b o a r d i n g , c a p t i o n i n g , a n d adapative writing. Several in-class presentations will be required. COMMUNICATIONS 190 — ARTICLE WRITING (F,S) (3,0,1) A course in researching and writing articles intended for publication in news media and magazines, especially "trade" and special interest periodicals. Attention will be paid to analysis of magazine readership, techniques of research and interviewing, the current market for articles, and the development of an effective prose style. The student will be expected to write at least three articles, in suitable format, and to submit them for publication in established periodicals. COMMUNICATIONS 250F — BILINGUAL COUNSELLING GROUP PROGRAM 011 — V A L U E S AND LIFESTYLES (S) (0,0,2) This group program will explore issues that effect our perspective on life, such as values, formation and purpose and meaning of life. The goal of the program is to raise our awareness of the world that "tends to s q u e e z e us into its mold." A second purpose is in consequence from the first . . . "to allow for renewal of ourselves from within." Topics s u c h a s : despair, h o p e l e s s n e s s , death, our experience of evil, survival of personal life, the will to meaning and the valuing process will be d i s c u s s e d . W e hope to involve resource persons from the college and community. BUSINESS REPORTING (F) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: C M N S 151F or written permission of the Program Co-ordinator A course in the preparation and presentation of business reports, letters. Considerable attention will be paid to development of vocabulary in both languages, and to methods of business research. At least one spoken presentation in each language will be required. COUNSELLING GROUP PROGRAM 012 — DEVELOPING A WINNING LIFESTYLE — A SMALL GROUP EXPERIENCE EMPLOYING TRANSACTIONAL ANALYSIS (F,S) (0,0,2) C O M M U N I C A T I O N S 251F — A D V A N C E D BILINGUAL BUSINESS REPORTING (S) (3,0,1) Prerequisite: C M N S 250F or written permission of the Program Co-ordinator. A continuation of C M N S 250F. Emphasis in this semester will fall on researching, writing, and presenting a long report in each language. Attention will also t i e paid to reporting technical information to non-specialist readers. At least one spoken presentation in each language will be required. In the course, T.A. will be utilized to assist participants to increase effective communication between themselves and others. Group members will, through sharing with one another, be able to gain information regarding the verbal and non-verbal messages they are sending, and how each can "take c h a r g e " of his/her own life. Enrollment will be limited. A n interview with M. Penn is necessary. Transactional Analysis is a method for improving understanding of human relationships d e v e l o p e d by Dr. Eric Berne, author of G a m e s People Play. 70 COUNSELLING GROUP PROGRAM 013 — PERSONAL POTENTIAL (F,S) (0,0,2) DEVELOPING Economics The program will consist of a series of small group exerc i s e s which are d e s i g n e d to help the participants clarify their values and life goals, and to investigate areas of strength. The emphasis will be on the discovery of capacities, talents and abilities which each individual has, but is often not aware of or is not using fully. If these potentialities are discovered and allowed to develop, the result is likely to be a more vital, creative and satisfying life. The program might be especially useful to those who are faced with decisions of vocational choice. The program may be taken separately, but would be especially beneficial if taken concurrently with the seminar of Developing a Career. COUNSELLING GROUP PROGRAM WORKSHOP (F,S) (0,0,2) 014 — Economics is a social science concerned with the allocation of scarce resources and involving the production, distribution, and consumption of wealth. Economics 100 and 101 are introductory courses which raise and explore the kinds of questions economists deal with. They also serve as an introduction to the study of formal economic theory in the 200-level courses. SEXUALITY A short term workshop on a fascinating and beautiful part of life will be offered for students; the program will e m p h a s i z e the inter-personal aspect of sexual relationships. W e intend to provide for maximum participation of the group in meaningful content and ideas. Several guests from outside the college will participate in the workshop. COUNSELLING GROUP PROGRAM 017 — WOMEN ON T H E M O V E (F,S) (0,0,2) Find out how other women handle returning to college in this discussion group. This is for women who want to meet others like themselves, in search of new goals, ideas and plans for their future. This is an informal group designed for women who will enjoy sharing their support and s u c c e s s e s with one another. PROGRAM 018 — ECONOMICS 100 — INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS (F) (3,0,1) A course that involves the identification and study of current economic issues. Reference is made to the nature and historical development of capitalism and how it has been changing and to the contrasts of capitalism and socialism. Government fiscal and monetary policies and simple economic concepts such as supply and demand are dealt with. (One section of this course will be scheduled for inclusion in the Labour Studies Program ) ECONOMICS 101 — CANADIAN ECONOMICS M A C R O AND MICRO CONSIDERATIONS (S) (3,0,1) Co-sponsored with Women's Resource Centre. COUNSELLING GROUP DISCOVERY (F,S) (0,0,2) Studenir- who plan to major in Economics or C o m m e r c e should complete Economics 200 and 201, before proceeding to third year courses at U B.C., S.F.U., or elsewhere. Students who plan to major in Economics at S.F.U. are also advised to complete Economics 120 and 121. SELF- An examination of the contemporary structure of the Canadian economy with some historical reference. The importance of international trade and tariffs; the effects of foreign investment and ownership; the problems of regional disparities and poverty; the interplay of business, government and unions and federalprovincial relations and taxation policies are considered. Focus is on the hard economic choices the people of Canada now face. Through a series of structured exercises and small group discussions, this program will provide a setting where participants can explore those factors which have been significant in their self-development. W e will be investigating such areas as formative influences in childhood, personal characteristics, attitudes to self and others, and interpersonal roles. This program is designed to give participants a better understanding of themselves, their relationships with others. ECONOMICS 120 — ECONOMIC INDUSTRIAL ERA (F) (3,0,1) LEARNING ASSISTANCE PROGRAM 010 — LEARNING AND STUDY SKILLS (F,S) (0,0,2) A broad sweep of economic history from man's earliest beginnings to the Industrial Revolution. The economics of pre-historic man. the River civilizations, Greece, Rome and Europe in the Middle A g e s are studied, while emphasis is placed on the transition from European Feudalism to early forms of capitalism. Four intensive workshops emphasising practical learning and study techniques. Materials will include sample essay and objective tests, weekly time schedules and material to improve your reading comprehension. Each workshop will focus on a single topic. 1) 2) 3) 4) HISTORY OF T H E PRE- ECONOMICS 121 — ECONOMIC DUSTRIAL ERA (S) (3,0,1) Time organization, setting goals and motivation. Getting the most from class, taking notes, class discussion (to speak or not to speak). Reading: improving your comprehension and speed. Taking tests; objective and essay tests, how to study for an examination. HISTORY O F T H E IN- A study of the Industrial Revolution and subsequent economic . growth to the present in context of several countries including Canada. Contrast is made between the paths of development of today's industrial nations and those nations that are now attempting to industrialize. ECONOMICS 130 and 131 (transfer credit being applied for.) LEARNING ASSISTANCE WORKSHOP (F,S) (0,0,2) PROGRAM 011 — A year-long introductory course designed specifically for students enrolled in the Business Management Program. E m phasis will be placed on understanding the organization and operation of mixed economies, and the role of government in pursuing policies of full employment, stable prices and balance of payments equilibrium. READING The workshop series consists of four meetings Each is designed to develop a student's ability to read efficiently with an increased rate of comprehension. Students will measure their reading and study skills level, recognize good reading habits, and learn of alternative reading strategies. Students are advised to complete at least one 100-level course before enrolling for Economics 200 and Economics 201. 71 ECONOMICS 200 — PRINCIPLES O F MACROECONOMIC EDUCATION 154 — HEALTH AND NUTRITION I (F) (3,0,1) The first of a two part study of the young child with a particular emphasis on physiology and the common d i s e a s e s and disorders of childhood. Twelve lectures of this series are concerned with first aid practices and procedures applicable in the preschool setting A fee will be levied to cover costs associated with the St. John's Ambulance First A i d Certificate (Exceptions will be made for people with current First A i d Certificates). THEORY (F,S) (3,0,1) The formal Keynesian theory of national income determination and some contemporary critiques of this theory. Included is the study of the possible causes o< and solutions to unemployment and inflation and the importance of international trade. Government fiscal and monetary policies are examined in detail. ECONOMICS 201 — PRINCIPLES O F MICROECONOMIC EDUCATION 155 — HUMAN GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT THEORY (S) (3,0,1) A study of the theoretical constructs of consumer behaviour and the operation of business firms in the market economy under conditions of perfect competition, oligopoly, monopoly and monopolistic competition. Included is the analysis of the firm's equilibrium position and the determinants of income distribution. I (F) (3,0,1) The first half of a two-part sequence. A study of human growth and development from birth to the end of the pre-school years. An introductory study of theories, principles of development and child study techniques. EDUCATION 156 — HUMAN GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT M (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Education 155 A continuation of Education following the pre-schooler through the middle years of childhood, a d o l e s c e n c e and launching into adulthood. EDUCATION 157 — THE CHILD AND FAMILY LIFE (F) (3,0,1) Sociological perspective on the family in our culture and others. Examination of differences and similarities in family life and socialization of the young child related to ethnic, racial, socio-economic groupings, cultural values and ideology Focus on the nuclear family, single parents, the elderly, contemporary lifestyles — conventional and counter cultural. Implications for the pre-school teacher. EDUCATION 164 — HEALTH AND NUTRITION II (S) (3,0,1) The second of a two-part study of the pre-school child with particular emphasis on the nutritional needs of early childhood and how they can be met in the pre-school setting. EDUCATION 165 — FIELD STUDY (S) (3,0,1) A course whose major goals will be to familiarize students with various types of facilities for the developmentally handicapped. The survey will include observations, seminar reports and discussions dealing with programs and services designed for those with special needs from infancy to adulthood. EDUCATION 151 — (S) (3,2,1) EDUCATION 250 — PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT III (F) (3,2,1) LITERATURE FOR YOUNG CHILDREN Pre-requisite: Education 153 and Education 156 or by written permission of the program co-ordinator. A detailed look at children's early concept development in science, social studies and mathematics. Students will work on individual and group presentations of materials, activities and experiences for the young child. Emphasis will be p l a c e d on the integration of these with other curriculum areas to achieve a balanced, flowing, creative program. Included is a weekend field trip early in the term and weekly lab experiences. A n a d ditional fee will be levied to cover costs of the field trip. Lab fee: $10.00 Pre-requisite. Education 152 or by written permission of the Program Co-ordinator. A course designed to familiarize students with books, poetry and stories for children Emphasis will be p l a c e d on the development and stimulation of language and thought in young children. A brief history of children's literature will be analyzed including its reflection of the cultural attitudes of the day. Students will present many assignments in small groups and make u s e of audio visual aids. Lab fee: $7.00 EDUCATION 252 — CREATIVE ARTS FOR T H E YOUNG CHILD (F) (3,0,1) EDUCATION 152 — PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT I (F) (3,2,1) An introduction to the planning and development of programs for pre-school centres (with major focus on Day Care). Attention will be given to activities that encourage exploration, experimentation, self-expression and self-esteem. Basic principles and methods of guidance will be studied. Weekly lab sessions provide direct involvement with materials. Lab fee: $10. Pre-requisite: Education 153 and Education 156 or by written permission of the Program Co-ordinator. EDUCATION 153 — PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT II (S) (3,2,1) Participation-oriented workshop in the creative arts to examine the experiential approach to art, drama, music and dance with young children. Emphasis is placed on each of those areas as being crucial learning situations for both the child and the student. Labf $10 00 Pre-requisite: Education 152 and 155 Further study of program planning and development with particular reference to day care and to meeting the needs of the individual child in a group setting. Consideration will be given to the child under three, the three to five year old child and to school age children. Lab sessions provide further involvement with materials and activities. Lab fee: $7.00 EDUCATION 254 — FOUNDATIONS O F E A R L Y CHILDHOOD EDUCATION (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Education 153 and Education 156 or by written permission of the Program Co-ordinator. A n overview of historical sources and modern impacts which are reflected in present pre-school procedures. e e : 72 EDUCATION 262 — SPECIAL EDUCATION (F) (3,2,1) Pre-requisite: Education 153 and Education 156 or written permission of the Program Co-ordinator. A course whose major goals will be the introduction to a n d general study of special needs of children in order that the student may increase her/his abilities to identify and work with exceptional pre-school children in regular or special programs. Special emphasis will be placed on community facilities serving exceptional children and application will be made to the gifted, developmentally delayed, neurologically handicapped, emotionally disturbed and multi-handicapped child. Lab fee: $5.00 English EDUCATION 264 — PRE-SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Education 153 and Education 156 or by written permission of the Program Co-ordinator. Administration and management of pre-schools with major focus on day care. Topics studied will include licensing regulations; procedures for setting up a centre; financial operation; personnel policies; staff relationships and supervision; working with a board of directors. EDUCATION 268 — INTERPERSONAL TEACHING (S) (3,0,1) GENERAL INFORMATION Students intending to transfer to universities should take two first year English courses other than 176, 177, 190, 191. Those bound for Simon Fraser University can obtain transfer credits for 010, if they desire. RELATIONSHIPS IN Intending majors and honours students should complete English 2 0 0 and 201, and are encouraged to take another second-year English course English 200 and 201 are sometimes required for certain Arts and Education programs; students should seek university calendars and help from A d visors in determining requirements. Pre-requisite: Education 153 and Education 156 or by written permission of the Program Co-ordinator. A n examination of the role of the pre-school teacher in establishing meaningful relationships with parents, colleagues and community representatives. Specific communication skills will be developed through the group process, role play, sociodrama and interviewing techniques. Community resources and referral procedures will also be studied. ENGLISH P L A C E M E N T TEST Those students who wish to enroll in English, Humanities General or General Studies courses in the A c a d e m i c Division must submit the results of the B C . Government English Placement Test with their registration forms. EDUCATION 270 — VOLUNTEER P L A C E M E N T (F) (3,0,1) A course designed to provide practical experience of a volunteer nature in a special needs facilities. Supervision will be provided through weekly seminars and reports. EDUCATION 271 — INDIVIDUAL PROJECT (S) (3,0,1) Those students who have not taken the B.C. Government English Placement Test should take the Capilano C o l l e g e English Screening Examination before registering for any English, Humanities General or General Studies course. In consultation with the instructor the student will undertake an in-depth study of a program or an area of individual development related to the special needs person. S c h e d u l e s of English Screening Examinations will be posted in the reception area, Student Info Centre and the Humanities Division. EDUCATION 364 — PRACTICUM ENGLISH 010 — I (F) (6,0,2) L A N G U A G E SKILLS (F,S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Taken concurrently with Education 152 or by written permission of the Program Co-ordinator. Note: Credit sections of this course are transferable to Simon Fraser. Drop-in sections are non-credit. The first of a four-pah practicum sequence. During the first half of the term the student observes in the College Day Care Centre, focusing on individual differences among children and developing skill in observing and recording the behaviour of young children. In the second half of the term the student participates in a community pre-school centre as a student assistant 75 hours. Weekly seminars are held throughout the term. An intensive Writing Workshop in the basic language skills to enable the student to proceed without difficulty through a regular college program. Curriculum will evolve from the a s s e s s e d needs of the students. Most work will be practical. Students may enter the drop-in sections Writing Workshop during the semester by signing a list posted in the Humanities Division for an individual half-hour appointment EDUCATION 365 — ENGLISH 090 — ENGLISH A S AN ADDITIONAL L A N G U A G E (F,S) (3,0,1) PRACTICUM II (F,S) (6,0,2) Pre-requisite: Education 364. Taken concurrently with Education 153 or by written permission of the Program Co-ordinator. Note: This course is not transferable to University. A course designed to provide the student whose first language is not English, with verbal and written skills in English,' The course will proceed with the patterns set by the students , needs, generally beginning with a review of basics. Included in the course of study are: reading and oral comprehension, sentence structure, paragraphs and short essays, composition, vocabulary, spelling and verbal communication. Supervised participation in one program for young children. 80 hours. Weekly seminars throughout the term. EDUCATION 366 — PRACTICUM 1 III (F) (6,0,2) Pre-requisite: Education 365 Taken concurrently with Education 250 or by written permission of the Program Co-ordinator. The student participates as a student assistant in one centre. 80 hours. Weekly seminars throughout the term. EDUCATION 367 — PRACTICUM ENGLISH 091 — ENGLISH A S AN ADDITIONAL LANGUAGE (F,S) (3,0,1) IV (S) (6,0,2) Note: This course is not transferable to University. Pre-requisite: Education 366. Taken concurrently with Education 262 or by written permission of the Program Co-ordinator Pre-requisite: English 090 or written permission of the instructor. This course is similar in all respects to English 090 except that the student should have a higher level of ability in the English language, and the stress of study will be on writing and discussion. The student visits a number of different centres for children with special needs and spends an extended block of time in one such centre. 75 hours. Weekly seminars throughout the term. 73 ENGLISH 160 — READINGS IN THE 19TH CENTURY NOVEL (F) (2.5,0,1.5) Note: This course is not transferable to university. (Not being offered 1976/77) This course will meet on Saturday mornings, with optional tutorials on Saturday afternoon, to accommodate persons who are not free during the work week. The course offers discussion of works selected from a list of famous 19th century novels. Two short papers will be written. Not offered in 1977/78. ENGLISH 100 - COMPOSITION (F,S) (3,0,1) A course in the fundamentals of good writing, giving students intensive practice in writing for a variety of purposes, with e m phasis on the essay form. Throughout the term, much attention is given to precise, appropriate and effective selection of words, with p r o g r e s s i v e l y i n c r e a s i n g e m p h a s i s on e f f e c t i v e organization and development of material. Problems in mechanics of writing are dealt with individually, by revision of essays, and, if necessary, by group or individual drill. ENGLISH 161 — READINGS IN THE 20TH CENTURY NOVEL (S) (2.5,0,1.5) Note: This course is not transferable to university. ENGLISH 104 — FICTION (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of selected twentieth-century short stories and novels, each of intrinsic literary merit. The chief aim of the course, beyond broadening and deepening the student's understanding and appreciation of literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression, and to increase the student's ability to express those responses in well-developed oral and written criticism. A continuation of English 160, this course is also planned for Saturdays. Works to be read will be selected from a list of important 20th century novels. Two short papers will be written. Not offered in 1977/78. ENGLISH 165 — JOURNALISM: C O L L E G E NEWSPAPER PRODUCTION (F) (3,0,1) This course is a study of the basic principles of journalism, of the organization of small newspapers, and of the function of college newspapers. A wide variety of college newspapers will be studied and criticized; field trips will be taken to existing college newspaper operations. Instruction will be offered in research, reportage, layout, business procedures, advertising. ENGLISH 105 — POETRY (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of selected major and significant minor twentiethcentury poets whose poetry is of intrinsic literary merit. The chief aim of the course, beyond broadening and deepening the student's understanding and appreciation of literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression, and to increase the student's ability to express those responses in welldeveloped oral and written criticism. Not offered in 1977/78. ENGLISH 166 — JOURNALISM: C O L L E G E NEWSPAPER PRODUCTION (S) (3,0,1) A continuation of English 165. This course will b e devoted to the regular production of a weekly newspaper, including special monthly or bi-monthly supplements. ENGLISH 106 — DRAMA (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of selected and representative twentieth century plays especially since 1950. The chief aim of the course, beyond broadening and deepening the student's understanding and appreciation of literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression, and to increase the student's ability to express those responses in well-developed criticism. Not offered in 1977/78. ENGLISH 176 — ANCIENT AND MEDIAEVAL MYTHOLOGY (F) (3,0,1) Note: This course is not transferable to university. This course introduces the student to a wide range of myths of Greek, Roman, Norse, Teutonic and Oriental origin. It e n courages an understanding of the relation of past to present, and increases the student's awareness of the role myths play in our language and literature. ENGLISH 108 — T H E M E S IN CONTEMPORARY LITERATURE (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of twentieth-century works, each of intrinsic literary merit, arranged under a thematic heading of significance in the contemporary world. The theme heading for each section of the course will be a n n o u n c e d at t h e time of registration. Works wilf be drawn from various genres and will be studied as artistically formed expressions of feelings and ideas, both separately and in relation to one another. ENGLISH (3,0,1) Not offered in 1977/78. ENGLISH 177 — FOLK T A L E S AND L E G E N D S (S) (3,0,1) Note: This course is not transferable to university. This course introduces the student to a great variety of folk tales and legends from all over the world. Students will be e n couraged to contribute their own material. Emphasis is on the inter-relationships between stories and the influence of oral tradition on our present language and literature. Not offered in 1977/78. 110 — INTRODUCTION TO LINGUISTICS I (F) Pre-requisite: English 100 This course offers an introduction to language with emphasis on the history and development of the English language A discussion of various problems related to language will be introduced. The course also examines the intellectual and cultural significance of language and meaning, and presents various ways of recording language. ENGLISH 190 — CREATIVE WRITING (F,S) (3,0,1) Note: This course is transferable to U.B.C. and the University of Victoria. An intensive workshop course designed to help students develop their skill in self-expression and craftsmanship in poetry, fiction, and drama. Students are required to write extensively in their chosen genre, and to develop an awareness, through written practice of at least one of the other genres. Students are also required to submit their writing regularly for group discussion. Students will be encouraged to develop their work to the point at which it should become acceptable for publication in T H E C A P I L A N O R E V I E W and other literary magazines. This course is transferable as Linguistics to S.F.U. and U. Vic. ENGLISH 111 — INTRODUCTION TO LINGUISTICS II (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: English 100; English 110 recommended. The objective of this course as an extension of Linguistics 110, is to survey the various approaches to language study, from normative grammar to generative grammar, and from historical linguistics to formal linguistics. The emphasis will be on contemporary studies in tranformational grammar and in structural and formal linguistics. ENGLISH 191 — CREATIVE WRITING (S) (3,0,1) Note: This course is transferable to U.B.C. and the University of Victoria. A continuation of English 190. This course is transferable as Linguistics to S.F.U. and U. Vic. 74 ENGLISH (3,0,1) 200 — ENGLISH LITERATURE TO 1660 (F,S) ENGLISH 213 — READINGS IN WORLD LITERATURE SINCE 1880 (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Two of English 100, 104, 105, 106, 108; or instructor's written permission. Pre-requisite: Two of English 100, 104, 105, 106, 108; or instructor's written permission. English 212 recommended, but not required. A study of texts in all major genres from selected major authors between mediaeval times and 1660. A n attempt to provide the student with a broad historical and critical frame of reference as well as some in-depth study of individual works. A course similar to English 212, but covering the period from 1880 to 1960. ENGLISH 215 — POETRY AND POETICS, PRIOR TO T H E 20TH CENTURY (F) (3,0,1) ENGLISH LITERATURE SINCE 1660 (F,S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Two of English 100, 104, 105, 106, 108; or instructor's written permission. English 2 0 0 recommended, but not required. Pre-requisite: Two of English 100, 104, 105, 106, 108 (preferably 105); or instructor's written permission. This course offers an investigation of poetry before the 20th century. Students will have an opportunity to read long works and/or to concentrate on three or four major poets. A course similar to English 200, but covering the later period indicated. Note: University transfer being applied for. ENGLISH 202 — CANADIAN LITERATURE (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Two of English 100, 104, 105, 106, 108; or instructor's written permission. ENGLISH 216 — POETRY AND POETICS OF THE 20TH C E N TURY (S) (3,0,1) A course designed to familiarize the student with major, representative authors from the colonial beginnings of C a n a d a to World War II. A n investigation of various themes and styles which evolved through the early literature and which are reflected in contemporary Canadian literature. Examples of significant French-Canadian works studied in translation. Pre-requisite: Two of English 100, 104, 105, 106, 108 (preferably 105); or instructor's written permission. This course offers a study of theories of writing, theories of language, systems of thought and understanding of tradition as they relate to 20th century poetry and poetics. Not a survey, this course presents the opportunity for intensive study of several significant poets or of the development of a particular form. ENGLISH 203 — CANADIAN LITERATURE (S) (3,0,1) Note: University transfer being applied for. Pre-requisite: Two of English 100, 104, 105, 106, 108; English 202 recommended but not required; or instructor's written permission. ENGLISH 290 — CREATIVE WRITING — POETRY (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: English 190 or 191, or the instructor's written permission. The continuation of English 202, becoming more intensive in its investigation of individual major, modern authors of poetry, novels and plays in C a n a d a since World War II A study of the emergence of modern form of themes and attitudes of a sensibility uniquely Canadian. This course offers an intensive workshop in the writing of poetry. It will concentrate on furthering the student's knowledge of current poetic forms while at the same time increasing his/her awareness of his own voice, this individual ground for writing, and the development of his/her own poetic. ENGLISH 204 — MAJOR AMERICAN WRITERS TO 1850 (F) (3,0,10) Pre-requisite: Two of English 100, 104, 105, 106 or 108; or instructor's written permission A course designed to familiarize the student with the writings of selected major representative American writers, and to provide the student with a broad historical and critical frame of reference. Texts considered both for their own literary merits and in historical context. Students will be expected to d o a certain amoung of reading of contemporary work, both poems and statements poets have made about their own poetics or aesthetics. Jn their writing they will have the opportunity of trying a variety of forms, for instance, the short lyric, the serial poem, narrative verse, prose poetry. Note: This course has transfer credit at U.B.C. and U. Vic. ENGLISH 291 — CREATIVE WRITING — FICTION (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: English 190 or 191 or the instructor's written permission. ENGLISH 205 — MAJOR AMERICAN WRITERS SINCE 1850 (S) (3,0,1) This course offers an intensive workshop in the writing of fiction. It will concentrate on furthering the student's knowledge of the state of current fiction w hile giving him/her practise in developing his/her own voice, his/her awareness of word choice and rhythm, his/her ability to use authentic dialogue, to shape character, to experiment with points-of-view. Pre-requisite: Two of English 100, 104, 105, 106 or 108; or instructor's written permission English 204 recommended, but not required. A course similar to English 204, but covering the period from 1850 to 1930. Students will, then, be expected to do a certain amount of reading of contemporary fiction and to d i s c u s s various techniques. In their writing they will have the opportunity of trying out these techniques in both short and extended forms of fiction. ENGLISH 206 — S E C O N D YEAR DRAMA (F,S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Two of English 100, 104, 105, 106, 108 (preferably 106); or instructor's written permission. This course continues from English 106, in investigating various forms of dramatic literature chosen largely from a pre20th century reading list. Students will explore specific elements of style and form, various periods of drama history, and various s u b genres of drama. Note: This course has transfer credit at U.B.C. and U. Vic. GENERAL INFORMATION — ENGLISH HUMANITIES 100/101 — ART AND LITERATURE IN T H E 20TH CENTURY (F,S) (2,3,1.5) Note: University transfer being applied for. The English component of this course explores through a rotation of lectures, seminars and workshops, selected groups and figures from recent literature. The composition and literature component offers exemption from English 100 at the University of British Columbia provided it is taken at the equivalent of 3 hours per week over two terms. The Art component of this course is equivalent to Art 100 offered in the Career Arts Program at Capilano College and, if the two semesters' study is complete, to Fine Arts 171 offered at the University of British Columbia. ENGLISH 212 — READINGS IN WORLD LITERATURE T O 1880 (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Two of English 100, 104, 105, 106 or 108; or instructor's written permission. A course to acquaint students with a variety of major and influential works of literature from the classical Greek era to the end of the 18th Century and to provide the student with a broad historical and critical frame of reference. Texts considered both for their own literary merits and in historical context. 75 FINE ARTS 201 — NORTH CHITECTURE II (S) (3,0,1) AMERICAN ART AND AR- A continuation of Fine Arts 2 0 0 . This course is a topical exploration of Canadian and American Art and Architecture in the 20th Century. Students are encouraged to take the second semester offering. Note: Specific transfer credits for Fine Arts 200-201 have been arranged with the Fine Arts Department at the University of British Columbia. Not offered in 77/78 FINE ARTS 210 — MODERN ART (19TH CENTURY) (F) (3,0,1) This course is an in-depth study of European art of the 19th Century It considers artists from France, Germany, Spain and England, focuses on important art movements and countermovements such as Neo-classicism, Romanticism, Realism and Impressionism. This course is equivalent to Art 260 offered in the Career Arts Program. FINE ARTS 211 — MODERN ART (20TH CENTURY) (S) (3,0,1) This course is a continuation of Fine Arts 210, concentrating on the art of the 20th Century in Europe and its subsequent development in the United States. This half of the course may be taken without pre-requisite. This course is equivalent to Art 261 offered in the Career Art Program. Fine Arts 210/211 has transfer credit to the Fine Arts Program at the University of British Columbia. French GENERAL INFORMATION All Fine Arts Courses are transferable to the Fine Arts Department at the University of British Columbia and receive elective credit at Simon Fraser University. Academic students have the option to take the following University of British C o l u m b i a transfer course in the Careers Art Program: ART 100-1 (Equivalent to Fine Arts component of Humanities 100-1) ART 260-1 (Equivalent to Find Arts 210-11) Academic students may also take studio art courses and apply these to transfer credit at U.B.C. For details s e e Capilano College Equivalency guide. Note: Students should also s e e Humanities 100/101 Art and Literature in the 20th Century. FINE ARTS 100 — THE HISTORY O F ART I (F) (3,0,1) An historical survey of art from prehistoric times to the late Gothic Period with consideration given to the painting, architecture and sculpture of each s u c c e s s i v e era as well as the artists themselves, their social context. Problems in style and period classification will be d i s c u s s e d . FINE ARTS 101 — THE HISTORY O F ART II (S) (3,0,1) A consideration of painting, architecture and sculpture from the Renaissance to the present. The approach pursued in Fine Arts 100 is continued. Although students are encouraged to take Fine Arts 100 first, it is possible to enroll in the second semester offering. French streams at Capilano College: FINE ARTS 200 — NORTH AMERICAN ART AND ARCHITECTURE I (F) (3,0,1) This course is an in-depth survey of the Art and Architecture of America and C a n a d a from 1600 to 1900. The background to the styles manifested during this period in these two countries will be examined, and the course will e m p h a s i z e major trends and major figures rather than seek to cover an enormous range of material in a superficial manner. 1. Audio-lingual: French 102/103 - 1st level. French 2 0 2 — 2 0 3 - 2nd level 2. Audio-visual: Dialogue C a n a d a French 160/161 - 1st level French 2 6 0 2 6 1 - 2nd level 3. Grammar-Literature: French 110/111 - 1st level French 210/211 - 2nd level Other special French courses offered: French 106 Translation Techniques, 150/151 munications), and 170/171, Q u e b e c Culture. Not offered in 77/78. 76 (see C o m - S.F.U. Students who wish to proceed to S.F.U. and to pursue further courses in French are reminded of the present equivalency standards. Elective credit will be given at S.F.U. for all Capilano College French courses. Exemption from and placement in higher courses are determined by the results of a placement test or other assessment procedure. A s a result of the placement test, area credit may be granted which would count toward a major in French. C o u r s e s which do not qualify toward a major will be awarded elective credit only. U.B.C. Students with French Grade 11 who wish only to satisfy the U.B.C. Faculty of Arts language requirement need Capilano College French 102 and 103. Should they plan to major in French, they should take French 202 and 220 during their third year at U . B . C , by permission of the U.B.C. French Department. Students with French Grade 12 who intend to major at U.B.C. should complete French 110 and 111, a s well as French 2 1 0 and 211. They may then proceed to U.B.C. French 220, which may be taken during their third year by permission from the Department. Note: A l l French courses include a total of five and one-half hours of instruction per week, made up of three hours of lectures; one and one-half hours of laboratory practice; and one hour of conversation practice with a native speaker. Native speakers of French, German or Spanish who wish to take first or second-year courses in these languages must consult with the Language Co-ordinator first. University rules governing such students differ within departments, but the Language Co-ordinator has correspondence dealing with matters relevant to credit transfer and point of entry; in order to avoid any misunderstanding, such students are invited to d i s c u s s these problems with the Language Co-ordinator prior to enrollment. Students who have received training in French outside B.C. will be placed in the appropriate course after consultation with the Language Co-ordinator. FRENCH 102 — INTRODUCTORY FRENCH 150 — FRENCH COMMUNICATION (F) (3,0,0) Pre-requisite: basic knowledge of French (eg. French 102, French 160). Course work would include basic writing mechanics and their application in the composition of various types of business letters. FRENCH 160 — DIALOGUE CANADA (F,S) (3,1,1.5) Intended for beginners. Speak and understand French by the Audio-Visual method. This course will provide students with a good functional vocabulary in a Canadian context. FRENCH 161 — DIALOGUE CANADA (F,S) (3,1,1.5) Note: University transfer being applied for. A continuation of the work of French 160. Instructor's permission required for those who do not have the pre-requisite French 160. This course is intended for those students with more knowledge of French. FRENCH 170 — Q U E B E C C U L T U R E I (F) (3,0,0) The aim of this course is to familiarize the student with the important aspects of Q u e b e c culture, from its origins to the present day. The student should gain a feeling of continuity of the culture, its rapid transformation since 1960, and its place within Confederation. FRENCH 171 — Q U E B E C CULTURE II (S) (3,0,0) Pre-requisite: French 1 70 or written permission of the instructor. This course is a continuation of French 1 70. FRENCH 202 — ADVANCED FRENCH (F) (3,1.5,1) Pre-requisite: French 102 and 103 or French 12. An advanced course to continue oral fluency with grammar review; some dictation and oral composition; continues the work of French 103. FRENCH 203 — ADVANCED FRENCH (S) (3,1.5,1) FRENCH (F) (3,1.5,1) P(e-requisite: French 202. This course should be taken, whenever possible, in the term following French 202. Pre-requisite: Normally French 11 or some previous experience of French or written consent of instructor. A course designed to give spoken fluency and reading facility as well as some writing of the language, based on the audiolingual approach. FRENCH 103 — INTRODUCTORY A continuation of the work of French 202, with further e m phasis on oral expression FRENCH 2 1 0 — ADVANCED FRENCH (F) (3,1.5,1) Pre-requisite: French 110, 111 or considerable previous experience in written and oral work. A n advanced course with emphasis on written work, including formal translation, stylistic exercises, dictation, and weekly written assignments. Literary works c h o s e n from 20th Century novels will be studied, requiring some background reading. FRENCH (S) (3,1.5,1) Pre-requisite: French 102 or some previous experience of French, or written consent of Instructor. This course should be taken, whenever possible, in the term following French 102. A continuation of French 102. FRENCH 106 — TRANSLATION TECHNIQUES — FRENCH TO ENGLISH (S) (3,0,0) A course devoted to translation techniques from French to English and English to French. FRENCH 211 — ADVANCED FRENCH (S) (3,1.5,1) Pre-requisite: French 210. This course should be taken, whenever possible, in the term following French 210. A continuation of the work of French 210; literary texts will be chosen from 20th Century French-Canadian works; some background reading required. FRENCH 110 — INTERMEDIATE FRENCH (F) (3,1.5,1) Pre-requisite: French 12 or French 102 and 103 or previous written/oral experience. 'Grammar revision; exercise, dictation, weekly assignments; some French and French-Canadian stories. FRENCH 260 — DIALOGUE CANADA (F,S) (3,1.5,1) Pre-requisites: French 102-103 O R French 160-161 or written permission of the Instructor. A continuation of the course "Dialogue C a n a d a " — French 160-161. This is a C A N A D I A N course using the audio-visual method and material taken from everyday Canadian life. The method e m p h a s i z e s the spoken language — only a limited amount of written work will be done FRENCH 111 — INTERMEDIATE FRENCH (S) (3,1.5,1) Pre-requisite: French 110. This course should be taken, whenever possible, in the term following French 110. A continuation of the work of French 110; including composition, and an in-depth study of at least two major 20th C e n tury novels. FRENCH 261 — DIALOGUE CANADA (S) (3,1.5,1) Pre-requisite: French 260 O R written permission of the instructor. A continuation of French 260. FRENCH 150 — FRENCH COMMUNICATION Please s e e under C O M M U N I C A T I O N S : 151F designed for learning bi-lingual office procedures. 77 GEOGRAPHY 111 — HUMAN GEOGRAPHY (F) (3,1,0) An examination of human cultural characteristics and activities in different environmental situations. The distribution and characteristics of human populations are examined in both a global and contemporary North American context; and will stress concepts of perception, culture, and diffusion in these man-land relationships. General Studies GENERAL STUDIES 100 & 101 C A P A C a p A is one of the C o l l e g e ' s most exciting offerings. It consists of two terms' work, with nine (9) credit hours granted for each term This kind of program allows for a great deal of both collective and individual learning experiences, and for a great variety of approaches to teaching (lectures, seminars, tutorials, workshops, etc.). Each year, the students and three instructors explore a topic through a wide range of methods and a p proaches. C A P A 1977/78: I M A G E S O F HUMANITY. This course will survey the changing concepts of what it means to be man or woman, human, citizen, person. Geography GEOGRAPHY 112 — INTRODUCTION VIRONMENTS (F,S) (3,2,1) TO EARTH E N - An introduction to Physical Geography using films, lectures, labs and field trips to explain processes in geomorphology and biogeography. Some of the environments to be considered are: glacial, volcanic, coastal, arid and fluvial. Maps and aerial photographs will be used to illustrate the various features. E m phasis will be placed on Canadian examples and the interactions between man and his physical environment. GEOGRAPHY 114 — WEATHER AND CLIMATE (F,S) (3,2,1) A course introducing students to the study of our atmospheric environment. Principles of climatology and meteorology will be explained (using films, lectures, labs and discussion groups), to permit a basic understanding of the weather we experience daily. Emphasis will be placed on Canadian examples, and the interactions between climate and other elements of our e n vironment, including man. GEOGRAPHY 200 — T E C H N O L O G Y AND ECONOMIC E N VIRONMENTS (S) (3,1,1) An examination of the concepts and themes of economic geography in terms of production and consumption. The traditional primary, secondary, tertiary, and quaternary divisions in economic geography are reviewed in terms of contemporary issues s u c h a s development versus underdevelopment, poverty, and the location of industrial activities. GEOGRAPHY 201 — Geography courses are planned for students who wish to major in this field as well as for those who wish electives. More than one geography course may be taken simultaneously. Students intending to transfer to U.B.C. may combine Geography 110 and 201 to receive credit for U.B.C. Geography 200/201. Students p l a n n i n g to transfer to S.F.U. may take the geography courses in any sequence with the exception of the new Georgraphy 216 and 221 courses which require prerequisites. Geography 112 and 114 are equivalent to Geography 101 at U.B.C. and fulfill the lab science requirement at U.B.C. and U. Vic. GEOGRAPHY 216 — OUR ATMOSPHERIC ENVIRONMENT (F,S) (3,2,1) An expansion of the concepts outlined in Geography 114. Large and small scale atmospheric phenomena are described, and the processes leading to their forms and distributions are d i s c u s s e d . Films, lectures, labs and discussion groups will be used to explain some basic physical laws and how they can be applied to the p r o c e s s e s we observe The subjects of atmospheric energy, moisture and motion will be covered, with an aim to provide the student with a deeper understanding of the atmosphere and its interactions with the Earth environment. Pre-requisite: Geography 114 or Instructor's permission. NOTE: All geography courses have university transferability. GEOGRAPHY 106 — BRITISH COLUMBIA: ANALYSIS (F,S) (3,1,0) A REGIONAL A regional analysis of the geography of British C o l u m b i a which examines the criteria for defining regions: the historical development of settlement in the Western Cordillera; resource extraction and other forms of current activity; environmental perception and man — land relationships in the British C o l u m b i a landscape. GEOGRAPHY 110 — (3,1,0) URBAN STUDIES (S) (3,1,0) A course based on the themes and problems encountered in the field of urban geography recognizing the increasing interdisciplinary nature of urban area analysis and examining urbanization as an historic and rapidly continuing process. This course also examines the growth of urban regions and patterns of settlement; the dynamics of urban structure and land use; and the critical problems that face mankind today due to past developments in the spatial, economic and social organization of cities. Examples will be taken from many parts of the world, though special attention will be made to the Lower Mainland of F.C. GEOGRAPHY 220 — CANADA: ITS REGIONS, PEOPLES AND PROBLEMS (F,S) (3,1,0) Pre-requisite: any one of Geography 106, 110, 111, 112 or 114. This course deals with Canada as a political region, and d i s c u s s e s regional issues based on Canada's historical, social and economic development The course is designed to present information on past and contemporary Canadian issues, and draws on films, slides, and guest lecturers to complement selected readings. T H E S C O P E O F GEOGRAPHY (F) A course concentrating on the development and present-day use of geographic methods of inquiry and techniques of analysis in the study of mankind in his physical and human.environments. A combined discussion group-laboratory course, in which students are encouraged to apply learned concepts in field research. Transfer Credit for this course is available to all local Universities, as well as the Canadian Studies program at Simon Fraser University. 78 G E O G R A P H Y 221 — M A P A N D A I R P H O T O INTERPRETATION (F,S) (3,3,1) Pre-requisites: Geography 112 and 114 or Outdoor Recreation 150 and 151 or written permission of the Instructor. German This course deals with the u s e of maps and aerial photography to interpret natural and man-made phenomena. Major topics: Physical landscapes, Urban development and Regional land use. Lecture and labs will include topographic and geologic maps; vertical and oblique air photos; and black/white and colour photography. Land-use maps and multispectral remote sensing techniques will be additional topics covered. Note: University transfer credit applied for. GEOGRAPHY 249 — COMPARATIVE CULTURES: A FIELD STUDY COURSE IN GEOGRAPHY (SU) (3) Pre-requisite: Depends upon study area or written permission of instructor. This course applies the tools, techniques, concepts and methods of the geographer to examining the landscape. The focus is primarily on these field research techniques as they apply to a study area; and the study area will alternate each year between B.C. and/or Canada and foreign countries. NOTE: Because of costs, instructor expertise, and the overall ability to offer all geography courses it should be noted that this course may not be offered in some years; and may not be interdisciplinary. Geology Geology courses include weekly two-hour laboratory periods or equivalent field projects. These courses are designed for students who wish to gain a general knowledge of the earth's structure, composition, and history, as well as for those who intend to proceed to further studies in earth sciences at a university. Students planning to transfer to U.B.C. may combine Geology 110 and 111 to gain credit for U.B.C. Geology 105. G E O L O G Y 110 — PHYSICAL G E O L O G Y (F) (3,2,1) Topics to be studied include: structure and identification of common minerals; economic mineral deposits; origin and classification of rocks; weathering and erosion; development of landforms; composition and structure of continents and ocean basins; volcanoes and earthquakes; palaeo-magnetism, continental drift, sea-floor s p r e a d i n g a n d t e c t o n i c s of lithospheric plates, internal constitution of the earth; origin of the earth. A s these topics entail the study of chemical and physical processes acting upon earth materials, students who have a little s c i e n c e background should consult the instructor to determine how they can best learn the needed principles. G E O L O G Y 111 — HISTORICAL G E O L O G Y (S) (3,2,1) Pre-requisite: Geology 110 or equivalent. The geological evolution of continents and ocean basins constitutes the main theme of this course. Topics to be studied include: relative and absolute age of minerals and rocks; fossils and stratigraphic palaeonotology; geologic time-scale; ancient environments and organic evolution; geological history of the North American continent and the Atlantic and Pacific oceanbasins; geological history of our immediate environment. S.F.U. Students who wish to proceed to S.F.U. and to pursue further courses in German are reminded of the present equivalency standards. Elective credit will be given at S . f .U. for all Capilano College German courses. Exemption from and placement in higher courses are determined by the results of a placement test or other assessment procedure. A s a result of the placement test, area credit may be granted which would count toward a major in German. C o u r s e s which do not qualify toward a major will be awarded elective credit only. U.B.C. In the case of U . B . C present equivalent standards provide transfer on the following basis: Capilano College U.B.C. German 100 and 101 (3 credits each) 100 (3) German 200 and 201 (3 credits each) 200 (3) The student w i s h i n g to major fulfills d e p a r t m e n t a l requirements with German 223, which may be taken in the third year by permission of the Department. Note: All courses in German include a total of five and one-half hours of instruction per week, made up of three hours of lectures; one and one-half hours of laboratory practice; and one hour of conversational practice with a native speaker. Native speakers of German who wish to take a first or secondyear German course must consult with the German instructor first. University rules governing such students differ within departments, but the Language Department has correspondence dealing with matters relevant to credit transfer and point of entry; in order to avoid any misunderstanding, s u c h students are invited to d i s c u s s these problems with the department prior to enrollment. GERMAN 100 — FIRST YEAR GERMAN (F) (3,1.5,1) A comprehensive introduction to the German language using a multiple approach: emphasis on understanding and speaking with reinforcement through reading and writing. GERMAN 101 — FIRST YEAR GERMAN (S) (3,1.5,1) Pre-requisite: German 100, or its equivalent with written permission of the instructor. This course should be taken, whenever possible, in the term following German 100. Recommended also for those who are considering taking German 200 at a later date and need review work. GERMAN 200 — SECOND YEAR GERMAN (F) (3,1.5,1) Pre-requisite: German 101, or its equivalent with written permission of the Instructor. A course which includes conversation, grammar, composition and the study of modern literary selections. GERMAN 201 — S E C O N D YEAR GERMAN (S) (3,1.5,1) Pre-requisite: German 200, or its equivalent with written permission of the instructor. This course should be taken, whenever possible, in the term following German 200. A continuation of the work in German 200. Health HEALTH (3,0,1) 158 — MEDICAL History OFFICE PROCEDURES (F,S) Students planning to major in history should have at least two history courses at the College These can be any two courses, although the potential major is advised that a good program of study would include at least one each of courses in Canadian, U.S. and European history. A n intended major should also have a broad sampling of courses in the Social Sciences and Humanities. Students planning to major in history at Simon Fraser University should take six history courses in the first two years. Students planning to take honours should acquire a reading knowledge of an appropriate non-English language. Introduction to hospital admitting procedures and the various relationships between departments; correct techniques in dealing with personnel; patients and the public; plus procedures common to general medical offices including insurance forms, appointments, patient records, billing, and professional ethics of para-medical personnel. HEALTH 160 — (3,0,1) INTRODUCTION TO HEALTH C A R E (F,S) A course designed for students interested in the health professions and especially for those preparing for careers in health care. Emphasis is placed on basic medical information pertaining to physical a n d mental health and current philosophies and practices in medicine today. HISTORY 103 — Q U E B E C IN CANADA (S,SU) (3,0,1) A historical approach to the conflicts between English and French Canadians and between "federalist" and "separatist" French Canadians. HEALTH 161 — INTRODUCTION TO HEALTH C A R E (F,S) (3,0,1) HISTORY 106 — EUROPE IN WORLD HISTORY I (F) (3,0,1) A study of selected themes in Western European history from approximately 500 A.D. to 1500 A.D., with special emphasis given to Europe's contacts and relations with other nations, cultures and peoples Continuation of Health 160. Includes a Senior First A i d Certificate. HEALTH 162 — ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY (F,S) (3,0,1) HISTORY 107 — EUROPE IN WORLD HISTORY II (S) (3,0,1) A study of the structure, function and inter-relationships of the organic systems of the body Common medical disorders, operative procedures and related terminology will be studied in conjunction with the systems. A course designed to follow History 106, and covering the period from approximately 1500 A.D. to the present. HISTORY 108 — ISSUES AND THEMES IN U.S. HISTORY (F) (3,0,1) An overview of U.S. history, 1620 to the present, focussing on selected themes and topics. HEALTH 163 — ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY (F,S) (3,0,1) Continuation of the work begun in Health 162. HEALTH 164 — MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY (F,S) (3,0,1) An introduction to Greek and Latin prefixes, suffixes, roots and combining forms common to medical terminology. HISTORY 110 — (3,0,1) HEALTH 165 — MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY A n overview of the history of N e w France and British North America, with special emphasis given to the problems of a colonial culture and the development of Canadian society. (F,S) (3,0,1) Continuation and reinforcement of terminology in Health 164. HEALTH 260 — MEDICAL (3,0,1) HISTORY 111 — (3,0,1) RECORDS T E C H N O L O G Y (F) CANADA BEFORE CONFEDERATION (F) C A N A D A SINCE CONFEDERATION (S) Introduction to medical records and their role in the provision of health care. Functions, responsibilities and ethics of medical record personnel. Medical record content, its determinants and application to patient care, reimbursement for care, and for medical research. Procedures for maintenance, completion and preservation of medical records in health care institutions, including microfilming and computer storage. A course designed to follow History 110, and to focus on the development of a Canadian culture and identity. HEALTH 261 — MEDICAL (3,0,1) HISTORY 201 — (3,0,1) HISTORY 200 — THE CITY, 1350-1850 (F) (3,0,1) An analysis of Western European urban life, including the mediaeval, mercantile and early industrial eras. Special emphasis is placed on the English city. RECORDS T E C H N O L O G Y (S) THE CITY, 1800 TO THE PRESENT (S) A study of North American urban life, with special emphasis placed on the history of Canadian cities. Principles of hospital statistics, abstracting data from medical records and preparation of administrative and medical statistics. Preparation of reports, including basic tables and graphs. Principles of nomenclature and classification, coding d i s e a s e s and operations for research purpose according to the various recognized systems, including Standard Nomenclature of Disease and Operations. HISTORY 203 — L O C A L HISTORY SEMINAR (S,SU), (3,0,1) A course on the North Shore and Lower Mainland in the context of British Columbian history. Special emphasis is placed on methodology, and on research techniques. 80 Legal Studies Humanities HUMANITIES 100 — ART AND LITERATURE IN THE TWENTIETH CENTURY (F) (3,2,1.5) Humanities 100 is a n interdisciplinary course meeting in a rotation of lectures, seminars, and workshops. Selected works and the important artistic movements of 19th and 20th century art and literature will be studied. HUMANITIES 101 — ART AND LITERATURE IN THE TWENTIETH CENTURY (S) (2,3,1.5) A continuation of Humanities 100, with an exclusive focus on 20th century art and literature. NOTE: University Transfer credit approved. To obtain equivalent credit for Fine Arts 171 and English 100 at the University of British Columbia, the student must do both terms. These courses fulfill first year English requirements and carry equivalency for 6 hours credit in Fine Arts in the Career Art Program (Art 100-1). L E G A L STUDIES 150 — INTRODUCTION TO L E G A L STUDIES I (F) (3,0,1) This is an introduction to legal concepts and to legal reasoning and is comprised of two parts. Part I is concerned with the history and development of legal institutions and the principles of common law, and will include lectures on and discussions of the relationship between law and equity, the interpretation of statutes, the doctrine of precedent, and the respective roles of lawyers, courts, and legislatures. Labour Studies Part II will be an introduction to public law, i.e., the law governing the relations between the federal a n d provincial governments, and the citizen of the state. The areas of public law to be examined are: (a) Constitutional Law: This will involve an examination of the British North America Act, the doctrines of the supremacy of parliament, the division of powers, and the nature of Canadian Federalism and (b) Criminal Law: This will involve the consideration of the basic principles of the law of crimes, the criminal code and the Canadian Bill of Rights. Throughout the course, c a s e s will be assigned. Current developments in the law will be stressed. Lab fee:$5.00 L E G A L STUDIES 151 — L E G A L STUDIES II (S) (3,0,1) This course is a continuation of Legal Studies 150 and is an introduction to private law, i.e., the law governing the relationship of citizens to each other. The three fundamental areas of private law that will be covered are: property, contracts, and torts. Time permitting, the basic principles of company law, wills and trusts and family law also will be d i s c u s s e d . Although some statues will be examined, the emphasis will be on d e c i d e d cases and current developments in the law. Lab fee: $5.00 The Labour Studies Program is designed to serve the needs of trade union organization and workers in general. A program advisory committee has been established to give on-going advice and direction to the content of various courses in the academic and career division and to advice on the establishment of non-credit courses in the Community Education offerings. C o u r s e s currently available to students with this particulat in- L E G A L STUDIES 152 — BASIC LITIGATION I (F) (1.50,-5) (formerly Commerce 282) terest include: a) Economics 100 b) Political S c i e n c e 199 (History of the Labour Movement) c) Legal Studies 2 7 0 Introduction to the judicial process, basic pleading and trial procedure in civil and criminal litigation; correct use of Supreme Court Rules; procedures in pre-trial preparation and documents; precedents; forms of citation used in case law. Lab fee: $5.00 Each of these courses is labelled in the regular course offering sections as a course of interest to the Labour Studies Program. Interested students should consult the course descriptions listed under the appropriate academic or career subject heading. These courses will be identified in the timetable as courses of L E G A L STUDIES 153 — BASIC CORPORATE I (F,S) (1.5,0,1.5) An examination of the British C o l u m b i a Companies Act and the various documents that a legal assistant or secretary must be familiar with in order to incorporate a company and attend to routine filings and resolutions. Records, office requirements, annual proceedings, preparing share certificates and registration. Labfee:$5 00 interest to this program. A s well, each of the Community Education brochures oqtlines a number of courses applicable to this program. Interested students should consult the current Community Education brochure for listings of such courses. 81 L E G A L STUDIES 154 — LAND REGISTRY SYSTEM (F,S) (1.5,05) L E G A L STUDIES 162 — (3,0,1) History and examination of the land registry system in British C o l u m b i a . L a n d Registry A c t requirements; d o c u m e n t s necessary for registration; the nature and effect of transfers and charges; search procedures will be among the topics presented. Lab fee: $5.00 Pre-requisite: Legal Studies 152. This course, designed for para-legal personnel assisting in litigation, will deal with problems encountered in the process of litigation and how to anticipate or intercept difficulties, and will cover criminal Divorce, Enforcement and A p p e a l Procedures. The course will be run as a workshop. Those students with work experience in this field may challenge the pre-requisite. L a b fee: $5.00 L E G A L STUDIES 155 — BASIC C O N V E Y A N C E AND MORT G A G E PROCEDURES (F,S) (1.5,0.5) This course covers Interim Agreements, interim and long-term financing; L a n d Registry A c t requirements; p r o c e d u r e s , documents and forms involved in conveying secure title and registering various charges. Emphasis will be on preparing acceptable documents, d e e d s of Land, Mortgages, Agreements for Sale and necessary related forms. L a b fee: $5.00 L E G A L STUDIES 163 — CORPORATE PROCEDURES (F,S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Legal Studies 153 This course includes a study of extra-provincial companies, reporting companies and various problems encountered in corporate procedures. Work students with legal office experience in this field may challenge the pre-requisite. Lab fee: $5 00 LEGAL STUDIES 156 — BASIC CORPORATE II (S) (1.5,0,1.5) II (S) (1.5,0,15) Continuation of work begun in Legal Studies 153. For Secretarial students only. Legal Assistant students should take Legal Studies 163. L a b fee: $5 00 L E G A L STUDIES (1.5,0,15) 157 — WILL AND PROBATE L E G A L STUDIES 165 — VEYANCING (F,S) (3,0,1) (F,S) Lab fee: $5.00 L E G A L STUDIES 166 — (1.5,0,1.5) Continuation of work begun in Legal Studies 152. For secretarial students only Legal Assistant students should register for Legal Studies 162. WOMEN AND THE LAW (F,S) This course will examine the manner in which the law has affected the status of women, and will include: women and the criminal code; women and prisons; soliciting, rape, abortion; women and labour unions; discrimination in employment and pensions; human rights; affirmative action; marriage laws; maintenance; welfare; divorce; paternity; custody; common law marriages; matrimonial property, credit, contracts, citizenship and immigration. L a b fee: $5.00 FOR T H E L E G A L This course is designed for the Legal Assistant who wants to understand basic accounting principles without taking a formal introductory accounting course. The student completing this course can expect to have a good understanding of the a c counting function, the services it can provide the Legal Assistant, and how to interpret statements, reports, budgets, etc. in the preparation of files in the law office. Through lectures and problem-solving labs the student is exposed to the accounting cycle, and the analysis of financial statements. Emphasis on this accounting course is placed on the interpretation, analysis and use of accounting data. The mechanics of bookkeeping will not be a function of this course. L E G A L STUDIES 169 — CITIZEN A D V O C A C Y (F,S) (3,0,1) A practical course encompassing law and community action; the law relating to civil liberties; legal aid sen/ices; the examination of the "lawyering process," analysis of skills n e c e s s a r y for interviewing, e x a m i n i n g w i t n e s s e s and negotiating. Lab fee: $5.00 LEGAL STUDIES 170 — L E G A L THEORY (F,S) (3,0,1) L E G A L RESEARCH (F,S) (3,0,1) This course will acquaint the legal assistant with the techniques and methodology of legal research and will include functions such as reading briefs and legal documents; using encyclopediae, annotated reports, restatements, law reviews, case comments; locating decisions and citations. Lab fee: $5.00 This course is an introduction to the major theories of law, the nature of legal obligation, and the relationship between law and morality. Although it is a course in legal philosophy, the principle studies will be d i s c u s s e d in the context of such practical issues as defending the guilty, obeying immoral laws, legislating morals, penal reform, law and social change, and the use and abuse of legal technicalities. The emphasis will be on the role the legal system plays in our society, and the role it ought to play. L a b fee: $5.00 L E G A L STUDIES 161 — LEGISLATIVE (1.5,0,1.5) AND CON- This course is a continuation of Legal Studies 154 with a more intensive and in-depth approach to A L L Land Registry documents and difficult title conveyances, statements of a d justments, reconciliation. Emphasis will be placed on client approach, preparation of documents, fee structure, transfer and mortgaging of Equities, power of attorney, sub-Right to Purchase, Strata Title, transfers foreclosures discharges. L E G A L STUDIES 158 — BASIC LITIGATION II (S) (1.5,0,1.5) (S) (1.5,0,1.5) L E G A L STUDIES 160 — MORTGAGES Pre-requisite: Legal Studies 154 The course will illustrate and teach procedures in obtaining letters probate and letters of administration from the Supreme Court of British Columbia. Principles, practice and documentation will enable a legal assistant to probate a simple estate after the lawyer has interviewed the executor. The course will also include general principles of a simulated estate fact patent. Lab fee: $5.00 L E G A L STUDIES 159 — ACCOUNTING ASSISTANT (F,S) (3,0,1) LITIGATION PROCEDURES (F,S) L E G A L STUDIES 171 — (1.5,0,5) LEGISLATIVE P R O C E S S II (S) Continuation of Legal Studies 161. Lab fee: $5.00 P R O C E S S I (F) L E G A L STUDIES 172 — L E G A L DOCUMENTS (F,S) (3,0,1) The aim of this course is to enable students to write and to read legal documents with some fluency. C o u r s e work includes the drafting of agreements; methods for the rapid reading of legislation and solicitors' and stationers' documents; the drafting of claims and defences in litigation proceedings; and a study of the rules of statutory interpretation. Emphasis will be placed on developing a general style, rather than obtaining a detailed knowledge of the specific law. Lab fee: $5.00 A study of the electoral process in relation to the formation of federal and provincial statutes. Analysis of the relationship between legislative, administrative tribunals and the courts, the nature and limits of executive, legislative and judicial power, articulation of government policy in statutory form, translation of public policy into legislation and legal problems in implementing legislated policy. Lab fee: $5 00 82 LEGAL STUDIES 176 — L E G A L OFFICE PROCEDURES I (F,S) (3,0,1) A course to prepare secretarial and stenographic students tor positions in legal offices. Instruction in timekeeping and accounting systems; acceptance and filing of court documents; forms and styles of legal correspondence; transcripts; briefs; law library indexing; ethical responsibifities; legal terminology. Lab f e e : $ 5 . 0 0 LEGAL STUDIES 177 — (F,S) (3,0,1) LEGAL STUDIES 253 — COMPANY LAW (F,S) (3,0,1) The law relating to corporations and partnerships in Canada; historical formation, structure and reorganization of a corporation; authority and fiduciary obligation of management; legal characteristics, rights and duties of officers, directors, and shareholders. L a b fee: $5.00 LEGAL STUDIES 254 — MUNICIPAL LAW (F,S) (3,0,1) A functional study of the legislative and administrative process of local government; the power of municipal by-laws and their validity; municipal taxation; planning, zoning, land use and development. Lab fee: $5.00 L E G A L OFFICE PROCEDURES II How to make a legal office run more efficiently; an examination of office machines, printed forms and human resources available in small and large law firms; an examination of bookkeeping and accounting systems for a law office inluding trust accounts, filing and communications systems; use of office equipment and relating costs of machinery and services; special stationery. LEGAL STUDIES 255 — REAL PROPERTY (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of the law relating to the sale and purchase of real property with emphasis on remedies available for breach of contract; law and mortgages; law respecting landlord-tenant relationships; health and housing codes. Lab fee: $5.00 NOTE: Students who have not taken Legal Studies 176 at the College but who do have legal office experience can challenge the pre-requisite by either preparing assignments or writing an examination. Lab fee: $5.00 LEGAL STUDIES 256 — FAMILY LAW (F,S) (3,0,1) Law and the family; marriage and its dissolution; rights and duties of spouses and parents; the law in respect to child care; custody, assess, guardianship, adoption; the role of family court; juvenile courts and human resource agencies.Lab fee: $5.00 L E G A L STUDIES 179 — THE ROLE O F THE L E G A L ASSISTANT IN THE L E G A L P R O C E S S (S) (3,0,1) This course will comprise guest lectures on various aspects of the role of the legal assistant; ethics; responsibilities of legal assistants. Students will gain practice in dealing with clients in relation to the type of information required to accomplish a specific task. Simulated interviews will be conducted by students. Lab fee: $5.00 L E G A L STUDIES 257 — E S T A T E PLANNING (F,S) (3,0,1) The law of wills, S u c c e s s i o n Duty Act, intestate succession, principles of probate and administration of estates, consideration of income tax regulations. L a b fee: $5.00 LEGAL STUDIES 258 — (3,0,1) L E G A L STUDIES 180 — CONTRACTS I (formerly Bus 170) (F,S) (3,0,1) CRIMINAL PROCEDURES (F.S) An examination of the criminal Code, theory of criminal responsibility; legal elements of a crime; criminal procedure; the law respecting the u s e of force, rules of evidence, confession; identification procedures and sentencing. This course will receive 3 general elective credits at S.F.U. Lab fee: $5.00 This course will e m p h a s i z e the application of legal principles to business relationships through the study of Court decisions (case law) and respective legislation. The areas of study to be particularly covered are the Law of Contract. Law of Commercial Transactions and Sale of G o o d s Act, Secured Transactions and the Bill of Sales Act, Conditional Sales Act, Creditors Remedies and the Execution Act. Lab fee: $5.00 LEGAL STUDIES 266 — FAMILY LAW II (F,S) (3,0,1) Continuation of Legal Studies 256. Lab fee: $5.00 LEGAL STUDIES 181 — CONTRACTS II (F,S) (3,0,1) The purpose of this course is to make the student well versed in various branches of business law. It is hoped the student will be able to expand his or her knowledge from Legal Studies 180 to acquire greater depth and more sophistication in the field and also to learn other aspects of business law not covered in the previous course. Topics to be covered are: Special types of contracts; Credit transactions; Bankruptcy; Negotiable instruments and an overview of company law. Lab fee: $5.00 LEGAL STUDIES 268 — CRIMINAL LAW (F,S) (3,0,1) Substantial elements of selected criminal offenses and consideration of the rules of evidence. Particular subjects include the nature of real and circumstantial evidence, burden of proof, hearsay, confession and admission, competence, comellability and witnesses. This course will receive 3 general elective credits from S.F.U. Labfee:$5.00 LEGAL STUDIES 250 — LAW IN SOCIETY (F,S) (3,0,1) (formerly Commerce 279) LEGAL STUDIES 269 — HUMAN RIGHTS II (F,S) (3,0,1) An extensive study of Human Rights Legislation and practice in Canada. The acts will be examined as well as the operation of the Commissions. Also the work and role of a human rights officer will be studied. Students will learn how to investigate a case, to determine its validity, and to proceed with an action. Public education, specific interest groups, and organizations, as well as the expanding field of Civil Liberties Law will be explored. L a b fee: $5.00 This course will examine how the law has affected certain groups in our society, our lives, and the world in which we live. The course is a seminar and deals with important and topical issues related to the law. Other areas that will be examined: Law and Ecology, Law and Media, Law and Computers, Law and the Native People of B.C. L a b fee: $5.00 L E G A L STUDIES 252 — TORTS (F,S) (3,0,1) An introductory study of "torts": the protection of personal interest from interference and the way in which the courts meet this need in a changing society. Principal topics to be studied are: intentional torts, negligence, strict liability, defamation and nuisance, concepts of standard of care, causality, duty and remoteness. Students will be required to pre-read cases for discussion in class. Lab fee: $5.00 LEGAL STUDIES 270 — LABOUR LAW (F,S) (3,0,1) Union-Management relations; the collective bargaining process; arbitration and conciliation procedures. The course will include detailed consideration of the B.C. Labour C o d e and a study of decisions of the B.C. Labour Relations Board. Lab fee: $5.00 83 MATHEMATICS 099 — (3,1.5,1) Mathematics PRACTICAL MATHEMATICS (F,S) Comprehensive review and drill in fundamentals of arithmetic and algebra in relation to business usage, fractions; percentages, ratios; commission; foreign exchange, metric system, trade and cash discounts, statistical tools, graphs. For Career students in A.S.O.T. only. MATHEMATICS 100 — INTRODUCTION MATHEMATICS (F,S) (3,0,1) TO C O L L E G E Pre-requisite: Mathematics 11 A study of set theory; vectors and matrices, linear programming; probability, optimization techniques. MATHEMATICS 101 — (F,S) (3,0,1) INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICS Pre-requisite: Mathematics 11 or written consent of Instructor. An introduction to the language of statistics and some statistical methods, including random variables and their distribution; random sampling; normal distribution theory; estimation of parameters and testing hypotheses. The Mathematics Department offers courses primarily aimed at the first and second year university level. Entering students should use the following two paragraphs, Part A and B, as guidelines for selecting mathematics courses at the first year level. Due to the specialized needs of some programs at the universities the Mathematics Department advises students to consult the university calendar and to seek guidance from a College Counsellor or Mathematics Instructor for the a p propriate course selection. A: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) B. MATHEMATICS 102 — STATISTICAL METHODS (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Mathematics 101 A study of important statistical methods commonly used in the analysis of research data, including: t-tests and their nonparametric competitors, one and two-way analysis of variance, chi-square tests and regression analysis. S T U D E N T S P L A N N I N G TO P R O C E E D IN S C I E N C E , MATHEMATICS, ARCHITECTURE, ECONOMICS, ENGINEERING A N D FORESTRY. These students normally take Mathematics 112, 113 and 114 during their first year. Comments: Mathematics 114 is not required for transfer to S.F.U. but is recommended. Mathematics 114 can normally be taken in an overload situation as a sixth course in the Fall or Spring term. Mathematics 105 is a pre-calculus course designed to prepare students to enter the calculus sequence. It is not transferable to U.B.C. but does receive transfer credit for S.F.U.'s Math 100. Mathematics 101, 102 are recommended by some science departments at S.F.U. Science students should consider taking Mathematics 220 as an elective in their first year. The comments included in many course descriptions regarding duplicate credit are due to the fact that most courses have been renumbered over the past two years S T U D E N T S P L A N N I N G TO P R O C E E D IN ARTS OR C O M MERCE PROGRAMS Student planning to pursue a program in the Faculty of Arts, who wish to satisfy a one-year science course elective, normally take one of the following packages: Mathematics 101 and 100 Mathematics 101 and 102 Mathematics 101 and 220 Mathematics 100 and 220 Students planning to pursue a program in the Faculty of Commerce normally take: a) for transfer to U . B . C , one of the following packages: Mathematics 101 and 100, or Mathematics 101 and 102 b) for transfer to S.F.U., one of the following courses: Mathematics 100, or Mathematics 105. MATHEMATICS (F,S) (3,0,1) 105 — P R E - C A L C U L U S MATHEMATICS NOTE: This course is not transferable to U.B.C. Pre-requisite: Some experience with mathematics at the grade 12 level, such as Mathematics 91 or a term's work in Mathematics 12, or the written approval of the Co-ordinator. A review of algebra and a discussion of functions, graphs and trigonometry Primarily for students who anticipate taking calculus courses or who wish to take an introductory course in physics but are weak in mathematics. Students will not receive credit for Math 105 and 030. MATHEMATICS 112 — C A L C U L U S I (F,S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Mathematics Mathematics 030. 12 or Mathematics 105 or A course for students who plan to proceed in mathematics, the physical sciences, the life sciences, or some discipline which requires optimization techniques. A brief review of required analytic geometry; the derivative, techniques of differentiation, applications of the derivative to M A X - M I N and related rate problems. Students will not receive credit for both Mathematics 112 and 130. MATHEMATICS 113 — C A L C U L U S II (F,S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Mathematics 112 or Mathematics 130 A study of the anti-derivative; the integral; techniques of integration and applications of the integral. Students will not receive credit for both Mathematics 113 and 131. MATHEMATICS 114 — V E C T O R S AND S E L E C T E D TOPICS (F,S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Mathematics Mathematics 030. 12, M a t h e m a t i c s 1 0 5 or An examination of systems of linear equations, vectors in two and three dimensions; complex numbers, Taylor's series. Students will not receive credit for both Mathematics 114 and 140. THE M A T H E M A T I C S D E P A R T M E N T O F F E R S A FULL S E C O N D Y E A R UNIVERSITY T R A N S F E R P R O G R A M IN MATHEMATICS. (In addition, Mathematics 101 is advised.) The Mathematics Department advises students to begin a two-course sequence with Math 101 since this provides the option of Mathematics 100, 102 or 220 the following term. S T U D E N T S P L A N N I N G TO T A K E 2 0 0 L E V E L M A T H E M A T I C S S H O U L D S E E K A D V I C E F R O M M A T H E M A T I C S INSTRUCTORS. 84 MATHEMATICS 200 — LINEAR ALGEBRA (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Mathematics 114 or Mathematics 140 or written permission of the Instructor. A study of vector spaces, linear transformation, determinants, eigenvalues, quadratic forms. matrices, MATHEMATICS 201 — A B S T R A C T ALGEBRA (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Two semesters of mathematics courses other than Mathematics 100, 101, 102 and 105. A n introduction of groups, rings, fields, complex numbers, polynomials, the fundamental theorem of algebra. Not offered in 1977/78. MATHEMATICS 215 — INTRODUCTION T O ANATYSIS I (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: At least a B average in Mathematics (112 and 113) or (130 and 131). A course for students who plan to proceed in mathematics. Logic, sets, functions, limits or sequences and series; introduction to continuity. Students will not receive credit for any two of the following: Mathematics 115, Mathematics 132, Mathematics 215. MATHEMATICS 220 — INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER PROGRAMMING (F,S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Any first year Mathematics course which may be taken concurrently. A n introduction to BASIC programming for simple scientific calculations, as well as various data processing problems in statistics and accounting to provide a general understanding of computers and specific experience in writing and executing some simple programs. MATHEMATICS 221 SCIENCE (S) (3,0,1) — ELEMENTS OF COMPUTER Pre-requisite: Mathematics 2 2 0 A study of computer organizations, machine, assembler and programming languages; algorithms; applications to numerical and non-numerical problems. Not offered in 1977/78. MATHEMATICS 230 — C A L C U L U S III (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Mathematics 113 and 114 (or Mathematics 130 and 140) with at least a " C " grade in each. Mathematics 2 0 0 should be taken concurrently, if not already completed. MEDIA 050 — DOCUMENTARY FILM APPLICATIONS (F,S) (1,0,.5) (OPEN) Analytic geometry of three dimensions; partial differentiation, applications; double and triple integration; transformations to various co-ordinate systems. Documentary Films, their applications and utilization will be explored in this course. This film course is designed for people working in Adult Education and who wish to make more use of film as an educational tool. Lab fee: $5.00 MATHEMATICS 231 — C A L C U L U S IV (S) (3,0,1) MEDIA 051 — Pre-requisite: Mathematics 230 Line and surface integrals; Green's Theorem; vector fields; divergence theorem; Stoke's Theorem; applications. MATHEMATICS (3,0,1) 232 — INTRODUCTION TO ANALYSIS Pre-requisite: Mathematics 2 1 5 or Mathematics Mathematics 132 with at least a " C " grade. II 115 or Continuity, differentiation, integration, mean value theorem, fundamental theorem of calculus, boundedness, power series. Not offered in 1977/78. MATHEMATICS 235 — INTRODUCTION TO DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Mathematics 230 and Mathematics 200 with at least a " C " grade in each. An introduction to ordinary differential equations; first order equations; second order linear equations; first order linear systems; phase plane; applications to physics, geometry and electrical circuits. VIDEO STUDIES (F,S) (1,0,.5) (OPEN) A n introduction to the role of video in a variety of community situations. Students will study the effect of TV on our society and look at other uses for video in affecting change. Lab fee: $5.00 MEDIA 052 — SMALL FORMAT (1,0,.5) (OPEN) MEDIA STUDIES (F,S) The uses of small format educational media will be explored in this course. Filmstrips, slide tape, still photography and other media will be d i s c u s s e d and analysed. L a b fee: $5.00 MEDIA 053 — FILM STUDIES (F) (3,0,1) (OPEN) A study of contemporary and historical films. The lectures, discussions, and assignments will be based on films shown in the class and on selected readings in film history, criticism, dnd history. This course is for students not enrolled full time in the Media Resources Program Lab fee: $10 00 MEDIA 059 — AUDIO APPLICATIONS (F,S) (1,0,.5) (OPEN) A course designed for people who wish to make more effective use of their tape recorders and who wish to learn simppie editing prccedures. Lab fee: T B A MEDIA 060 — GRAPHIC APPLICATIONS (OPEN) (F,S,SU) (1,0,-5) MEDIA 153 — MEDIA 061 — SLIDE — TAPE PRODUCTIONS (1,0,-5) (OPEN) (F,S,SU), A course designed for people wishing to improve their present skill in slide tape productions. Students will produce a slide tape using their own slides and sound tracks. MEDIA 154 — MEDIA APPLICATIONS An introduction for beginning photographers. The course will cover such topics as exposure, depth of field, treatment of motion, c h o i c e of l e n s e s , basic lighting, creativity in photography, and purchasing of equipment. Participants to supply their own cameras and supplies. This course is for students not enrolled full time in the Media Resources Program. MEDIA 155 — MEDIA 161 — TECHNICAL APPLICATIONS U S A G E (S) I (F) (3,0,1) A beginning course to familiarize students with the capabilities and limitations of equipment. Practical experience in care, maintenance and simple repairs of still cameras, projectors, and other basic equipment. MEDIA 163 — TECHNICAL APPLICATIONS II (S) (3,0,1) Capabilities and limitations of audio, slide tape, film animation, and video portapack systems. Practical experience in care and maintenance of these systems. MEDIA 064 — FILM U S A G E (3,0,1) (OPEN) A course in film making for amateur film makers. The class will cover film aesthetics and techniques for beginners. Topics to include camera work, editing, titling, use of sound, and choice of equipment. Students to use their own equipment and supplies. This course is for students not enrolled full time in the Media Resources Program. MEDIA 171 — SMALL FORMAT TELEVISION (S) (3,0,1) Introduction in television production. The course will center on uses of the half-inch portable "rover" system. Lab fee: $25.00 MEDIA 183 — THEORY AND APPLICATIONS PHOTOGRAPHIC PRODUCTION (F) (6,3,2) MEDIA 072 — BASIC PHOTOGRAPHY (SU) (3,3,1) (OPEN) A practical and lecture course in beginning photography. Similar to M e d i a 183, this course is for students not enrolled full time in the M e d i a Resources Program. Lab fee: $25.00 ADVANCED PHOTOGRAPHY MEDIA APPLICATIONS II (S) (3,0,1) Intermediate course in the educational and social uses of media. Introduction to theories of learning, communication systems, and educational applications. A c o u r s e in a d v a n c e d photography for e x p e r i e n c e d photographers. In a given term the class might centre on free lance photography, creative photography, photojournalism, or other advanced topics. Students to u s e their own equipment. This course is for students not enrolled full time in the M e d i a Resources Program. MEDIA 073 — (OPEN) I (F) (6,0,2) An introduction to the educational and social uses of media. E m p h a s i s will be on projects involving b a s i c media; photography, graphics, transparencies, etc. MEDIA 062 — PHOTOGRAPHIC U S A G E (S) (3,0,1) (OPEN) MEDIA 063 — ADVANCED PHOTOGRAPHIC (3,0,1) (OPEN) FILM ANIMATION (S) (3,0,1) A n introduction to film animation techniques using Super 8 film, basic motion picture camera and studio lighting techniques in lectures, demonstrations and workshop exercises, including a wide range of film animation media; drawing on film; bleaching; table top animation; cutouts; camera animation of graphics and photographs; titling and basic animation cell techniques. Lab fee: $20 00 The u s e of graphics as it applies to media production. Lettering, silkscreening and other forms of graphics will be studied as they apply to media such as film, TV, slide tape, overhead transparencies. L a b fee: T B A OF A beginning course in photographic theory and practice, examining basic principles of camera operation; exposure; developing and printing. Lab fee: $25.00 (SU) (3,3,1) MEDIA 185 — ADVANCED PHOTOGRAPHY (S) (3,3,1) A practical and lecture course in advanced photography. Similar to M e d i a 185, this course is for students not enrolled full time in the Media Resources Program. Lab fee: $25.00 The application of photographic techniques, with emphasis on combining shot s e q u e n c e s to tell a story, as well as editing, layout and presentation. Lab fee: $25.00 MEDIA 074 — MEDIA 187 — AUDIO PRODUCTION (S) (6,0,2) An introduction to basic production techniques for educational materials including information-sending documentaries, dramasatire, dramatization and special learning formats, interviewing, scripting, editing and mixing; basic technical aspects of audio equipment and performance specifications as well as special uses of audio materials, such as language labs, directed study and information retrieval systems. Lab fee: $15.00 BASIC FILM MAKING (SU) (3,3,1) (OPEN) A practical and lecture course in film making, similar to Media 253. This course is for students not enrolled full time in the M e d i a Resources Program. L a b fee: $30.00 MEDIA 081 — BASIC AUDIO PRODUCTION (OPEN) (SU) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the basics of audio production techniques for students not enrolled in the Media Resources Program. Lab fee: $15.00 MEDIA 189 — RESEARCH METHODS SPECIALIST (S) (3,0,1) MEDIA 151 — GRAPHICS FOR MULTIMEDIA PRODUCTIONS (S) (3,0,1) FOR T H E MEDIA Research and background techniques for media productions. The role of the media specialist in consultation with clients and content experts in interviewing, and in utilizing libraries, newspapers, and other sources of material. Lab fee: $ 3 0 . 0 0 ' A course in audio-visual graphics to produce graphics a p propriate for u s e in slide-tape shows, animated films, etc. Lab fee: $15.00 MEDIA 152 — GRAPHICS FOR THE MEDIA SPECIALIST (F) (3,0,1) MEDIA 253 — An introduction to the equipment and techniques used by the graphic designer in media productions. Most of the course is d e v o t e d to studio a s s i g n m e n t s , involving lay-out a n d typography, photography, s i l k s c r e e n and overhead transparencies and their application to media production.Lab fee: $15.00 An introduction to basic motion picture production; camera, film stock, lighting; exposure controls; lenses and perspectives; camera movement, pictorial and directional continuity; editing, titling, scripting, with emphasis upon film as a graphic medium. A production course emphasizing continuity, dramatic and educational films, utilizing, Super 8 equipment. 86 FILM MAKING (F) (6,3,2) MEDIA 254 — MEDIA APPLICATIONS III (F) (3,3,1) Further work in uses and applications of media in a field setting. The role of the Resource Center in an institution. Music MEDIA 256 — LEARNING R E S O U R C E S CENTRE (S) (3,3,1) A course in which the student will produce a plan of an audiovisual resource in relation to the developing concept of total learning resources services. MEDIA 260 — AUDIO VISUAL GRAPHICS (F) (3,0,1) A basic course in the principles of graphic information and preparation of graphic materials for classroom instructional purposes, film or television productions, including workshop assignments with colourtone techniques; photographic paste-up and reduction techniques; the production of diagrams; basic display and flow charts. Lab fee: $15.00 MEDIA 261 — TECHNICAL APPLICATIONS III (F) (3,0,1) Capabilities and limitations of television and film systems. Practical experience in use, care and maintenance of those systems. MEDIA 263 — TECHNICAL APPLICATIONS IV (S) (3,0,1) Designing of systems for media production and delivery. Includes budgeting and purchasing of equipment systems, accommodation of systems, designing to institutional needs and resources, and interfacing of different types of systems. MEDIA 271 — EDUCATIONAL TELEVISION SYSTEMS (F) (6,0,2) A production course in medium format television, including portable 1/2" and 1" videotape equipment; single-camera productions, documentaries, and full studio productions. Training includes camera work, directing and switching, lighting, editing, graphics, telecine. Lab fee: $30.00 MEDIA 287 — AUDIO FOR FILM AND TELEVISION (F) (3,0,1) Theoretical Studies Techniques of audio recording, editing and dubbing in film and television production. MEDIA 301 — (3,6,1) SPECIALIZED MUSIC 010 — THEORY I (F) (3,1,1) A course designed to teach music rudiments including: the staff, the clefs, notes and rests, major and minor scales, intervals and chords. Ear training will include recognition of all intervals — melodically and harmonically, major, minor, augmented and diminished triads. Sight singing will encompass examples in duple and triple metre in major and minor keys using stepwise and disjunct melodic motion. INSTRUCTIONAL AIDS (S) Pre-requisite: Completion of the specialty courses in the first year of the M e d i a Resources Program. A n advanced course in the planning and preparation of special graphic and instructional aids for classroom, film and t.v. productions, as well as the study of production techniques, colourtone production and other display media. A field practicum course involving one or more major assignments. MUSIC 011 — THEORY II (S) (3,1,1) A continuation of Music 010. MUSIC 256 — THEORY III (F) (3,2,1) A course designed to e m p h a s i z e sight singing and ear training. A study of music of the mediaeval age (ca. 900 to ca. 1400) Gregorian chant to 3-part writing, notation, rhythmic modes, church modes, cadential formulas. MEDIA 302 — INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA PRODUCTIONS (S) (3,6,1) Pre-requisite: Completion of specialty courses in the first year of the M e d i a Resources Program. A n advanced course in media productions, including audio, slide, tape, film, v.t.r. and e.t.v. as these relate to educational and training needs, with production styles for specific needs and audiences. A field practicum course involving one or more assignments. MUSIC 257 — THEORY IV (S) (3,2,1) An intensification of ear training and sight singing techniques. A study of the music of the Renaissance (ca. 1400 to ca. 1600). Sixteenth century counterpoint, the development of tonality, a survey of the work of the theorists. Attention will also be paid to analysis and composition. MEDIA 303 — THE MEDIA SPECIALIST IN EDUCATION AND TRAINING (S) (3,6,1) MUSIC 100 — Pre-requisite: Completion of specialty courses in the first year of the M e d i a Resources Program. THEORY V (F) (3,2,1) A study of music from ca. 1600 to ca. 1800. A study of harmony: triads, non-harmonic materials, dominant seventh and derivatives, secondary dominants, simple modulation. Elementary forms, analysis of 17th and 18th century literature. Sight singing, melodic, rhythmic, and harmonic dictation. Keyboard harmony: playing of cadence types, modulation to closely related keys, realization of elementary figured bass. A course concerned with the uses of media for motivation, triggers, information transmission, emotive learning and selfawareness; the relationship of the M e d i a Specialist to education in general, with emphasis on the tasks confronting him. A field practicum course involving one or more major assignments. 87 MUSIC 101 — MUSIC 190 — HISTORY III (F) (3,0,1) THEORY VI (S) (3,2,1) A study of music from ca. 1800 to the dissolution of tonality. Chromatic harmony and an introduction to 20th century techniques. Extended forms and analysis of 19th and early 20th century literature. Keyboard harmony: improvisation, figured bass in baroque style. Sight singing and dictation. MUSIC 200 — THEORY VII (F) (3,0,1) A study of music history from Monteverdi to Beethoven. MUSIC 191 — HISTORY IV (S) (3,0,1) A study of music from Beethoven to the present. MUSIC 192 — HISTORY OF J A Z Z (F) (3,0,1) A survey of jazz through styles and stylists from its roots in This course will offer a study of the various uses of chromaticism, pedal point, and parallelism in tonal harmony. It will begin a study of traditional forms and continue with aural training started in Theory IV and V, concentrating on melodic and rhythmic dictation, sight-singing, and chord recognition. MUSIC 201 — THEORY VIII (S) (3,0,1) This course will continue with the study of form and ear training. It will also introduce the student to harmonic counterpoint, modal writing, " b l u e s " harmony, and advanced techniques for chord voicing. MUSIC 158 — ORCHESTRATION (S) (3,1,1,) A course in the basics of orchestration intended to give the student a working knowledge of the orchestral instruments and some electronic devices used in commercial music. Africa to the present. Applied Studies CLASS INSTRUMENTS MUSIC 262 — C L A S S WOODWINDS (F) (3,2,1) A practical study of the violin family. MUSIC 263 — C L A S S WOODWINDS (S) (3,2,1) A continuation of Music 262 MUSIC 180 — PIANO C L A S S (F,S) (1.5,2,.5) Group piano lessons for music majors. MUSIC 270 — ARRANGING I (F) (3,0,3) This course will survey various basic arranging techniques. A thorough study will be undertaken of sectional writing from two part through the concerted big band — melodic and rhythmic variation — 2 horn section writing — 3 horn section writing — block harmony — open voicings — adding tensions to block harmony — approach techniques — tension resolve — independent bass instrument MUSIC 271 — ARRANGING II (S) (3,0,2) This course will offer study of advanced arranging techniques. It will include introductions a n d modulations, endings and background writing, and a methodical application of these to various styles of rock, jazz and popular music. — background writing — five part harmony — dominant harmonization of a line — practical application of theoretical work with voicing in fourths, modal writing, and chord voicing. — writing in specific styles — introductions, endings, modulations MUSIC 181 — PIANO C L A S S (F,S) (1.5,2,.5) A continuation of M u s i c 180. MUSIC 280 — PIANO C L A S S (F) (1.5,2,.5) A continuation of Music 181. MUSIC 281 — PIANO C L A S S (F) (1.5,2,.5) A continuation of M u s i c 280. ENSEMBLES M u s i c 150, 151, 252, 2 5 3 all have 3 sections. Section 1 is choir, section 2 is orchestra, section 3 is stage band. All ensembles will perform publicly. MUSIC 150 — ENSEMBLE (F,S) (3,1,1) Group performance experience. MUSIC 151 — ENSEMBLE (F,S) (3,1,1) A continuation of M u s i c 150. MUSIC 252 — ENSEMBLE (F,S) (3,1,1) A continuation of M u s i c 151. MUSIC 253 — ENSEMBLE (F.S) (3,1,1) A continuation of Music 252. Individual Studies Historical Studies MUSIC 164 — PRIVATE MUSIC INSTRUCTION (F,S) (1.5,0,.5) MUSIC 110 — MUSIC APPRECIATION (F) (3,1,1) A study of western music through a penetrating look at various parameters. Rhythm, metre, and tempo: pitch; tone colour; dynamics, attach and decay; texture. Special attention will be paid to student creations using various parameters. MUSIC 111 — MUSIC APPRECIATION (S) (3,1,1) A continuation of M u s i c 110. MUSIC 120 — HISTORY I (F) (3,0,1) A study of music history from the time of ancient G r e e c e to Dufay. MUSIC 121 — HISTORY II (S) (3,0,1) A study of music history from Dufay to Monteverdi. A course primarily designed to permit the student to pursue in-depth study of his/her own music specialty from qualified music instructors in the community. Students will be expected to show progress at the beginning and the end of the term for the Capilano College M u s i c Faculty in order to assist the evaluation by music faculty in conjunction with the private music teacher. The course consists of ten half-hour lessons. Note: This course is available to those students enrolled in 15 credit hours of music curriculum. Those students with less than 15 credit hours of music curriculum and who desire credit for M u s i c 164 must consult the M u s i c Co-ordinator prior to registration. MUSIC 165 — PRIVATE MUSIC INSTRUCTION (F,S) (1.5,0,.5) A continuation of Music 164. MUSIC 264 — PRIVATE MUSIC INSTRUCTION (F,S) (1.5,0,.5) MUSIC 240 — MUSIC THERAPY TECHNIQUES (F) (3,0,0) A continuation of Music 165. This course will provide experience and analysis of music therapy techniques appropriate to a range of clinical settings. The analysis will develop the exposure to basic therapeutic models in M u s i c 141. Students will be observing techniques used by the instructor and by each other in the class setting. MUSIC 265 — PRIVATE MUSIC INSTRUCTION (F,S) (1.5,0,-5) A continuation of Music 264. MUSIC 196 — PRIVATE MUSIC INSTRUCTION — S E C O N DARY INSTRUMENT (F,S) (1.5) MUSIC 241 — PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT (S) (3,0,0) This course consists of ten half-hour lessons on the student's secondary instrument when that instrument is not piano. Students will study with qualified music instructors in the community and will be expected to show progress at the end of the term for the Capilano College Music Faculty. Note: Students are responsible for payment of the private music teacher for this course. This course will develop the professional skills of observing, recording, and reporting music therapy activities. It will also examine the possible relationships of a music therapist to staff organization in existing treatment centres and to local resources in the community. MUSIC 365 — DESIGNING MUSIC THERAPY ACTIVITIES (S) (1-5) MUSIC 197 — PRIVATE MUSIC INSTRUCTION — S E C O N DARY INSTRUMENT (F.S) (1.5) A continuation of M u s i c 196. MUSIC 296 — PRIVATE MUSIC INSTRUCTION SECONDARY INSTRUMENT (F,S) (1.5) In designing music therapy activities, the students will learn to identify the nature of specific groups and their individual members; to choose suitable challenges, structure and materials, and the degree of therapist intervention; and then to observe and analyze group responses, to evaluate both the design and execution of their activities, and to identify corrections and indications for subsequent activities. — A continuation of M u s i c 197 MUSIC 297 — PRIVATE MUSIC INSTRUCTION — S E C O N DARY INSTRUMENT (F.S) (1.5) MUSIC 360 — PRACTICUM I (F) (3,0,2) A continuation of M u s i c 296. This is the first of a four part practicum sequence. During the first part of the term the student will observe different settings at various institutions in the community. The student shall then gradually assume responsibility in one of the institutions. Weekly seminars shall be held during the term. MUSIC 176 — IMPROVISATION (F) (1.5,0,-5) A course designed to teach the basics of jazz improvisation through the study of chord scales and their application in harmonic progression. Practical experience in a small group situation. MUSIC 361 — PRACTICUM II (S) (6,0,2) MUSIC 177 — IMPROVISATION (F,S) (1.5,0,-5) The student participates as a student therapist in one centre. 80 hours. Weekly seminars throughout the term. A continuation of M u s i c 176. MUSIC 178 — REPERTOIRE (F,S) (3,0,1) MUSIC 362 — PRACTICUM III (F) (6,0,2) This is a flexible course open to students in the commercial program who wish to gain experience in rehearsal techniques and performance. Students will rehearse under supervision as vocalists or instrumentalists, individually or in small groups. The course requirements include about four hours of rehearsal per week plus a given number of public performances. The student participates as a student therapist in one centre. 80 hours. Weekly seminars throughout the term. MUSIC 363 — PRACTICUM IV (S) (6,0,2) The student participates as a student therapist in one centre. 80 hours. Weekly seminars throughout the term. MUSIC 179 — REPERTOIRE (F,S) (3,0,1) A continuation of M u s i c 178. MUSIC 102 — INTERPERSONAL THERAPISTS (F) (1.5) SKILLS FOR MUSIC This course will acquaint students with several skill areas which are relevant to Music Therapy, particularly communication skills and observation skills. Communication skills will include behaviour description, preception checking, paraphrasing and description of feeling. Observation skills will include group interaction, interviewing and small group exercises. Both theory and practice will be included. Music Therapy Courses MUSIC 242 — MUSIC THROUGH THE CREATIVE ARTS (F) (15) This course will acquaint students with creative arts which can be used therapeutically in conjunction with music; for example: psychodrama, dance, visual art, art and poetry. The course will be experiential. Discussions will explore possible goals and extensions of the activities presented in class. MUSIC 140 — MUSIC THERAPY I (F) (3,0,0) This course will study the development of music as therapy and its relationships to psychotherapy, art therapy, play therapy, psychodrama, and music education. Students will study the science from the time of Pythagorus to contemporary investigations of Stainer, Orff, Kodaly, and Nordoff-Robbins. MUSIC 364 — CLINICAL ORIENTATION MUSIC 141 — MUSIC THERAPY II (S) (3,0,0) This course will provide the student with practical skills and knowledge of the physical aspects of therapy required to function effectively in a variety of hospital and clinical settings. Course content will include basic knowledge in anatomy and physiology related to specific handicaps; acquaintance with basic terms commonly in u s e in psychiatric and medical facilities; and a review of drugs and their effects. This course will attempt to create new techniques for every unique setting, thus exploring adaptability and creativity in therapy. Students will be encouraged to extend their awareness of the range of music and their sense of style. The course will analyse the effective impact of music. Students will log impressions for future use. 89 Physics Philosophy All first-year Physics courses include bi-weekly laboratory periods. There are lab fees for laboratory courses. 1 AH of the Philosophy courses offered at Capilano C o l l e g e have transfer credit at every university in British Columbia. Prospective philosophy majors should consult the faculty. PHILOSOPHY 101 — INTRODUCTORY PHILOSOPHY Pre-requisite: No Physics pre-requisite. Mathematics 12, Mathematics 100 or Mathematics 105 is required. This course, together with Physics 105, will serve as an introduction to physics for students with little or no background in the subject. They are intended for students not taking further studies in science. Physics 104 is also a preparatory course for Physics 110. Topics include mechanics, energy, ray optics and heat. (F) (3,0,1) A n investigation of political a n d moral p h i l o s o p h y , metaphysics, and epistemology, with emphasis on the relationship between law and morality; civil disobedience; the right to revolt; reason and p a s s i o n ; existentialism; C o m m u n i s m ; feminism; doubt and certainty; perception and illusion; the nature of reality. The emphasis of this course may vary from instructor to instructor, and it is suggested that prospective students consult the outlines of different instructors' courses when registering. PHILOSOPHY 102 — INTRODUCTORY PHILOSOPHY PHYSICS 105 — PRINCIPLES O F PHYSICS II (S) (3,1.5,1) Pre-requisite: Physics 104 or 110. A continuation of Physics 104, e m p h a s i z i n g electricity, magnetism, gravitation, relativity, light, quantum theory, and nuclear physics. (S) PHYSICS 110 — GENERAL PHYSICS I (F,S) (3,1.5,1) (3,0,1) A continuation of Philosophy 101. Note: There is no pre-requisite for this course (one does not need completed credit in Philosophy 101 to take it). Students entering the College are welcome to begin their introduction to philosophy with this course. PHILOSOPHY 200 — POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY (F) Pre-requisite: Physics 12, Physics 11, or Physics 104; and Mathematics 12 or 105; Mathematics130or Mathematics 112 is a pre- or co-requisite. A survey of mechanics covering vectors, statics, kinematics, dynamics, energy, momentum, rotation, gravitation, vibration and special relativity. Not offered in Spring 1978. (3,0,1) A problem and concept oriented course which s e e k s to provide an analysis of the rationale for political institutions and actions This is not a study in the history of political thought, and every effort is made to view problems from contemporary perspectives. N o pre-requisite. PHYSICS 111 — GENERAL PHYSICS II (F,S) (3,1.5,1) Pre-requisite: Physics 110 and Mathematics 112. Mathematics 113 is a pre- or co-requisite. Electric and magnetic fields, circuits, wave optics, and atomic and nuclear physics. Not offered in Fall 1977. PHILOSOPHY 201 — POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY (S) (3,0,1) A continuation of. Philosophy 200. PHYSICS 200 — HEAT, KINETIC THEORY AND OPTICS (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Physics 111 and Mathematics 113 and 114. Mathematics 230 and 2 0 0 must be taken concurrently, if not already completed. Physics 2 1 0 must be taken concurrently. Heat, temperature, the first and second laws of thermodynamics, kinetic theory, and physical optics. This course, together with Physics 201, 210 and 211, is required for students majoring in physics or chemistry. PHILOSOPHY 210 — METAPHYSICS AND EPISTEMOLOGY (F) (3,0,1) An introduction to some of the traditional problems of metaphysics and epistemology. Some of the questions considered are: Does free will exist? Is sense perception a primary or reliable source of k n o w l e d g e What is the nature of causality Is materialism t r u e What is the nature of mind? What is the relationship between mind and body? What is the scientific m e t h o d While this is not an historically oriented course, it will cover some of the classical attempts to answer these questions. 7 PHYSICS 104 — PRINCIPLES OF PHYSICS I (F) (3,1.5,1) 7 7 7 PHYSICS 201 — ELECTRIC CIRCUITS (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Physics 200, Mathematics 230, 200. Mathematics 235 is a pre- or co-requisite. Physics 211 must be taken concurrently. The study of electric and magnetic fields; fundamentals of a.c. theory; LR, R C . L R C circuits; resonance; mechanical analogs; forced and damped oscillations. Not offered in 77/78. PHILOSOPHY 211 — METAPHYSICS AND EPISTEMOLOGY (S) (3,0,1) A continuation of Philosophy 210 Not offered in 77/78. 90 PHYSICS 210 — PHYSICS LABORATORY I (F) (1,3,0) Pre-requisite: as for Physics 200, which must be taken concurrently. A weekly three-hour lab in mathematical methods, electrical measurements and optics. POLITICAL SCIENCE 101 — CONTEMPORARY IDEOLOGIES (F,S,SU) (3,0,1) PHYSICS 211 — PHYSICS LABORATORY II (S) (1,3,0) A n introduction to the implicit and explicit political ideas exp r e s s e d in the political process. The course examines the sources, adaptions, and practitioners of contemporary ideologies including Liberalism, Conservatism, Fascism, Social Democracy and Marxism-Leninism (Communism). Pre-requisite: as for Physics 201, which must be taken concurrently. POLITICAL SCIENCE 120 — A weekly three-hour lab in electron dymanics, electricity, and electronics. PHYSICS 220 — MECHANICS I (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: P h y s i c s 110, Mathematics Mathematics 230 is a pre- or co-requisite. 113 and 114. Elementary mechanics of particles using calculus, viscous forces, accelerated frames of reference. This course, together with Physics 221, is required for students majoring in physics and recommended for students majoring in mathematics or computer science. PHYSICS 221 — MECHANICS II AND SPECIAL RELATIVITY (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Physics 220, Mathematics 230, 200. Mathematics 235 is a recommended co-requisite. A continuation of Physics 220 to rigid body dynamics and central forces, orbits. A n introduction to special relativity using space-time. Political Science PUBLIC POLICY (F) (3,0,1) This course will look at the structure and organization of the administrative branch of the government at all three levels. It will examine the role and function of regulatory bodies and tribunals in the area of citizen interactions with the administrative branch. v POLITICAL SCIENCE 199 — INTRODUCTION TO LABOUR RELATIONS (F.S) (3,0,1) N.B. — This course is specially d e s i g n e d for the Administrative Science and Office Technology students. This course is part of the Labour Studies Program. This course deals with trade unions in Canada in an historical and current context. The course investigates the methods of settling industrial disputes, e.g., collective bargaining, grievance procedures, mediation, strikes and lock-outs. Included is an analysis of federal and provincial labour legislation. POLITICAL SCIENCE 200 — CANADIAN GOVERNMENT (F) (3,0,1) A study of the processes, ideologies and government structures which make up the Canadian political reality. One section of this course may be run on an independent study basis. POLITICAL SCIENCE 201 — INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS (F,S) (3,0,1) A study of aspects of global conflict and world politics. The course provides students with the background necessary for an understanding of sources of power, techniques of wielding influence and the formulation of foreign policy. The approach to the course will be by case studies: origins of the C o l d War, decolonization, formation of the United Nations, local and global wars, international organizations, international trade, resource crisis, detente, and disarmament. POLITICAL SCIENCE 202 — GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS OF BRITISH COLUMBIA (S) (3,0,1) This course will examine the government structure and political process of British Columbia. One section of this course may be run on an independent study basis. Psychology POLITICAL SCIENCE 100 — COMPARATIVE GOVERNMENT (F,S,SU) (3,0,1) A n introduction to the elements of government and politics in a comparative perspective with the role of the executive, legislature, bureaucracy, and the judiciary, as well as the role of the citizen and his or her socialization studied in various countries. POLITICAL SCIENCE 100 — SPL COMPARATIVE G O V E R N MENT (F.S.SU) (3,0,1) A self p a c e d learning course equivalent in content to Political Science 100 open to any student but designed to be of particular value to those students who are unable to attend the Lynnmour C a m p u s or a satellite centre on a regular basis. Two visits to the Lynnmour C a m p u s or other satellite centres will be required of all registered students; these visits to be arranged by the student and instructor Students interested in psychology should d i s c u s s their plans with members of the department or with an advisor from Student Services. At present a student may transfer up tp six onesemester courses to local universities or colleges. Psychology 100 is a pre-requisite for all psychology courses. It is recommended that students who plan to s p e c i a l i z e in psychology at the university take Psychology 100 and 101. P S Y C H O L O G Y 100 — INTRODUCTION T O P S Y C H O L O G Y Religious Studies (F,S) (3,0,1) A course designed to expose the student, to the discipline of psychology, using a problem-centered basis. The course will look at such areas as growing up, mental health, altered states of consciousness, liberation and oppression, sexuality, intelligence and personality. Relevant psychological concepts will be brought in to aid in an understanding of these social issues. Religious Studies courses offered at Capilano College have transfer credit at all universities in British Columbia. Students who wish to concentrate on one facet of religion or one religious tradition are encouraged to make an appointment with the instructor for enrollment under special arrangements. P S Y C H O L O G Y 101 — BEHAVIOURAL THEORY (F,S) (3,0,1) RELIGIOUS STUDIES 102 — INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY O F RELIGION (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Psychology 100 This course presents a theoretical examination of basic concepts in psychology. Included in the readings and discussions will be material from such areas as sensation, perception, learning, motivation, emotion, and developmental psychology. P S Y C H O L O G Y 200 — An introduction to the study of religion that will attempt to give students an appreciation of the nature and function of religion and in the discipline of Religious Studies. Topics will include theories of religious experience, the need for religion, and religion as ultimate concern. Topics d i s c u s s e d will be presented through contemporary literary works. Course format will include lectures (where appropriate), discussions and seminars as well as guest speakers and visits to religious institutions. SOCIAL P S Y C H O L O G Y (F,S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Psychology 100 A study of the dynamics and effect of groups on individual human behaviour. The course entails a project-oriented look at such topics as attitudes and attitude-change, group processes, leadership, perception, and an introduction to humanistic psychology RELIGIOUS STUDIES 103 — INTRODUCTION STUDY O F RELIGION II (S) (3,0,1) A continuation of Religious Studies 102. TO THE Focus will be on six specific themes — free will, salvation, alienation, secularism, church, myth — and how each of these is portrayed in the major religious traditions of man. Readings will include contemporary religious and literary writings and selections from religious texts such as the Bible, Koran, Bhagavad Gita, Tao Te Ching, etc. C o u r s e will include guest speakers and field trips to various religious services. P S Y C H O L O G Y 201 — GROUP DYNAMICS (F,S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Psychology 100 A study of the behaviour of people in small groups, including research methods, verbal and non-verbal communication, interaction dynamics, interpersonal influence and perception, sensitivity and encounter groups, group therapy for normals, and contemporary theories of human interaction. The student will have an opportunity intellectually to explore the dynamics of small groups, and to experience what goes on when he interacts with others. N o pre-requisite. RELIGIOUS STUDIES 200 — RELIGIONS O F THE WEST (F) (3,0,1) An investigation and analysis of the religions of the West: Judaism, Christianity and Islam. Emphasis will be on the origins and contemporary beliefs, rites, and forms of worship in each of the three religions dealing with the ultimate concerns of man. Course will include guest speakers and field trips to religious services. No pre-requisite. P S Y C H O L O G Y 204 — DEVELOPMENTAL P S Y C H O L O G Y (F) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Psychology 100 A study of the child's development from infancy to adolescence, including the development of social behaviour, personality, language and cognitive processes. Students will be encouraged to do research projects and observations. RELIGIOUS STUDIES 201 — RELIGIONS OF THE EAST (S) P S Y C H O L O G Y 205 — T H E P S Y C H O L O G Y O F AGING (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Psychology 100 A course dealing with the psychological development of the individual from early adulthood to death, with emphasis on intellectual and personality changes, and the social context of aging. A s well as being exposed to basic research in the area, students will be encouraged to develop an empathic understanding of the aging process through such means as community projects. (3,0,1) An investigation of the religions of India: Hinduism, Jainism, Sikhism, Buddhism; and interaction of Buddhism with Taoism and Confucianism in China; and the development of Japanese religious traditions including Shintoism and Zen Buddhism. Attention will be paid to the origins, development and contemporary beliefs of these religions with particular emphasis on specific themes s u c h as suffering, revelation, salvation and existence. Course will include guest speakers and field trips to religious services. No pre-requisite. P S Y C H O L O G Y 220 — THEORY OF PERSONALITY (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Psychology 100 A study of the various theories of personality from psychoanalytical theory to learning theory. Included will be the ideas of Freud, Fromm, Rogers, Maslow and others. Concepts to be considered will include the development of personality, and the structure and dynamics of personality. The course will include consideration of theoretical problems, and students will become familiar with empirical research in the area. RELIGIOUS STUDIES 210 — THE BIBLE: OLD TESTAMENT (F) (3,0,10) A team-taught course between members of the Religious Studies and English departments. Focus will be on an examination of the O l d Testament, Law, Prophets and Writings through historical, theological and literary perspectives, and how specific Old Testament texts have influenced contemporary and subsequent literature through the ages. Format will include lectures, discussions and small seminars. N o pre-requisite. P S Y C H O L O G Y 222 — ABNORMAL (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Psychology 100 RELIGIOUS STUDIES 211 — THE BIBLE: NEW TESTAMENT P S Y C H O L O G Y (F,S) (S) (3,0,1) A continuation of Religious Studies 210 that will focus on the New Testament writings. Topics will include J e s u s ' life and teaching, the formation of the Early Church and Christian theology and of specific themes that have influenced subsequent literature of the West. Some literature (especially contemporary) will be studied. A study of the various models and perspectives for viewing patterns and treatment of abnormal behaviour. Included will be an examination of the research as to how the medical model, behaviouristic school, humanistic school and interpersonal school view normal and abnormal behaviour. The course will also focus on the historical and contemporary approaches to treatment. No pre-requisite. 92 RECREATION 157 — SKILLS DEVELOPMENT (S) (1.5.3..5) This course is designed to broaden student's existing proficiencies in outdoor recreation skills, to develop leadership capabilities, safety consciousness in wilderness settings, a n d ecological appreciation of winter wilderness. Recreation R E C R E A T I O N 159 — OUTDOOR RECREATION A D MINISTRATION (S) (3,0,1) Note: This course is open to recreation practitioners in the field. A study of general business practices in the operation of the various outdoor recreation facilities, such as record-keeping, budgeting, accounting, purchasing, advertising, and concession agreements, liabilities, laws and statutes governing parks and recreation agencies. RECREATION 160 — PHYSICAL FITNESS IN THEORY AND PRACTICE (S,SU) (3,0,1) An overview of the constituents of physical fitness in which the following topics are dealt with: What is physical fitness? What are its physiological determinants? How can physical fitness be achieved and maintained? Weight control, physiological changes resulting from training and exercise; tests for physical fitness; designing fitness programs. RECREATION 161 — WILDERNESS BACKPACKING I (SU,F) (3,0,1) An introduction to the skills of summer hiking and camp crafts in wilderness areas. Emphasis will be placed on leadership development in organization, safety and group assessment. Topics will include: a c c e s s to wilderness areas, equipment, first aid and survival kits, trip planning and organization, navigation, camp crafts, hiking on difficult terrain, and wilderness ecology. RECREATION 162 — WILDERNESS CANOEING I (SU) (3,0,1) RECREATION 150 — OUTDOOR RECREATION AREAS (F) (3,2,1) Weather, climate and related vegetation and soil features as recreational factors, land use and planning techniques, types of outdoor recreation areas, surveying techniques, orienteering. R E C R E A T I O N 151 — VIRONMENT (S) (3,2,1) OUTDOOR RECREATION An introduction to the skills, techniques and knowledge of basic paddling in open canoes. Most of the course time is spent in canoes in water up to grade two. Overnight trip(s) are also included. Students will be expected to swim in turbulent waters with clothes on. Where applicable students will work towards the basic instructor level of Canoe Sport British Columbia. C . S . B . C . instructors and instructional format will b e used throughout the course. EN- Geomorphology and cartographic techniques related to outdoor recreation, introduction to mapping and remote sensing techniques, environmental planning, land inventory techniques. RECREATION 152 — INTRODUCTION RECREATION (F) (3,0,1) TO RECREATION 163 — WILDERNESS FIRST AID I (F,S) (3,0,1) This course, incorporating the St. John Ambulance Standard First Aid, is adapted specifically to problems of first aid in the Wilderness setting Due to this special adaptation, the course has been extended from the normally required ten lectures to fourteen lectures including classes in wilderness areas. Special emphasis is given to topics of hypothermia, frostbite, and emergency evacuation. OUTDOOR A brief historical overview of the development of recreation. Nature and scope of outdoor recreation in relation to modern leisure, nature of supply and demand, demand analysis as a planning tool, concepts and philosophies of parks management, outdoor recreation resource perception, psychological nature of outdoor recreation, e x p e r i e n c e and behaviour, outdoor recreation legislation, carrying capacities of wildlands, land use conflict, multiple u s e policies, inventory techniques. RECREATION 153 — (3,0,1) RECREATION 164 — (3,0,1) WILDERNESS NORDIC SKIING I (S) This is an introductory course d e s i g n e d to give students an initial exposure to winter environments on cross-country skis and snowshoes The course includes both a lecture and field trip series with emphasis on outdoor activity. Lecture topics are on equipment; waxing, clothing, geographic features, fitness, nutrition and safety. Skill levels will reflect C.A.N.S.I. instructional formats. WORK LEISURE AND SOCIETY (S) Overview of the functional roles of work and leisure in various cultural contexts. Evolution of leisure behaviour in western society, the protestant work ethic, utilitarianism, lifestyle-based variation in work and leisure, modern concepts of work and leisure, nature of stress, sociological and psychological perspectives in work and leisure, current trends in leisure, leisure counselling, prognostications for the future. RECREATION (3,2,1) 166 — ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION (F) A n introduction to the philosophies and concepts of e n vironmental education and life-space evaluation. Students are encouraged to develop a questioning attitude in reviewing individual and group response to contemporary and postcontemporary environmental phenomena. Baseline interpretive skills are promoted which include such features of the British Columbia landscape as flora and fauna, astronomy, geormorphology and urban conditions. Students will gain insight into the use of activity vehicles such as bicycling, canoeing, hiking, and cross-country skiing. RECREATION 154 — OUTDOOR RECREATION FACILITIES (F) (3,0,1) The course will deal with the structure of delivery systems and the physical facilities which operate to deal with these delivery systems. Although the course will include a general overview in these topics, there will be an emphasis placed on outdoor systems and facilities. 93 RECREATION 170 — WILDERNESS RECREATION (F) (3,0,1) RECREATION 259 — NOTE: This course is open to the public. Students will be charged an activities fee. An introductory course in wilderness recreation, d e s i g n e d as an overview of the components which make for a safe and comfortable experience in a wilderness area at different seasons of the year for different activities. The course d i s c u s s e s the interrelationship of people's needs and the environment. General topics will include leadership, navigation, general geography, first aid and ethics. Wilderness activities will include backpacking, camping, canoeing and cross-country skiing. Previous experience in the activities is not necessary. To develop s p e c i a l i z e d skills related to the students' e m ployment goals. Students will upgrade skills in wilderness photography and another outdoor recreation skill of their own choosing. RECREATION 261 — Note: This course is open to the public. The course will cover basic principles of equipment, safety, glacier travel, and climbing on rock, ice, and snow. Although the course is primarily designed for the beginner, it is flexible enough to cater to people wishing to improve their skills beyond the novice level. Lectures are in the evening, and field experience on weekends. NOTE: A n additional fee will be levied to cover field trip ex- RECREATION RECREATION E C O L O G Y (F) (3,2,1) A study of plant and animal ecology, land-man relationships, conservation theories and ecological principles as a basis to recreation land management. R E C R E A T I O N 251 — OUTDOOR RECREATION VIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT (S) (3,2,1) WILDERNESS CANOEING II (SU) RECREATION 263 — WILDERNESS FIRST AID II (F,S) (3,0,1) EN- Pre-requisite: Recreation 163. Emphasis will be placed on the application of first aid techniques in Wilderness settings under conditions of isolation, where medical assistance is distant and where there are problems of evacuation. Some practical sessions will be deferred to field trips taken in second year activity courses in all three programs. Habitat management for fish and wildlife, environmental carrying capacities, land u s e practices, land classification, ethics and values implicit in recreational planning. RECREATION 254 — OUTDOOR RECREATION PROGRAM PLANNING (F) (3,0,1) This course will explore the program planning function in outdoor recreation. Topics will include: the problems of planning programs in existing delivery systems, seeking ways to solve these present problems, new philosophies to consider in programming, and seeking alternative and new methods of program planning in outdoor recreation. RECREATION 255 — OUTDOOR RECREATION 262 — (3,0,1) This course is designed to further develop paddling skill, personal experience, teaching ability and leadership quality. Trips will range from day to multi-day events. In addition there will be a workshop series to include canoe construction and repair, landscape interpretation and first aid simulation. Where applicable the course format and instructors will be taken from Canoe Sport British Columbia. penses. OUTDOOR WILDERNESS BACKPACKING II (SU) (3,0,1) The course objective is to further involve students with wilderness backpacking skills in an atmosphere of safety, enjoyment and environmental understanding. Emphasis will be directed towards the development of leadership experience as it applies to individual and group requirements in wilderness settings. Special attention will be focused on survival techniques, solo experience, first aid, environmental perception study and special group study. RECREATION 171 — MOUNTAINEERING I (SU) (3,0,1) RECREATION 250 — SKILLS DEVELOPMENT (F) (1.5,3,-5) RECREATION 264 — WILDERNESS NORDIC SKIING II (S) (3,0,1) This course is designed to further develop skiing skill, personal experience, teaching ability and leadership quality. Lectures and field trips will include a variety of informational seminars and teaching experiences concerned with crosscountry skiing. C.A.N.S.I. instructional standards will be promoted throughout the duration of this course. PRACTICUM (S) (6,0,2) The practicum is designed to integrate classroom theory with working experience in the field. Students will arrange with the faculty supervisor to spend five weeks in an acceptable agency placement and will be responsible to a specific agency supervisor. Students will be provided with terms of reference for the practicum experience. Student work performance and potential will be evaluated by the faculty and agency supervisor. RECREATION 271 — MOUNTAINEERING II (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Mountaineering I, Federation of Mountain Clubs Basic Mountaineering course, equivalent training and experience acceptable to instructor. Students should expect to take a skills test prior to course commencement. The c o u r s e will d e a l with the p r i n c i p l e s and techniques of Mountaineering leadership up to and including an intermediate level on both snow and ice, and on rock. Note: A n additional fee will be received to cover field trip expenses. RECREATION 256 — SKILLS DEVELOPMENT RESIDENTIAL C A M P MANAGEMENT (F) (1.5,3,-5) Students will be required to attend a residential camp exe x p e r i e n c e . Budgeting, planning, facility operations a n d maintenance of residential campus and outdoor education centres; financing a n d b o o k k e e p i n g problems; associations, regulations, legal liability; programming, public relations, crisis management, brochure design and marketing approaches. RECREATION 360 — L O G BOOK EXPERIENCE (PRACTICUM) (S.SU) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: First two years of the program in one of the three specialty areas. Students will keep detailed logs of all wilderness trips which they organize and lead for one year period. The logs will be evaluated upon completion of the practicum period, and successful completion of the course will lead to Wilderness Leadership Certificate. RECREATION 257 — AN INTRODUCTION TO L A N D S C A P E DESIGN AND TECHNIQUES (F) (3,2,2/3) History of landscape design; modern philosophies and concepts; ecological, geographical and social considerations; site analysis and planning; nature of landscaping materials, plant materials, elements of good design; analysis of design; economics of landscape architecture. 94 FASHION 152 — FASHION WORK EXPERIENCE I (F) (3,0,1) A structured work experience within an approved firm in a business area related to fashion retailing, such as selling or designing apparel, fashion promotion, etc. Includes a weekly seminar which incorporates on-the-job knowledge with various speakers from related fashion retailing areas. The work experience continues through four terms and is coordinated and supervised by a College Fashion instructor. Retail Fashion FASHION 154 — PERSONAL DEVELOPMENT FASHION E M P L O Y E E (F) (3,0,1) FOR THE This course deals with the basic grooming procedures, a p propriate cosmetics, figure control (exercise), a professional wardrobe, nutrition, self-awareness and inner confidence. It considers the service of the public and a sensitivity to interpersonal relations. FASHION 155 — BASIC CLOTHING METHODS (F) (3,0,1) (OPEN) CONSTRUCTION A course for students with little or no sewing background. It will include pattern layout, machine operation, current construction techniques and fitting of garments for all ages. Lab fee: $10.00 FASHION 170 — (3,0,1) (OPEN) HISTORY O F WESTERN FASHION (F) A survey of fashions from the days of Ancient Egypt to the present. Investigation of major cultural forces that influence change and analysis of current fashions to discern influence of the past cultures. FASHION 172 — FABRICS FOR T H E FASHION INDUSTRY (F) (3,0,1) (OPEN) A survey of the development and use of fashion fabrics including fibre identification; grouping of fibre characteristics; methods of fibre construction and finishing. Constant relation of these factors to the effect on development of the design, serviceability and care of fabrics. Investigation of textile labelling; legislation; promotion selling; a n d the development of the Canadian textile industry. L a b fee: $10.00 FASHION (3,0,1) 173 — HISTORY O F FURNITURE (OPEN) (S) A survey of furniture from the caveman to the space age with interrelation to the History of Western Fashion course and to the Introduction to Interior Design. FASHION 176 — CLOTHING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION I (F) (3,0,1) (OPEN) Basic principles and techniques of garment d e s i g n and production; involvement in original design, pattern making, and garment construction; development of skill in solving fitting problems. Market survey of design and construction standards. Lab fee: $10.00 FASHION 150 — FASHION AND T H E CONSUMER (OPEN) (S) (3,0,1) , A n examination of fashion from the viewpoint of the consumer; human behaviour and consumer beahviour in relation to clothing are d i s c u s s e d . FASHION 177 — CLOTHING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION II (S) (3,0,1) (OPEN) Pre-requisite: Retail Fashion 1 76 or written permission of the Instructor. FASHION 151 — TEXTILE AND APPAREL MARKETING (S) (3,0,1) (OPEN) A continuation of individual designing and development of garments, comparison of construction techniques and design in relation to retail value; discussion of current d e s i g n and designers. L a b fee: $10. An overview of the total marketing channel for textiles and apparel products, from product development to retail consumer distribution. 95 FASHION 251 — FASHION PROMOTION (S) (3,0,1) (OPEN) The overall study of methods of fashion promotions. The specific study of planning fashion promotions, including theme selection according to influencing factors such as age-group appeal, promotional timing, budgets and merchandise content. Sociology FASHION 252 — FASHION WORK EXPERIENCE II (S) (3,0,1) A structured work experience within an approved firm in a business area related to fashion retailing, such as selling or designing apparel, fashion promotion, etc. Includes a weekly seminar which incorporates on-the-job knowledge with various speakers from related fashion retailing areas. The work experience continues through four terms and is coordinated and supervised by a C o l l e g e Fashion instructor. FASHION 256 — FASHION MODELLING (S) (3,0,1) (OPEN) Fundamentals of poise, carriage and sense of style; individual attention to determine student's best personal qualities; makeup, hair styles, apparel selection. Live and photographic modelling techniques before an audience, such as fashion show modelling, professional makeup. Lab fee: $10.00 FASHION 257 — MERCHANDISE DISPLAY (F) (3,0,1) (OPEN) Techniques and theory of merchandise display; arrangement and display of merchandise for educational commercial purpose. FASHION 258 — NON-TEXTILES AND ACCESSORIES (OPEN) (S) (3,0,1) A study of the importance of accessory items to the total fashion picture, (i.e., jewelry, hats, wigs, cosmetics, handbags, gloves), marketing trends and merchandising techniques for these products. FASHION (OPEN) 259 — FASHION All courses in Sociology are geared to help the student comprehend personal and global events in a relevant and meaningful way. Sociology should thus help the student in his/her endeavour to cope with our increasingly complex society. A major in sociology leads to work in the following areas: social work, teaching, probation work, criminology, industrial s o c i o l o g y , c o m m u n i c a t i o n s , m e d i a , government research, and related areas. Students registering for Sociology courses should note that course material is, generally of a cumulative nature. Those who intend to major should complete Sociology 100 and 101. All 200-level courses will provide the Simon Fraser transfer student with assigned credit toward 2nd-year courses. The U.B.C. transfer student will be provided with unassigned credit toward a major. MERCHANDISING (F) (3,0,1) A study of the principles of retail buying and selling of fashions; study of merchandising functions such as pricing, inventory control, turnover, and "open-to-buy." FASHION 260 — FASHION WORK EXPERIENCE III (F) (3,0,1) Same as Retail Fashion 152 and 252. SOCIOLOGY 100 — FASHION 261 — FASHION WORK EXPERIENCE (3,0,1) Same as Retail Fashion 152, 2 5 2 and 260. FASHION 264 — INTRODUCTION TO INTERIOR DESIGN (S) (3,0,1) (OPEN) Fundamentals of design; study of textiles, colour, wall finishes, window treatments, floor coverings and accessories; practice of room-planning through use of floor plans and room decorating by combining furniture fabrics and accessories. Designing of a "boutique" or office to 1/4" scale with renderings. FASHION 265 — FRENCH DESIGN (S) (3,0,1) (OPEN) DRAPING SOCIAL STRUCTURES (F) (3,0,1) The course systematically covers major problems and topics of concern to anyone who wishes to begin to understand, and come to terms with the modern world in a personally and sociologically relevant way. The basic theme of the course is that we are, to a greater extent than generally imagined, produced, structured and run by the "social machine." This "social machine" comprises institutions such as the family, religion, inequality, mass media, education as well as rules, customs, laws, etc. This course looks at how we are influenced by this " m a c h i n e " and, in turn, how we react to that influence. NOTE: Sociology 100 and 101 transfer together as a unit to Simon Fraser University. IV (S) SOCIOLOGY 101 — SOCIETY (S) (3,0,1) CONCEPTS AND THEORIES OF With current social conditions in mind, this course analyses the general development of sociological thought in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. We will look at the two major approaches to understanding society (functionalism and conflict theory) and employ these approaches to analyse items of current interest. NOTE: Sociology 100 and 101 transfer together as a unit to Simon Fraser University. AND ADVANCED Pre-requisite: Retail Fashion 176, 177 or written permission of the Instructor. » An advanced course in the French method of draping fabric onto a form to produce a finished garment. Includes a further examination of the flat pattern method of clothing construction. Lab f e e : $ 1 0 . 0 0 96 SOCIOLOGY 200 — CANADIAN SOCIETY (F) (3,0,1) An introduction to the study of Canadian society, including an' analysis of the major Canadian institutions studied on a national basis, with special emphasis on the dynamics of change within each. Students may elect to take this course by independent study combined with Canadian Politics (Political Science 200). SOCIOLOGY (3,0,1) 201 — BRITISH COLUMBIA Spanish SOCIETY (S) An advanced sociological approach to the dynamics of Canadian society, with special emphasis on British Columbia. Close attention will be given to social movements and the way in which these movements influenced the development of British Columbia politics. Students may elect to take this course by independent study in combination with Political Science 201. SOCIOLOGY 222 — SOCIOLOGY O F THE ARTS (F) (3,0,1) A musical, artistic and sociological study of creative e n deavours of western civilization from cinema through painting, music and sculpture to Folk Art. Lectures are illustrated with both pictures and music. The course will relate the various art forms to the social context in which they exist; hence, it will develop an understanding of the interrelationships between ideas (expressed as Art), social institutions and social behaviour. The course is intended as well to be a musical and visual repast, and as much effort will be spent in developing the students' perceptual capabilities as in providing her/him with a vocabulary of possible social meanings. S.F.U. SOCIOLOGY 211 — MEDIA AND SOCIETY (F) (3,0,1) An intensive and fascinating study of the relationship between a society's communication systems a s m e d i a a n d its technological, economic, and political base, its ideology, its behaviour patterns and its cultural life. This will encompass current forms of television, radio, magazines, all forms of a d vertisements, news production, and the movies. In addition, this course will provide students with an opportunity to understand some aspects of the technology and production of media in their Social implications. This course may be taken by itself or a s a complement to Sociology 222 — Sociology of the Arts. Transfer credit in process. SOCIOLOGY 223 — CURRENT SOCIAL ISSUES (S) (3,0,1) A study of social concerns and problems as perceived by ordinary people and by sociologists. This will involve an examination of social behaviour not usually seen as problematic (e.g., consumption patterns, militarism) as well as an analysis of issues generally raised under the heading of "deviant" behaviour, i.e., crime, drug abuse, prostitution, etc. We will also examine issues that are generally agreed to be problematic, such as population growth, poverty, under-development. Students who wish to proceed to S.F.U. and to pursue further courses in Spanish are reminded of the present equivalency standards. Elective credit will be given at S.F.U. for all Capilano College Spanish courses. Exemption from and placement in higher courses are determined by the results of a placement test or other assessment procedure. A s a result of the placement test, area credit may be granted which would count toward a major in Spanish. C o u r s e s which do not qualify toward a major will be awarded elective credit only. U.B.C. At U . B . C , present equivalent standards equate Spanish 100 and 101 with Spanish 100; Spanish 200 and 201 with Spanish 200. The student who plans a major in Spanish may enter U.B.C.'s Spanish when he completes the Capilano courses. Note: All courses in Spanish include a total of five and one-half hours of instruction per week, made up of three hours of lectures; one and one-half hours of laboratory practice; and one hour of conversational practice with a native speaker. Native speakers of French, German, or Spanish who wish to take first or second-year courses in these languages -must consult with the Language Co-ordinator first. University rules governing such students differ within departments, but the Language Co-ordinator has correspondence dealing with matters relevant to credit transfer and point of entry; in order to avoid any misunderstanding, such students are invited to d i s c u s s these problems with the Language Co-ordinator prior to enrollment. SPANISH 100 — FIRST YEAR SPANISH (F) (3,1.5,1) A basic course in the oral and written language, with oral e m phasis on grammar, composition and conversation. SPANISH 101 — SOCIOLOGY 210 — SOCIOLOGY O F UNDER DEVELOPMENT (F) (3,0,1) FIRST YEAR SPANISH (S) (3,1,1.5) Pre-requisite: Spanish 100. This course should be taken, whenever possible, in the term following Spanish 100. A continuation of the work of Spanish 100. A study of the major theories of under development, empirical studies of under development, social and cultural responses to under development, and the inter-relationship of social institutions in and between the " d e v e l o p e d " and "underd e v e l o p e d " societies. This course will provide students with an opportunity to better understand the social, economic, and political causes and effects of under development. Both sociological and " n o n sociological" literature on the meaning and effects of "under development" will be considered. This course may be taken by itself or as a complement to Sociology 223, Current Social Issues. Transfer credit in process. 97 SPANISH 200 — S E C O N D YEAR SPANISH (F) (3,1.5,1) Pre-requisite: Spanish 100/101 or a placement test. A continuation of the work of Spanish 101 with emphasis on oral discussion of literary texts. SPANISH 201 — SECOND YEAR SPANISH (S) (3,1.5,1) Pre-requisite: Spanish 200. This course should be taken, whenever possible, in the term following Spanish 200. A continuation of the work of Spanish 200. THEATRE ARTS 100 — PRACTICAL ARTS OF THEATRE I (F) (3,3,1) A workshop course in the practical arts of the theatre. The student will be introduced to the training process of the actor. The process includes strengthening and disciplining the voice, relaxing and controlling the body, and using these tools to discover a creative approach to dramatization. The student will study basic mime and mask. Improvisation will be studied as a tool for acting rather than as a product. The emphasis of the first term will be on P R O C E S S . THEATRE ARTS 101 — PRACTICAL ARTS OF THEATRE II (S) (3,3,1) A continuation of Theatre Arts 100, however the student need not have taken the previous course to qualify. This course is designed to give the student a more intense background into the training process of the actor. Voice and body work will be used in regards to employing them as ways of expression and communication. The student will become familiar with the various methods of creating a role. The student will use improvisation to break down scenes. Much of the work done in this term will be emphasizing the importance of P R O C E S S INTO PERFORMANCE. THEATRE ARTS 120 — INTRODUCTION TO THEATRE I (F) (3,0,1) ^ An in-depth study of the theatre and its plays from the Greeks to the Renaissance. The course will include the analysis of selected plays of this period, focusing upon the development of the stage and the production means. The student will also study the period in which this type of theatre was practiced alongside the other arts and history of the times. Not offered in 7 7 / 7 8 . THEATRE ARTS 121 — INTRODUCTION TO THEATRE II (S) (3,0,1) Pre-requisite: Theatre 120 or written permission of the Instructor. A continuation of Introduction to Theatre 120, covering the plays, the development of the theatre, and the history of the period from the Restoration to the beginnings of Realism (approximately 1900). Not offered in '77/78. THEATRE ARTS 200 — THE PRACTICAL SIDE OF THEATRE (F) (3,3,1) / Pre-requisite: Theatre Arts 101, Women's Studies 193, " C " grade or better, or by special permission of the instructor. An advanced course in the technical and practical aspects of performance. The student will study stage management, lighting design and execution, set design and construction, costume work, and other areas of backstage work. The student will also become familiar with theatre etiquette and the line of authority in the different theatre formats. The student will now u s e the skills learned in the previous course and apply them to the various styles of dramatization. X-he student will study and execute scenes from Greek Tragedy up to and including the Absurdists Plays. The student will also study the proper ways of doing auditions and compiling a resume. The emphasis of this course will be on FINAL P R O C E S S E S TOWARDS A PERFORMANCE L E V E L THEATRE ARTS 201 — REHEARSAL AND PERFORMANCE (S) (3,3,1) The Theatre Arts Program is designed to give the student a well-rounded and disciplined .approach to theatre. Beginning with the disciplines of voice and body, the program will cover almost every aspect of theatre including, in the final year, Per-i formance. Pre-requisite: Theatre Arts 200 or by special permission of the instructor. During this term the student will rehearse and perform at least two One Act Plays and at least one Full Length Play for an audience. All the work done during this term will be focused on the P E R F O R M A N C E L E V E L . Theatre courses at Capilano College have transfer credit at U.B.C. 98 Women's Studies WOMEN'S STUDIES 101 — WOMEN AND WORK (F) (3,0,1) This course will focus on the changing work roles of women and related changes in social institutions and cultural roles. Biological, social, and economic b a s e s for the sexual division of labour will be examined. Particular attention will be paid to the effects of the industrial revolution, and to present trends in industrialized societies — especially to increasing participation of women in the paid labour force and effects on work within the home. Canadian women's reponses to changing work roles will be studied. WOMEN'S STUDIES 104 — CONTEMPORARY CANADIAN WOMEN WRITERS (F) (3,0,1) ENGLISH- A discussion-oriented course intended to broaden and intensify the student's awareness of and appreciation of the literature in English being produced by Canadian women writers today, with emphasis on the current, local, West Coast literary scene; to examine and d i s c u s s the portraits of women, and of women's circumstances revealed in these writings; in addition to students' reading and discussion of the literature, there will be class visits for readings and discussion by several prominent West Coast Canadian women writers. Not to be offered in 1977-78. WOMEN'S STUDIES 105 — CONTEMPORARY CANADIAN WOMEN WRITERS (F) (3,0,1) FRENCH- A discussion-oriented course intended to broaden and intensify the student's awareness of an appreciation of the literature being produced by French-Canadian women writers today, and, with emphasis on Q u e b e c , to bring home the reality of the extensive contribution of women to the high level of the contemporary achievements in French-Canadian literature. WOMEN'S STUDIES 106 — CONTEMPORARY STATES WOMEN WRITERS (S) (3,0,1) UNITED A discussion-oriented course intended to broaden a n d intensify the student's awareness of and appreciation of the literature being produced by U.S. women writers today; and to examine and d i s c u s s the portraits of women, and of women's circumstances revealed in these writings; and to further e n courage women interested in creative artistic production to pursue their efforts and to encourage other women to d o the same, in light of the achievements of these women writers. Not to be offered in 1977-78. WOMEN'S STUDIES 107 — CONTEMPORARY EUROPEAN WOMEN WRITERS (IN TRANSLATION) (S) (3,0,1) S.F.U. Students who wish to pursue further courses in Women's Studies are reminded that S.F.U. has instituted a minor programme in Women's Studies. Our W.S. 100 has been assigned credit for W.S. 202 at S.F.U., our W.S. 110, 112, 120, and 121 have been assigned unassigned Women's Studies credit; our W.S. 104, 105, 106, 106, 150, and 151 have been assigned General Elective credit. < U.B.C. A discussion-oriented course intended to broaden and intensify the student's awareness and appreciation of the literature being produced by a wide variety of women writers today in Europe (especially France and Germany) and to e n courage students to become more aware of and responsive to the creative process as it is exercised by these authors within the particular circumstances common to women's role in our western society, as well as those circumstances particular to specific cultures in western society. Unassigned university transfer credit is being sought. U. VIC. W.S. 104, 105, 106, 107 have been assigned Hum (100 level) (1 1/2) each (a maximum of 3 units) to be r e - a s s e s s e d for 1977. WOMEN'S STUDIES 100 — STUDIES (F) (3,0,1) INTRODUCTION TO WOMEN'S This course will examine the status and role of women in Canadian Society. It will trace the development of sex role divisions in the family and other social institutions; examine the influence of education, media and art on the development of female role models. Differences in women's roles due to class, status, race and region will be d i s c u s s e d . WOMEN'S STUDIES 110 — WOMEN AND P S Y C H O L O G Y (F) (3,0,1) A psychological examination of sex-role definitions, their origins, development in childhood and maintenance in adult life. The course will examine the differences in life patterns between men and women and the effect these have on personality development and self-concept. It will include a critical examination of male and female consciousness and the extent to which these affect and determine potential for human growth and freedom. Reference will be made to major psychological schools of thought in terms of sexual bias. Non-sexist alternatives to present psychiatric practices will be explored. WOMEN'S STUDIES 112 — WOMEN AND RELIGION (S) (3,0,1) This course will examine the effect of Judaio-Christian thought on contemporary attitudes towards women. It will trace the development of female archetypes in biblical and early postbiblical literature, examining which of these archetypes have survived to present-day society. It will then look at Judaic Laws and Christian customs and the implications these have held in the past and the present for the status of women. Attention will be paid throughout to the interdependence of culture and religion. Not to be offered in 1977-78. WOMEN'S STUDIES 120 — WOMEN AND T H E PAST: AN HISTORICAL SURVEY (F) (3,0,1) A survey of the lives of women in previous eras. A n uncovering of women's participation in and contribution to the making of history Private lives as well as public political activities will be studied. The course will examine reasons behind the extent to which women have been " h i d d e n from history." Primary data will be collected from such sources as diaries, memoirs, letters, pictures, literary works, and oral interviews, capilano tape 88 WOMEN'S STUDIES 121 — WOMEN WESTERN SOCIETY (S) (3,0,1) AND POWER IN A n examination of concepts and definitions of power prevalent in Western Society and the relationship between power and powerlessness and figures of leadership and authority; how women exercise power and the current role of women in government and world affairs. A n exploration will be made into alternative avenues and structures of power, .e.g., collective, in the light of the experience of the Women's Movement. WOMEN'S STUDIES 150 — SOUND WORKSHOP FOR WOMEN (F,SU) (3,0,1) RESOURCES An introduction to sound resources for women interested in production techniques, including a working knowledge of audio systems, recording techniques, and basic communication devices. Synthesized sound will be explored. The creative aspects of women's productions will be e m p h a s i z e d . WOMEN'S STUDIES 151 — VISUAL WORKSHOP FOR WOMEN (S,SU) (3,0,1) RESOURCES A follow-up course to Women's Studies 150, with the e m phasis on visual media; film, television, and graphics. Film systems, stage lighting, and other visual aspects will be explored. The "traditional role" of women as portrayed in the visual media will be examined. The actual preparation of a film with the co-operation of an established film or television studio will be accomplished. Not offered in Summer of 1977 or Summer of 1978. WOMEN'S STUDIES 192 — WOMEN AND THEATRE (F) (3,0,1) A basic course on women and their influence on theatre. This course will include voice, mime, movement, improvisation and the application of these skills to explore the female experience and how it may be applied to the theatre. This class will allow women to study various types of female characters and their uniqueness through the use of monologues and scene studies. All dramatizations will be done in a studio atmosphere. There will be no public performance. WOMEN'S STUDIES 193 — WOMEN AND THEATRE (S) (3,0,1) A more advanced study of women and their role in theatre. This course will delve into the female image of the past and present. Playwrights and their concepts of womanliness and femininity will be analyzed and dramatized. "Script Study" will involve research into the various plays in order to reveal the attitudes concerning women throughout the years. 100 Index A. C O L L E G E CERTIFICATE 15 21 15 26 COLLEGE COUNCIL 4 COMMUNITY EDUCATION 51 26 27 27 29 28 29 29 COUNSELLING 17 C O U R S E CREDITS 15 A C A D E M I C DIFFICULTIES A C A D E M I C STUDIES/UNIVERSITY T R A N S F E R P R O G R A M ACCREDITATION OF STUDENTS ADMINISTRATIVE S C I E N C E A N D O F F I C E TECHNOLOGY PROGRAMS - Administrative Assistant - Bilingual Secretary - Legal Assistant - Office Technology - Para-Legal Studies - Public Relations - Secretarial ADMISSION - Howe Sound C o u r s e s - Language Requirement - Policy - Procedure - Vocational Programs 45 ART P R O G R A M - A d v a n c e d Art Studio Option - Art Education - Bachelor of Fine Arts Studio Program - Commercial Art - Crafts Program 30 32 30 30 31 31 A S S O C I A T E IN A R T S A N D S C I E N C E D I P L O M A 15 ATHLETICS 18 AUDIT STATUS 15 AWARDS 18 B. BASIC J O B R E A D I N E S S TRAINING (B.M.R.T.) 46 BASIC TRAINING A N D SKILL D E V E L O P M E N T (B.T.S.D.) 46 BLUE JAY BOUTIQUE 19 BOOKSTORE 19 BUSINESS M A N A G E M E N T PROGRAMS 33 - Accounting/Financial Management Computer Systems Management Evening and Extension Program Marketing Management C O U R S E DESCRIPTIONS 33 33 35 33 - Anthropology Art Biology Business Business Management Chemistry Commerce Communications Counselling Group Programs Economics Education English Fine Arts French General Studies Geography Geology German Health History Humanities Labour Studies Legal Studies Mathematics Media Music Philosophy Physics Political Science Psychology Recreation Religious Studies Retail Fashion Sociology Spanish Theatre Arts - Women's Studies 55 55 59 60 61 65 66 69 70 71 72 • 73 76 78 78 78 79 79 80 80 82 81 81 84 85 87 90 90 91 91 93 92 95 96 97 98 99 54 COURSE NUMBERING SYSTEM C. 15 C A L E N D A R FOR 1977-78 8 COURSE OVERLOAD REGULATIONS C A P I L A N O C O L L E G E — INTRODUCTION 3 C O U R S E VERIFICATION C A R E E R ALTERNATIVE P R O G R A M 46 CREDIT H O U R S CAREER PROGRAMS 2 C H A N G E IN C O U R S E S 1 6 C H A N G E O F N A M E OR A D D R E S S 1 6 16 15 D. 5 DEVELOPMENTALLY HANDICAPPED PROGRAM CHEMICAL PROGRAM AND E. EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION E M P L O Y M E N T ORIENTATION F O R W O M E N P R O G R A M METALLURGICAL TECHNOLOGY 44 E N G L I S H P L A C E M E N T TEST C O L L E G E ADMINISTRATION 4 EXEMPTION STANDING — C A R E E R 101 37 36 46 21 25 F. FACULTY FEES - Deferred - Policy - Schedule - Vocational Programs - R. REFUNDS - Deadline - Policy 5 14 14 14 14 45 14 REGISTRATION - Howe Sound Courses - Policy - A c a d e m i c Studies - Policy - Career/Vocational Programs - Procedure - Schedule Waiver for Senior Citizens 17 FINANCIAL 14 14 14 AID 12 12 12 12 12 13 16 FIRST AID REPEATING A C O U R S E FOCUS CANADA - B.C. Studies - Canada Studies FOOD SERVICES 19 S C I E N C E - G E N E R A L INFORMATION PROGRAM S. 24 SCIENCE TRANSFER REQUIREMENTS SELF-PACED LEARNING HOUR 22 STUDIES (SPL) STATUS O F S T U D E N T S BY P R O G R A M 16 16 16 16 16 GRADING - Appeal of Final Grades - Grade Point Average - "I" Grades - Statement of Grades H. HEALTH RETAIL F A S H I O N 15 F O U R T H INSTRUCTIONAL GENERAL 43 22 22 22 23 22 15 11 STUDENT NUMBER STUDENT RECORDS STUDENT RESPONSIBILITIES 16 17 17 SERVICES S T U D E N T S E R V I C E S & FACILITIES HIGH S C H O O L E Q U I V A L E N C Y HOWE SOUND EXAMINATIONS PROGRAM 17 STUDENT 19 SOCIETY 11 T. T R A N S C R I P T S OF M A R K S 12 T R A N S F E R TO A N D F R O M O T H E R INSTITUTIONS 19 V. VISITORS 15 VOCATIONAL BUSINESS P R O G R A M S - Business Office Upgrading - Commercial Bookkeeper - Commercial and Secretarial Upgrading 46 46 47 47 VOCATIONAL 45 I. IDENTIFICATION C A R D S INFOCENTRE INSTRUCTIONAL INFORMATION 15 INSTRUCTIONAL YEAR 15 16 21 & 25 L. 17 LEARNING ASSISTANCE CENTRE 18 LIBRARY SERVICES LIMITATIONS O F S P A C E LOST AND 17 WOMEN'S RESOURCE CENTRE 22 W O M E N ' S STUDIES M. MATHEMATICS 21 TUTORIAL R O O M MEDIA P R O D U C T I O N SERVICES MEDIA R E S O U R C E S P R O G R A M MUSIC P R O G R A M S - Commercial Music - Music Therapy - Music Transfer O. OUTDOOR RECREATION P R O G R A M S - Outdoor Recreation - Wilderness Leadership 18 38 39 39 40 39 41 41 42 P. PARKING 19 PLACEMENT 21 PLAGIARISM 18 PROVISIONAL STANDING 16 WITHDRAWAL FROM C O U R S E S 16 19 FOUND PROGRAMS W. 16 102 PROGRAM Campus Map 104